HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller V900R008C12

BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)
Issue Date 01 2010-05-20

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document provides the information on how to configure, modify, and verify the features on the Local Maintenance Terminal and the BSC6000 Local Maintenance Terminal.

Product Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name BSC BTS Product Model BSC6000 BTS3012 BTS3012AE BTS3006C BTS3002E DBS3036 BTS3036 BTS3036A DBS3900 GSM BTS3900 GSM BTS3900A GSM BTS3900B GSM BTS3900E GSM Product Version V900R008C12 V300R008 V300R008 V300R008 V300R008 V300R008 V300R008 V300R008 V300R008 V300R008 V300R008 V300R008 V300R008

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

About This Document

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l l

Technical support engineers Maintenance engineers

Organization
1 Changes in BSS Feature Configuration Guide (Based on MML) This describes the changes in the various versions of BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML). 2 Configuring the Multiband Network A multiband network consists of multiple frequency bands. The combined multiband network can increase the utilization of frequency resources on the radio network. 3 Configuring the Speech Version This describes how to configure the speech version on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 4 Configuring ALC Automatic level control (ALC) adjusts the gain of digital voice signals on the uplink and downlink every 20 ms and changes the amplitude of digital voice signals in static or dynamic mode. This keeps the voice level of the entire network in a predefined state, prevents the volume fluctuation of the two parties during a call, and reduces interference among the normal calls. 5 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation Acoustic echo cancellation (AEC) can decrease acoustic echo caused by the MS, thus improving the network quality and voice quality. 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Cell broadcast is a teleservice that periodically broadcasts messages to all the MSs in a specified area. With cell broadcast, the mobile network operators can provide special services for users. 7 Configuring Ciphering The ciphering algorithm encrypts the subscriber information such as the voice and data so that the information is securely transmitted on the Um interface. 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping With this feature, wanted signals are transmitted by switching a carrier among many frequencies according to the specified sequences. Frequency hopping involves RF hopping and baseband hopping.Frequency hopping is a spread-spectrum technology, which has the features such as resistance to interference, anti-attenuation, and high security. The application of frequency hopping in the GSM supresses the interference and increases the system capacity. 9 Configuring eMLPP The eMLPP is a supplementary service offered by the GSM system. The eMLPP service allows a subscriber to initiate calls with different priorities. The network side employs different channel
iv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

About This Document

assignment strategies for the subscribers according to the priorities. If the network is congested, the call with higher priority is served preferably. 10 Configuring Priority-Based Resource Reservation With priority-based resource reservation, the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for the high-priority users to ensure their QoS. By using this function, operators can provide services of different levels for users with different priorities, thus increasing the operators' revenues. 11 Configuring Network Support SAIC This describes how to configure the Network Support SAIC. The Single Antenna Interference Cancellation (SAIC) is a technique for restraining the co-channel interference and adjacentchannel interference. This technique is especially adopted in the single antenna scenario to reduce the interference on the reception of downlink signals. 12 Configuring Active Power Control This describes how to configure the active power control. After an MS accesses the network or an intra-BSC handover is performed successfully, the BSC controls the uplink and downlink power so that the MS and the BTS transmit signals at the proper power. In this way, power control can be performed in time. Through the active power control, the system interference is reduced, the QoS is improved, and the power consumption of the BTS and the MS is decreased. 13 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling With the robust air interface signalling function, when the radio quality is poor, the antiinterference capability of the FACCH and SACCH is improved through repeated sending of the FACCH and SACCH frames. In this manner, the MS and BSC can receive the signaling messages more successfully. The robust air interface signalling function includes repeated sending of the FACCH frames in the downlink and the repeated sending of the SACCH frames in the uplink and downlink. 14 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination With the BSS paging coordination function, the network can send the CS domain paging message to an MS in the packet transfer state on the PACCH if the Gs interface is not configured between the MSC/VLR and the SGSN. In this manner, the MS in the packet transfer state can respond to the CS domain paging. 15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell Co-BCCH cell is realized on the basis of the principles of the concentric cell. The TRXs on the GSM900M (or GSM850M) are configured in the underlaid subcell, which is used to expand the coverage area; and the TRXs on the DCS1800M (or PCS1900M) are configured in the overlaid subcell, which is used to absorb the traffic. The TRXs on two bands are distributed in the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell that share one BCCH TRX. Co-BCCH cell increases the traffic capacity of a cell, decreases handovers and interference, and improves the continuous coverage and sparse coverage in hot spots. 16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability The 2G/3G interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselected to the GSM network if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network or if the serving WCDMA/TD-SCDMA cell is in a weak coverage area. In addition, an MS can be handed over to or reselected to the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network if the MS requires the PS services. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network again, or the MS detects that the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA cell is better than the serving GSM cell,
Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

About This Document

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

the MS can be handed over to or reselected to the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network if the handover or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can use the abundant services provided by the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network. 17 Configuring TRX Cooperation With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the cell automatically rectifies the faults. Thus, the services in the cell are not affected before the faulty TRX is replaced. Based on the type of faulty TRXs and the handling method, the TRX cooperation is classified into BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation. For the non-baseband FH cell, only the BCCH TRX cooperation occurs. For the baseband FH cell, both BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation are likely to occur. 18 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan The cell frequency scan function enables the scanning of the levels of the uplink signals at specific frequencies on a specific channel of a cell. The scanned results of the signal levels provides references for engineers to select proper operating frequencies. 19 Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links The BSC uses the high-speed signaling when the 64 kbit/s signaling fail to meet the signaling requirements on the A interface due to high traffic volume. With this feature, the N timeslots in an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7 signaling. Therefore, the bandwidth of a signaling link is extended to N x 64 kit/s and a maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N = 31) can be used. 20 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points With this feature, a physical node is logically classified into multiple signaling points. Each signaling point can be independently connected to other signaling points and thus meets the signaling link requirements for large capacity processing of the BSC6000. In addition, the requirements for the signaling networking capability of the MSC are reduced because the highspeed signaling technology is not used. Thus, the operators' investment is saved. 21 Configuring DTX and DRX Discontinuous transmission (DTX) and discontinuous reception (DRX) increases the standby time and call duration of an MS. 22 Configuring Location Service Location sevice (LCS) enables the network to provide various services for an MS based on the location of the MS. These services include weather forecasts, trip scheduling, emergency assistance, stock information, business planning, and transportation conditions. The simple location service can locate an MS based on the information obtained during single-user message tracing. 23 Configuring TFO The TFO feature can reduce the speech signal degradation caused by tandem operation, thus improving the voice quality. When the calling MS and the called MS use the same speech version, the TFO link is established through the in-band signaling negotiation. In addition, the least significant bit (or the second least significant bit) is stolen to seize the 8 kbit/s (or 16 kbit/s) sublink of the PCM transmission link for transparent transmission of TFO frames and bypass TC encoding/decoding. In this manner, the speech signal is encoded at the MS initiating the call and decoded at the MS terminating the call for only once. Thus, the degradation of the speech signals due to tandem operation is reduced and the voice quality is improved. This process is called tandem free operation (TFO).
vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Therefore. That is. the service interruption time due to the cell reselection is minimized. the 4-way receiver diversity technology allows one TRX module to receive the uplink signals from four RX channels and then combine the uplink signals to achieve better signal quality and demodulation performance. and the cells configured Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and radio resources are fully utilized. When the DTRU works in single TRX mode. and the quality of the receive signal is improved. and then transmits the combined signals. In this way. 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity In the DTRU. the BSC sends the system information about the target cell to the MS before cell reselection. Flex Abis is an allocation mode of the transmission resources on the Abis interface. In this way. Thus. two TRXs are integrated into a TRX module that is configured with a combiner. the downlink coverage is improved. the BTS can enable this feature through data configuration. In this way.This describes how to configure SDCCH dynamic adjustment on the Local Maintenance Terminal. To implement rapid PS access after cell reselection. the diversity gain is obtained. the two TRXs on the DTRU transmit the correlated signals of the same carrier. cells. This provides two independent multi-path signals for the downlink. and services. Then. two TRXs are integrated into one TRX module. vii . the two independent multi-path signals are processed by the equalizer of the MS. 29 Configuring NC2 The network-controlled cell reselection (NC2) refers to the situation that the MS in packet transfer mode can be controlled by the network to reselect a cell according to the measurement report. This describes how to configure NACC on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the transmission resources on the Abis interface form a resource pool to share resources between CS services and PS services (including idle timeslots) and also between different cells or BTSs. Ltd.This describes how to configure NC2 on the Local Maintenance Terminal. The combiner combines the radio signals of the same frequency and same phrase from two TRXs. 31 Configuring Flex Abis Flex Abis implements the sharing of the transmission resources on the Abis interface between different BTSs. the effect of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system is minimized. Therefore. 27 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment SDCCH dynamic adjustment is to dynamically adjust the number of SDCCHs according to the load of the TCHs and SDCCHs. cascading BTSs. 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity With appropriate design. the downlink transmit power is higher than the transmit power of the original signals. 30 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement This describes how to configure packet performance improvement on the external PCU maintenance console or Local Maintenance Terminal. With this feature. the receive sensitivity is improved. Especially when Flex Abis is enabled in multi-cell large capacity BTSs.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document 24 Configuring PBT In the DTRU. 28 Configuring NACC NACC refers to network-assisted cell reselection.. and the receive effect is much better than that of none receiver diversity and that of two-way receiver diversity. and the transmit power with high gain is achieved and the downlink coverage is extended. and thus improves the resource utilization.

The APS configuration consists of configuring and verifying APS.With the dynamic MAIO. If there is a breakpoint on the ring. in the BSC local switch. and the lowest-level BTS is connected to the BSC through the transmission link. 34 Configuring APS The automatic protection switching (APS) function applies to optical port backup.reduces the adjacentchannel and co-channel interference in the GSM system. the speech coding schemes of the calling MS and called MS are the same and thus no coding conversion is required. the BSC performs the loopback on the cabinet group of the convergent BTS. In addition. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Through the MSC pool. the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the MSCs in the pool according to the NRI or load balancing principle. if the calling MS and called MS are within the coverage of the same BTS or BTS group. 38 Configuring Antenna Hopping This describes how to configure antenna hopping. and thus the speech quality is improved. thus forming a ring. the BSC negotiates with the optical transmission equipment on the protection channel through the APS to switch traffic signals onto the protection channel.About This Document HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) with the EGPRS function. 36 Configuring BTS Local Switching With this feature. when an MAIO is assigned to a channel under activation. one BSC can be connected to multiple MSCs at the same time. If a fault occurs on the working channel. 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology The ring networking mode is a special chain networking mode. the TC resources involved in the BSC local switch can be released. 32 Configuring the MSC Pool With this feature. the speech signals on the Abis interface are looped back to the MS without traveling around the NSS. the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted according to the current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned to the channel. 37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO Under the BTSs with large capacity. Several BTSs form a chain. a maximum of 32 MSCs form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers under one group of BSCs. Therefore. the downlink data on each TRX can be randomly transmitted on other TRXs. if the calling MS and called MS are under the same BSC. APS can improve the stability and maintainability of the entire system. The BTS ring topology is categorized into two types: Huawei BTS ring topology I and Huawei BTS ring topology II. thus improving network performance. This optimizes the data reception of the MS from the main BCCH TRX and the data transmission of the main BCCH TRX. the BTSs that precede the breakpoint remain unchanged in networking mode whereas the BTSs that follow the breakpoint form a new chain connection in the reverse direction. the transmission resources on the Abis interface can be used in an efficient way. In addition. Ltd. adjacent-channel or co-channel interference are likely to occur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and the tight frequency reuse is adopted. With antenna hopping. 39 Configuring Voice Quality Index viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. 35 Configuring BSC Local Switching With this feature.

the speech signals are received clearly at the peer end. 40 Configuring ANR Automatic noise restraint (ANR) reduces the background noise in the uplink speech signals and improves the signal noise ratio (SNR) and speech intelligibility. In a synchronous network. Abis over IP. It increases the reusability of BCCH frequencies and reduces the number of frequencies used by the BCCHs. Thus. dynamic frequency allocation and dynamic channel assignment can be adopted to minimize inter-cell co-channel and adjacent-channel collision. Meanwhile.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document The voice quality index (VQI) feature provides a direct method to measure the voice quality of the radio network. Therefore. Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation and TRX Working Voltage Adjustment. and bit offset in the timeslot to be the same through software. the voice quality of the network is quantified. The networking reliability can be guaranteed by the active/standby mode. 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission This describes three types of IP transmission in the BSS: A over IP. With this feature. Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization. The technologies such as channel assignment algorithm. 42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse The tight BCCH frequency reuse technology is applicable to the network with insufficient frequency resources.. and power control also help to decrease the power consumption. The technologies used for intelligent power consumption decrease are as follows: TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown. Power Optimization Based on Channel Type. 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease This describes how to decrease the power consumption of various BTS parts through the use of a technology to decrease the overall BTS power consumption. 43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP This describes how to configuring Inter-BSC signaling links on the current BSC and external BSC on the Local Maintenance Terminal. and Gb over IP. DTX. According to the network planning. PSU Smart Control. more frequencies can be used at the FH layer. 47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS The Abis Transmission Optimization feature introduces the HDLC frame and HDLC channel without changing the physical transmission mode. Intelligent Combiner Bypass. different networking modes can be used on each interface in the BSS as required. timeslot number. 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task The Soft-Synchronized Network feature realizes the synchronization through software. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which provides a reference for future network optimization. 45 Configuring Entire Network Synchronization This describes how to configure the DGPS in the BTS3012 or configure the USCU in the 3900 series base station or 3036 series base station to support the GPS function so that the entire network is synchronized. and link detection. thus improving the system capacity. Ltd. It statistically multiplexes the traffic data. ix . By measuring the uplink VQI and downlink VQI. the quality of IP transmission can be guaranteed by various QoS mechanisms. Active Backup Power Control. This greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the network capacity. Timeslot-level Shutdown of the Power Amplifier. all the BTSs under one BSC synchronize with each other by adjusting the frame number. load sharing.

In addition. a subscriber can send photos or browse websites during a call. one BSC can be connected to multiple SGSNs at the same time. the GPS synchronization requires the support from the hardware configuration. antenna system. Each operator has an independent CN (MSC and SGSN). the GSM-R has new features. you need to preconfigure some parameters used by the algorithm on the M2000 client. 48 Configuring SGSN Pool This feature enables a maximum of 32 SGSNs to form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers belonging to one group of BSCs. The 3G network provides concurrent CS service and PS service. the subscribers in a GSM network can enjoy services similar to those provided in a 3G network. 54 Configuring VGCS/VBS This describes how to configure the VGCS/VBS. tunnel.. In the scenarios such as railway. which has a remarkable effect on improving the utilization of frequency resources and expanding the network capacity. This feature implements the simplified operation function of the class A mobile phone. Voice Broadcast x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . A subsite refers to a certain area physically covered by multiple RRU/RFUs that belong to the same BBU. or locate the fault on the M2000 client. which is also called a cascading cell. You can also query the progress and result of the automatic planning of the BTS. subscribers can use the services that are similar to 3G services through the 2G network. the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the SGSNs in the pool according to the network resource identifier (NRI) or load balancing principle. or indoor coverage. BTS. in areas with insufficient 3G coverage. analyze the data. see M2000 Operator Guide. and so on) in the GBSS network simultaneously. the inter-site Um interface software synchronization or GPS synchronization should be enabled. concurrent CS services and PS services. In addition. improve the coverage efficiency.About This Document HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) signaling data. DTM allows simultaneous transfer of CS service and PS service. that is. 51 Configuring IBCA IBCA algorithm is a channel assignment algorithm. which implements comprehensive management of all the resources in the GBSS. In addition. and OM data on the HDLC channel to obtain a higher transmission gain through voice frame compression and multiplexing. That is. Compared with the original GSM system. To use the IBCA algorithm. transmission. 49 Configuring RAN Sharing On the condition that independency of CNs of multiple operators is maintained. Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode includes Configuring a BTS3900B GSM in automatic planning mode and Configuring a BTS3900E GSM in automatic planning mode 53 Configure DTM Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) is a 3GPP-defined standard function. The shared GBSS uses a uniform network management system. RAN Sharing enables multiple operators to share one GBSS network so that they can use the resources (including the BSC. a cascading cell can reduce handovers. For details. and enhance the user experience. 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell This feature enables the subsites in different physical sites to be set to a logical cell. Ltd. such as the Voice Group Call Service (VGCS). With this feature. With DTM. 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode Before the automatic planning of the BTS. RAN Sharing supports a maximum of four operators.

the uplink rate of an EGPRS user can be dynamically adjusted according to the actual network status. xi . thus improving the uplink throughput. and then adjust the voice encoding rate accordingly. Different frequency reuse patterns can be applied to the overlaid and underlaid subcells. a physical channel can carry the services of two half-rate MSs instead of the services of a full-rate MS. that is. a higher throughput is provided. With the Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding function. In this way. 64 Configuring Network Operation Mode I Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and carrier-to-interference (C/I) ratio. the codec scheme of the PDCH changes with the radio environment where the MS locates. 58 Configuring Extended Cell The application of extended cell breaks the coverage limit of 35 km of a GSM cell. 62 Configuring Extended Dynamic Allocation(EDA) The EDA function enables the allocation of more uplink timeslots to an MS. thus increasing the uplink throughput. Ltd. which can be adjusted between full-rate speech version 3 and half-rate speech version 3 specified by the protocol. the BTS and the MS can evaluate the interference on the radio network according to the measurements such as receive level. thus increasing the uplink/downlink throughput of an MS. the quality of GPRS/EGPRS services on radio access network. The BSC dynamically adjusts the codec scheme adopted by the PDCH according to the uplink measurement report reported by the BTS. and enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption (eMLPP) service. In this manner. allocation/retention priority (ARP). 57 Configuring Concentric Cell A concentric cell is divided into an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. 60 Configuring Half-Rate Half-rate indicates that the voice coding rate decreases by half based on the new coding algorithm. In this way..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document Service (VBS). traffic handling priority (THP). 55 Configuring AMR The adaptive multi rate (AMR) is a speech encoding and decoding algorithm. 61 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes The function of MS high multislot classes enables the allocation of a maximum of five uplink/ downlink timeslots to an MS. The GSM-R can provide diversified voice dispatch services required in the private network. receive quality. maximum bit rate (MBR). This helps operators to provide wider coverage in special areas. The requirements for PS QoS are defined by QoS attributes. In this manner. With AMR. guaranteed bit rate (GBR). including the traffic class. both the antiinterference capability of the radio communications system and the voice quality are improved. transfer delay. 63 Configuring CS-3/CS-4 The CS-3/CS-4 function enables the BSC to automatically adjust the coding scheme to a higher one in the area with a low bit error rate based on the existing coding scheme of a GPRS MS and the transmission quality of the MS. 59 PS QoS PS QoS refers to GPRS/EGPRS QoS. and reliability. 56 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding The BSS supports nine codec schemes: MCS-1 to MCS-9.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Ltd. 71 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing The function of end-to-end MS signaling tracing enables the tracing of faults of an NE based on the collected information about specified users with only a small number of resources occupied. thus facilitating fault rectification. the 8 kbit/s Ater resources are allocated.4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data Huawei GBSS supports the use of a single CS channel for transmitting PS services. 69 Configuring Flex Ater With the Flex Ater function.About This Document HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) The function of network operation mode I enables the sending of the CS paging messages over PCCCHs. the 16 kbit/s Ater resources are allocated. The AFC estimates the frequency offset between the frequency of each received burst and the standard frequency in real time. CCCHs. To enable the subscribers to communicate without interruption and to optimize the network performance.4 kbps CSD services. the GBSS automatically switches the terrestrial TDM transmission link on the Abis interface to a backup satellite transmission link. 65 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report The function of pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to interpolate and filter measurement reports (MRs) and then report the results of the processed MRs to the BSC. In this manner. In this manner. the BSC does not need to process the MRs. the Ater resources are allocated according to the service type during a call connection. The MS monitors only one paging channel. 68 Configuring Handover The service area of the GSM is composed of the cells with continuous coverage. 67 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction(AFC) The automatic frequency correction (AFC) function uses a special balancing algorithm to estimate the difference between the standard frequency and the frequency of the GMSK signal sent from the fast-moving MS to the BTS. 72 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment The function of PDCH dynamic adjustment enables the automatic conversion between TCHs and PDCHs as required instead of configuring fixed PDCHs. thus maintaining the normal operation of the network. If half-rate channels are used over the Um interface. 66 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) The EMR is the downlink measurement report (MR) of a new type introduced in R99. or PACCHs on the network side. the performance of the power control algorithm and handover algorithm is improved. xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. 70 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup When the active SDH transmission link is faulty due to a natural disaster. If full-rate channels are used over the Um interface.. thus reducing the load of the BSC. more measurement objects such as bit error probability (BEP) and frame erase ratio (FER) are included. the estimated frequency offset is used to correct the RX working frequency of the BTS. Compared with the common MR. including the 14. 73 Configuring 14. the handover technique is introduced to the GSM system.

could result in minor or moderate injury.could result in equipment damage. data loss. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Names of files. xiii . Ltd. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New. Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Command arguments are in italics. which if not avoided. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk. directories. log in as user root.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk. For example.will result in death or serious injury. Convention Boldface Italic [] Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. performance degradation. or unexpected results. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation. which if not avoided. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which if not avoided. folders. and users are in boldface. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text. Book titles are in italics. General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows..

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) xiv . Key 2 Description Press the key. For example. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. menus. For example. For example. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1. Press the keys concurrently. click OK. Several items or no item can be selected. } [ x | y | . A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars..... ] { x | y | . press Enter and press Tab. pressing Alt. Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. parameters. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.. One item is selected or no item is selected. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons. For example. window.. Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.About This Document HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Convention { x | y | . Ltd.. Action Click Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. For example. choose File > Create > Folder. One item is selected. and dialog titles are in boldface. Press the keys in turn. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. A means the two keys should be pressed in turn. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.. ]* GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. [ x | y | . }* Description Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. tabs.

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. xv ..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) About This Document Action Double-click Drag Description Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

.

...........................................................................................................................................................................................4-1 5 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation....................................................................................8-13 9 Configuring eMLPP.............................................6 Changing RF FH to None FH......................................................1 Configuring a Multiband Network..... Ltd..............................................................................................................6-2 6......8-9 8...................11-1 12 Configuring Active Power Control................................................................... xvii .............9 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8-1 8...............................................................................................................5-1 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast................................................................................................................................................13-1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co....................................................1 Principles of Configuring the FH Cell.................9-1 10 Configuring Priority-Based Resource Reservation....................................................................................................................................8-12 8...........................2-2 2...............................................................................................................8-10 8........................................................................................................................6-1 6...................................................................5 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH................................................2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast.................8-3 8...............................................................................................................................2 Configuring an Enhanced Dual-Band Network...................................................................................................................................3 Changing None FH to Baseband FH.....................12-1 13 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling....................................HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Contents Contents About This Document.................10 Configuring MA Group...................................................................................................8-5 8.................7-1 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping.....10-1 11 Configuring Network Support SAIC................7 Changing Baseband FH to None FH...iii 1 Changes in BSS Feature Configuration Guide (Based on MML)..........................................................8-6 8.....................................................................4 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH........................8-8 8...............3-1 4 Configuring ALC........................................1-1 2 Configuring the Multiband Network...................................8-10 8..................................................................................2-1 2......................................................................................2 Changing None FH to RF FH..............6-7 7 Configuring Ciphering................................................................8 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH..................................................................1 Configuring Cell Broadcast.............................2-6 3 Configuring the Speech Version................................................................................................................8-7 8..............

...........................22-2 22.......................20-1 21 Configuring DTX and DRX......................2 Configuring Transmit Diversity.................................................................................................................................................................31-1 31..........................1 Co-BCCH Cell Configuration Principles..........................................................................................26-1 26..................................................14-1 15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell.....................................................................................................................................................29-1 30 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement...........................25-1 25....26-2 26................................................................................................................................................22-3 23 Configuring TFO.....................15-1 15.............2 Configuring Simple Location Service............................................................................................................27-1 28 Configuring NACC........................................30-1 31 Configuring Flex Abis...........1 Configuring Flex Abis..........................................24-2 24...............................................................................................................3 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell..........21-1 21...............................................31-2 31.............................19-1 20 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points........................................15-2 15.................................................15-3 16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability.25-8 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity...........2 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity..................................................................................15-2 15..........................................3 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity..........25-6 25.............................................................26-5 27 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................17-1 18 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan.................................................................................2 Preparations for the Co-BCCH Cell Configuration....................1 Configuring Location Service......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................21-2 21........................................Contents HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 14 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination................1 Configuring DTX..................................................................................................1 Installing Hardware (PBT).................................24-5 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity.....................1 Installing Hardware (4-Way Receive Diversity)................28-1 29 Configuring NC2...................................3 Configuring Dynamic PBT.............23-1 24 Configuring PBT..................................... Issue 01 (2010-05-20) ......................................................................................................................................................................................................24-4 24..............22-1 22......................................................................................21-7 22 Configuring Location Service.........1 Installing Hardware (Transmit Diversity)............................................................ Ltd........................................................................31-7 xviii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.........................................................2 Configuring Exclusive Timeslot............................................................................................................................................2 Configuring DRX.....................................................................................................................................................24-1 24.....16-1 17 Configuring TRX Cooperation..........................................................................18-1 19 Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links............................................25-2 25................................................................................2 Configuring PBT..........................................................................

............................................................................................................ 32-4 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology.........3 Configuring PSU Smart Control................................................................................................... 41-6 41......5 Creating an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task.................................43-1 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task.......................................................................33-7 33...................................................................5 Manually Switching over BTS Ring Topology....... 33-5 33..44-15 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co....HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Contents 32 Configuring the MSC Pool.........1 Configuring MSC Pool (A over TDM).........................41-9 41......................................................35-1 36 Configuring BTS Local Switching.........................................32-1 32...........................................................................................................................44-3 44................4 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type...................................................................44-12 44............................................41-3 41...............................................................................1 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2 Creating an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task...............................33-8 34 Configuring APS..41-1 41...............................................................8 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment............42-1 43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP...33-2 33..........................................................1 Concepts Related to the Soft-Synchronized Network................................................4 Verifying an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task.................................................................................................4 Deleting a BTS from the Ring Topology....................................36-1 37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO.................41-12 41..............................................40-1 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease........................................................................................2 Configuring Dynamic MAIO.............................................................44-1 44...................................41-8 41.........................................................................37-1 37..............................33-6 33........................................................... Ltd......................................................................................................44-7 44......................1 Configuring BTS Ring Topology...................................................................................................................................................... xix ...............................................................32-2 32.............................41-14 41...............................................................2 Changing Non-Ring Topology to Ring Topology..................................................7 Collecting the Offset Information Between BTSs..........................44-11 44.....37-2 37............................................................2 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass............3 Configuring a Pair of Neighboring Cells of Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task.......................................................34-1 35 Configuring BSC Local Switching...................................41-16 42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse..................39-1 40 Configuring ANR...7 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation......................................................37-2 38 Configuring Antenna Hopping.............................................41-10 41..........................................................................................................................38-1 39 Configuring Voice Quality Index..........................................................................................44-3 44.................... 44-7 44..........................2 Configuring the MSC Pool (A over IP)..........................33-1 33................................3 Querying BTS Ring Topology.........1 Precautions for Configuring Dynamic MAIO..............................................................................................................................................................44-5 44.............................8 Synchronizing BTSs................................6 Configuring Active Backup Power Control...........................................................................5 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization.........6 Verifying an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task..............................................

....................9 Deleting a Soft-Synchronized Network Task..44-16 45 Configuring Entire Network Synchronization..................8 Configuring External Attributes of the BSC...................................................................................2 Configuring Parameters of Location Groups......................................................................................................................................................................................4 Configuring A over IP...............................................50-3 50....................................47-1 48 Configuring SGSN Pool............................................................4 Deleting a Location Group........49-3 49..................................51-13 51......................49-8 49..................................................................1 Adding a Location Group..............3 Gb over IP Configuration Data..............................................................................................46-27 47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS.....49-4 49.........................2 Configuring BTS Sharing............................................................................2 Abis over IP Configuration Data.................................................5 Configuring Abis over IP............................................50-1 50....................................................................1 Configuration Principles of IBCA..51-12 51.........51-16 xx Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..............51-11 51......49-1 49.........................................................................................................................................................3 Verifying Configuration Information About Location Group.................................................................................................................1 A over IP Configuration Data..............................................................................................4 Configuring the IBCA Cell that Supports HWIII Power Control Algorithm........................................7 Configuring RAN Sharing to Support Multiple CBCs..................................................................................9 Binding the external BSC and the External Cell...................................................................................49-7 49...46-6 46................................................................................................................................................................................................................................8 Configuring the Distributed BTS TRX to Support RAN Sharing........................................................................................3 Binding the Cell and the Operator.............51-8 51...............1 Configuring Operator Information..........................................................................................50-4 50...........................................2 Data Negotiated and Planned for Configuring IBCA................................................................................9 Verifying and Deactivating RAN Sharing... Issue 01 (2010-05-20) ....................6 Configuring an IBCA Neighboring Cell.............................................................10 Deactivating IBCA.........Contents HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44................................................................................................................................................51-4 51..........................................................................50-7 51 Configuring IBCA...........................................50-5 50......................................5 Binding the SGSN and Operator.................46-21 46...................................45-1 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission..................................7 Configuring the BTS Synchronization Mode.........................................49-6 49........................................................51-10 51...............................................4 Binding the MSC and Operator........................................49-10 49.....................................................................................46-2 46. Ltd......................46-1 46....48-1 49 Configuring RAN Sharing.......................5 Configuring the Cell that Enables the IBCA Algorithm Switch..................................................................................................46-16 46..................................................................................................51-14 51.........50-2 50.......................................5 Setting Binding Relations of Location Groups...........................49-7 49.......6 Binding the PCU and Operator...................................................................................................49-5 49....46-12 46.....50-5 50....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................6 Configuring Gb over IP............................................51-1 51........................................................................................................................................................................51-15 51..51-4 51........6 Deleting Binding Relations of Location Groups....3 Configuring IBCA.........................................49-11 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell.................................

....52-1 52..............................................63-1 64 Configuring Network Operation Mode I.............................................................................................................71-1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co................................................4 Configuring Load Handover.................................................................................................6 Configuring Speed-Sensitive Handover........................ Ltd.............................................................................................................................................................59-2 59....52-4 53 Configure DTM...............68-13 68.............................................................................8 Configuring Chain Cell Handover..................................59-1 59....................................................60-1 61 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes........................................67-1 68 Configuring Handover..................................................................59-3 59....................68-11 68...............................................................................................................................................................................................................66-1 67 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction(AFC).........................................................................................1 Configuring Basic Handover............................................... 68-7 68.........70-1 71 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing...................................................3 Configuring Signal Level Rapid Fall Handover.....................................................................................................65-1 66 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR)..................68-17 69 Configuring Flex Ater........3 Configuring PS Active Package Management....................................................................................... 68-8 68................................................................................................................................................59-5 59..................1 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR)..................................HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Contents 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode............................................1 Adding the BTS3900B GSM..................................................................68-14 68...................................4 Configuring PoC QoS.............................................................64-1 65 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report...........................................................................................................................................................................5 Configuring Layered and Hierarchical Handover.........................................68-15 68...62-1 63 Configuring CS-3/CS-4................................................................................................68-1 68............................................................. 68-9 68..............57-1 58 Configuring Extended Cell............................................................68-3 68................................2 Configuring PBGT Handover...............56-1 57 Configuring Concentric Cell...........................53-1 54 Configuring VGCS/VBS................................................................................................................................................................................7 Configuring Directed Retry.....................2 Adding the BTS3900E GSM.................................................. 52-2 52........................................................................................54-1 55 Configuring AMR.......... 59-6 60 Configuring Half-Rate...........................................................................................................................................................................69-1 70 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup..61-1 62 Configuring Extended Dynamic Allocation(EDA)....................................9 Configuring Better Cell Handover.............................................................................................................2 Configuring QoS ARP and THP........................55-1 56 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding............................................................58-1 59 PS QoS............................................................................. xxi ........................................................................................................................................................................................................

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .................. Ltd..........4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data..............73-1 xxii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.........................................................................Contents HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 72 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment.......72-1 73 Configuring 14....................

...................................................................................................................6-11 Figure 6-4 Trace the RSL Message at Abis Interface dialog box......................26-3 Figure 31-1 Configuration of BTS combined cabinets and cabinet groups................................................. .............................25-6 Figure 26-1 Connection between the DTRU and the DDPU in 4-way receive diversity mode..........................39-2 Figure 39-2 Result of the user message tracing.................................................6-11 Figure 24-1 Connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode............................................................................................................................................................24-3 Figure 25-1 Cable connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in the BTS3012/BTS3012AE in transmit diversity mode...................... Ltd.............................................................................6-6 Figure 6-3 Trace RSL Message on the Abis Interface dialog box.......................................................39-3 Figure 39-3 Message Browser window...............................25-4 Figure 25-3 Cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3002E in transmit diversity mode ......... xxiii .25-5 Figure 25-4 Cable connections in the DBS3900 GSM in transmit diversity mode.....HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Figures Figures Figure 6-1 Trace RSL Message on the Abis Interface dialog box.........................................................................................................................................39-4 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co...............................................................................................31-4 Figure 39-1 Trace User Message dialog box....................................6-6 Figure 6-2 Tracing the RSL Message at Abis Interface...................................................................................................................................................................................................................25-3 Figure 25-2 Cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3006C in transmit diversity mode..............................................................................................................................................................

.

.3-1 Table 4-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ALC........8-14 Table 9-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS.......................HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Tables Tables Table 2-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a multiband network.............2-4 Table 2-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an enhanced dual-band network..12-1 Table 13-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the robust air interface signalling function ................................................8-9 Table 8-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing baseband FH to none FH.........17-3 Table 18-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring cell frequency scan...........................................................18-1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co............6-7 Table 7-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ciphering..........................................................................................................................................................................................8-10 Table 8-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to hybrid FH.........................................................................................2-6 Table 3-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the EFR/AMR/HR..........10-1 Table 11-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the Network Support SAIC.......5-1 Table 6-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring cell broadcast...................................................................8-13 Table 8-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the MA group...............................................................................................................8-11 Table 8-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing hybrid FH to none FH.................................................7-1 Table 8-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing none FH to RF FH.........................................8-6 Table 8-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing RF FH to none FH..........................................................17-1 Table 17-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring TRX Cooperation........... Ltd.......................................................................................................................14-1 Table 15-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a co-BCCH cell..................................................................................................9-3 Table 10-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring priority-based resource reservation .................................................................. xxv ................8-5 Table 8-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing none FH to baseband FH......................15-4 Table 16-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability .....9-1 Table 9-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring eMLPP..................16-2 Table 17-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS.............4-1 Table 5-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AEC...................................................................................................................................................................................13-1 Table 14-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BSS paging coordination function ................................................................................................................6-2 Table 6-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring simplified cell broadcast............11-2 Table 12-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the active power control...............................................................2-3 Table 2-3 Example of the data configuring cell idle parameters or cell handover parameters...........................................2-2 Table 2-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the GSM900 cell or GSM1800 cell...................................................................................

..................................................................................21-4 Table 21-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS..............................................................................20-1 Table 20-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the mapping between the Second OPC and the subrack.....................................................................................24-6 Table 25-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring transmit diversity............................................................................................................................................28-1 Table 29-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring NC2............................24-4 Table 24-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring dynamic PBT.............................................................................39-1 Table 40-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ANR..................................................................................32-6 Table 33-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS ring topology.................27-1 Table 28-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring NACC.............35-2 Table 36-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS......................................38-2 Table 39-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring VQI..33-3 Table 33-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing non-ring topology to ring topology ............31-7 Table 32-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MSC Pool in A over TDM....................................................Tables HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Table 19-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring high-speed signaling links in BM/TC combined mode.......22-2 Table 22-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring simple location service...25-7 Table 25-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring transmit diversity.......................................................................................................36-3 Table 37-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring dynamic MAIO........................................................26-3 Table 26-2 Description of ports on the DDPU..........................................................................................................................21-9 Table 22-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring LCS.....................................................................................................................................................................................................41-4 xxvi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..........................26-4 Table 26-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 4-way receive diversity........................................................................29-1 Table 31-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Flex Abis...............................20-2 Table 20-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DPC...........................19-2 Table 20-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the mapping between the first OPC and the subrack.................. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) ..........................................34-2 Table 35-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC local switching......................................................21-2 Table 21-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DTX..................................................................................................................................22-4 Table 23-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring TFO.......................................36-2 Table 36-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS local switching.....................................21-7 Table 21-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DTX....23-2 Table 24-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PBT............................................................................................................................................33-6 Table 34-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring APS...................................................................................32-2 Table 32-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring links on the A interface..............................................................................................................................................................................25-8 Table 26-1 Description of ports on the DTRU...........19-1 Table 19-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring high-speed signaling links in BM/TC separate mode....................26-5 Table 27-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring SDCCH dynamic adjustment...........................................31-4 Table 31-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring exclusive timeslots. Ltd...........20-2 Table 21-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS...37-3 Table 38-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring antenna hopping..........40-1 Table 41-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring intelligent power consumption reduction ...............32-5 Table 32-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MSC Pool in A over IP....................................................................................

...........................................................................................................HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Tables Table 41-2 Example of Configuring the Intelligent Combiner Bypass....................................................................................................46-7 Table 46-11 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Clock over IP..........................................................................................................................................................44-4 Table 44-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task ............................................................................................................................44-13 Table 44-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for collecting the inter-BSC offset information between BTSs....................................................44-8 Table 44-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network ...45-2 Table 46-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring system clock.....................46-3 Table 46-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUA.............................................................................................46-3 Table 46-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the A interface link................44-4 Table 44-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task ...................................................... xxvii ..............................................................42-3 Table 43-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for Configuring Inter-BSC Signaling Links..................................46-6 Table 46-10 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD link detection over the Abis interface...46-2 Table 46-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 8K reference clock for the GMPS and GEPS.........................................................................................................................................................44-6 Table 44-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS synchronization zone........................................................44-14 Table 44-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for synchronizing the BTSs............41-10 Table 41-5 Example of the configuring the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization..............41-15 Table 41-8 Example of the TRX Working Voltage Adjustment................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................46-2 Table 46-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3AU entity....................................................41-13 Table 41-7 Example of the configuring the Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation............................................................................................................................................................41-11 Table 41-6 Example of the configuring the Active Backup Power Control.......................................................................41-16 Table 42-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS.........46-2 Table 46-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the signaling point for the GMPS ..........................................44-15 Table 45-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the USCU..............................................................................................................................46-4 Table 46-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the QoS mechanism over the A interface ....................................................................................41-7 Table 41-3 Example of configuring PSU Smart Control.................41-8 Table 41-4 Example of the configuring the Power Optimization Based on Channel Type........................................................................................................................................46-5 Table 46-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUB........................................................43-1 Table 44-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS synchronization zone..................................42-1 Table 42-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring tight BCCH frequency reuse...........................................................46-4 Table 46-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD detection over the A interface ..46-8 Table 46-12 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring QoS for the Abis interface..........45-1 Table 45-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the system clock source................44-9 Table 44-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for collecting the intra-BSC offset information between BTSs........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................44-8 Table 44-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that creates the inter-BSC softsynchronized network task...........................................46-8 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.......................................... Ltd........................................................

Tables

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Table 46-13 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring IP PATH for the Abis interface ...........................................................................................................................................................................46-10 Table 46-14 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ABIS MUX..................................46-11 Table 46-15 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring LAPD...........................................46-11 Table 46-16 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring IP PM...........................................46-12 Table 46-17 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS Ping Switch to Off.................46-12 Table 46-18 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUP..................................46-12 Table 46-19 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUG..................................46-13 Table 46-20 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SGSN.....................................46-14 Table 46-21 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD link detection over the Gb interface.............................................................................................................................................................46-15 Table 46-22 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring traffic shaping over the Gb interface and congestion management....................................................................................................................................46-15 Table 47-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring HDLC_HubBTS service mode for BTS3012..............................................................................................................................................................47-2 Table 48-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring SGSN pool.......................................48-1 Table 48-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the first SGSN..........................................48-2 Table 48-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the second SGSN.....................................48-3 Table 49-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the primary operator information .............................................................................................................................................................................49-3 Table 49-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the secondary operator information .............................................................................................................................................................................49-3 Table 49-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS sharing.....................................49-4 Table 49-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the cell and operator...............................49-5 Table 49-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the MSC and operator............................49-6 Table 49-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the PCU and operator.............................49-8 Table 49-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring RAN sharing to support multiple CBCs .............................................................................................................................................................................49-9 Table 49-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the distributed BTS TRX to support RAN sharing...............................................................................................................................................................49-10 Table 50-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a location group.......................................50-2 Table 50-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring parameters of the BTS.....................50-3 Table 50-3 Example of data negotiated and planned for setting binding relations of location groups..............50-6 Table 51-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUI.......................................51-5 Table 51-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUB......................................51-5 Table 51-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an FH cell.........................................51-5 Table 51-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for enabling Huawei III power control algorithm in a cell .............................................................................................................................................................................51-6 Table 51-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for enabling the IBCA algorithm in a cell.................51-7 Table 51-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an internal IBCA neighboring cell .............................................................................................................................................................................51-7 Table 51-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BTS synchronization method .............................................................................................................................................................................51-7 Table 51-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an external IBCA neighboring cell .............................................................................................................................................................................51-8

xxviii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Tables

Table 51-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that supports HWIII power control algorithm...........................................................................................................................................................51-11 Table 51-10 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm switch................................................................................................................................................................ 51-12 Table 51-11 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an IBCA neighboring cell............51-13 Table 51-12 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BTS synchronization mode ...........................................................................................................................................................................51-14 Table 51-13 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding external attributes of the BSC..............51-15 Table 52-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900B GSM................................52-2 Table 52-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in TDM networking mode .............................................................................................................................................................................52-5 Table 52-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in HDLC/HUB networking mode....................................................................................................................................................................52-6 Table 52-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in IP networking mode .............................................................................................................................................................................52-6 Table 53-1 Example of the negotiated and planned data for configuring the DTM...........................................53-2 Table 54-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the VGCS/VBS................................54-1 Table 55-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AMR...............................................55-1 Table 56-1 Example of the configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding...................................56-1 Table 57-1 Example of the configuring concentric cell.....................................................................................57-1 Table 58-1 Example of the configuring extended cell........................................................................................58-1 Table 59-1 Example of the configuring streaming QoS(GBR)..........................................................................59-2 Table 59-2 Example of the configuring QoS ARP and THP.............................................................................59-4 Table 59-3 Example of the configuring PS active package management..........................................................59-5 Table 59-4 Example of the configuring PoC QoS..............................................................................................59-7 Table 60-1 Example of the configuring Half-Rate.............................................................................................60-1 Table 61-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MS high multislot classes................61-1 Table 62-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring EDA.................................................62-1 Table 63-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring CS-3/CS-4........................................63-1 Table 64-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring network operation mode I................64-1 Table 65-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the function of pre-processing of measurement report.............................................................................................................................................65-1 Table 66-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring EMR.................................................66-1 Table 67-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AFC..................................................67-1 Table 68-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring basic handover.................................68-3 Table 68-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PBGT handover...............................68-7 Table 68-3 Example of data negotiated and planned for configuring signal level rapid fall handover.............68-9 Table 68-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring load handover.................................68-10 Table 68-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring layered and hierarchical handover ...........................................................................................................................................................................68-12 Table 68-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring speed-sensitive handover...............68-13 Table 68-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring directed retry..................................68-15 Table 68-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring chain cell handover........................68-16 Table 68-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring better cell handover........................68-18 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxix

Tables

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Table 69-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Flex Ater..........................................69-1 Table 70-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Abis transmission backup................70-1 Table 71-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring end-to-end MS signaling tracing .............................................................................................................................................................................71-1 Table 72-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PDCH dynamic adjustment.............72-1 Table 73-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 14.4 Kbps circuit switched data.......73-1

xxx

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

1 Changes in BSS Feature Configuration Guide (Based on MML)

1

Changes in BSS Feature Configuration Guide (Based on MML)

This describes the changes in the various versions of BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML).

01(2010-05-20) of V900R008C12
This is the initial commercial release.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

2 Configuring the Multiband Network

2
Context
l

Configuring the Multiband Network

About This Chapter
A multiband network consists of multiple frequency bands. The combined multiband network can increase the utilization of frequency resources on the radio network.

Huawei GSM BSS supports the following types of multiband networks:
– –

GSM850 + GSM900 + DCS1800 GSM850 + GSM900 + PCS1900

l l

The most common combination is GSM900 with DCS1800 and GSM850 with PCS1900. Huawei GSM BSS supports GSM900/DCS1800 co-BCCH cells, and does not support GSM850/PCS1900 co-BCCH cells. Huawei GSM BSS supports GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900, and GSM850, and does not support GSM450 or GSM480.

l

2.1 Configuring a Multiband Network This describes how to configure a multiband network on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2.2 Configuring an Enhanced Dual-Band Network The enhanced dual-band network is an improvement on the existing dual-band network. In the enhanced dual-band network, two co-sited cells with different coverage areas are logically formed into a cell group. One is an overlaid subcell, and the other is an underlaid subcell. The enhanced dual-band network algorithm enables channel sharing and load balancing between the two cells in a cell group. .

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

2 Configuring the Multiband Network

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

2.1 Configuring a Multiband Network
This describes how to configure a multiband network on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Scenario Impact A multiband network is configured to increase the utilization of frequency resources on the radio network. None.

NEs Involved MS, BTS, BSC, and MSC.

Prerequisite
l

The TRXs in the BTS must support the corresponding frequency bands.

Preparation
Table 2-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a multiband network Data Type Adding BTS Parameter ID BTSNAM E TYPE UPNODE SRN SN PN MPMODE AST ServiceMo de DCELLNA ME DCTYPE DCMCC DCMNC DCLAC DCCI
2-2

Parameter Name BTS Name BTS Type Up Node Type Subrack No. Slot No. Port No. Multiplexing Mode Activity state Service Type Source Cell Name Cell type Cell MCC Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI

Example BTS3012 BTS3012 BSC 0 14 0 MODE4_1 ACTIVATED (Activated) TDM cell GSM900 400 00 1 2

Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning
Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

2 Configuring the Multiband Network

Data Type

Parameter ID CPLMode TRXBN TRXTP TRXPN FREQ

Parameter Name Separate Mode TRX Board No. TRX Board Type TRX Board Path No. TRX Freq.

Example SUPPORT (Support) 0 QTRU 0 12

Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning

Table 2-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the GSM900 cell or GSM1800 cell Data Type GSM900 CELL Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX CELLNA ME CTYPE AST MCC MNC LAC CI TRXBN TRXTP TRXPN2 TRXFREQ GSM1800 IDXTYPE BTSIDX Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Source Cell Name Freq. Band Activity state MCC MNC LAC CI TRX Board No. TRX Board Type TRX Board Path No. TRX Freq. Index Type BTS Index Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 Cell_900 GSM900 ACTIVATED (Activated) 460 00 1 1 0 QTRU(QTRU) 0 70 BYIDX(By Index) 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

Band Activity state MCC MNC LAC CI TRX Board No. Ltd. TRX Freq. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) ..2 Configuring the Multiband Network HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID CELLNA ME CTYPE AST MCC MNC LAC CI TRXBN TRXFREQ Parameter Name Source Cell Name Freq. Example Cell_1800 DCS1800 ACTIVATED (Activated) 460 00 2 3 1 512 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 2-3 Example of the data configuring cell idle parameters or cell handover parameters Data Type Cell idle parameter s Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX ATT CBA CBQ PI Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Attach-detach Allowed Cell Bar Access Cell bar qualify Cell reselect parameters indication Index Type Cell Index HO Control Switch Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 YES(Yes) YES(Yes) NO(NO) YES(Yes) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Cell basic Handover Parameter s IDXTYPE CELLIDX HOCTRLS WITCH BYIDX(By Index) 0 HOALGORITH M2(HO Algorithm II) Network planning Network planning Network planning 2-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2 Configuring the Multiband Network Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRXTP=QTRU. run the ADD CELL command to add a GSM1800 cell. /*Add a GSM900 cell*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. AST=ACTIVATED. /*Configure cell basic handover parameters*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.. AST=ACTIVATED. TRXBN=0. CBA=YES. BTSIDX=0. and set Activity state to ACTIVATED(Activated). CELLIDX=0. Band to GSM900. BTSIDX=0. /*Add a DCS1800 cell*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. DCMCC="460". On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD CELL command to add a GSM900 cell. TYPE=BTS3012. TRXFREQ=70. run the RMV CELL command to delete other cells except for the 900 MHz cell. PN=0. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2. 2-5 l Deactivating a multiband network 1. Postrequisite l Verifying multiband network 1. LAC=2. Set Freq. and the call is still normal. LAC=1 . SN=14. MPMODE=MODE4_1. 2. Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 frequency band to camp on a 1800 MHz cell. SRN=0. TRXTP=QTRU. Ltd. observe the window displaying the monitored channel status. DCMNC="00". TRXBN=1. TRXPN2=0. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . AST=ACTIVATED. MCC="460". CELLIDX=0. and set Activity state to ACTIVATED(Activated). FREQ=12. run the MOD CELLIDLEBASIC command to configure cell idle parameters. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 frequency band to camp on a 900 MHz cell. The MS is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell. ----End Example An example script for configuring a multiband network is as follows: /*Add a BTS*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME="bts3012". Perform the dialing test. MNC="00". TRXBN=0. CI=1. DCTYPE=GSM900. /*Configure cell idle parameters*/ MOD CELLIDLEBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. ServiceMode=TDM. PI=YES. CTYPE=GSM900. DCCI=2. CPLMode=SUPPORT. DCELLNAME="cell". Perform the dialing test. UPNODE=BSC. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to configure cell basic handover parameters. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Perform the dialing test. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CI=3. Then. After the call is set up. CELLNAME="Cell_900". The call is normal. MNC="00". ATT=YES. move the MS towards the centre of the 1800 MHz cell. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MCC="460". Band to DCS1800. run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS. TRXFREQ=512. CBQ=NO. 3. CELLNAME="Cell_1800". CTYPE=DCS1800. DCLAC=1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TRXPN=0. Set Freq. The call is normal. This section takes the reservation of a 900 MHz cell as an example. 2.

Band Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 Cell1 GSM900 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 2-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 frequency band to camp on the 900 MHz cell. and the other is an underlaid subcell. the frequency bands GSM900_DCS1800. GSM850_1800. l l l Preparation Table 2-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an enhanced dual-band network Data Type GSM900 cell configuration Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX CELLNAME CTYPE Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Cell Name Freq. If yes. and MSC. 4. One is an overlaid subcell. . Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 frequency band to camp on the 900 MHz cell. or GSM850_1900 cannot be used in the cell.2 Configuring an Enhanced Dual-Band Network The enhanced dual-band network is an improvement on the existing dual-band network. Scenario Impact On condition that the KPIs are acceptable. When changing the relation between the cell and the operator. the enhanced dual-band network cannot be configured. None. Perform the dialing test. two co-sited cells with different coverage areas are logically formed into a cell group. the resource sharing of the overlaid and underlaid subcells expands the system capacity. The call cannot be set up. Ltd. BSC. The call is normal.. The BTS must support the frequency band to be configured. BTS. 2. modify the attributes of the enhanced dual-band network and change the relation between the cell and the operator. . When two cells belong to different operators.2 Configuring the Multiband Network HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 3. Prerequisite l l The enhanced dual-band network is not license-controlled. The cell must be a single band cell. The enhanced dual-band network algorithm enables channel sharing and load balancing between the two cells in a cell group. check whether the enhanced dual-band network is configured. NEs Involved MS. In the enhanced dual-band network. That is.

2-7 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2 Configuring the Multiband Network Data Type Parameter ID AST MCC MNC LAC CI TRXBN TRXTP TRXPN2 TRXFREQ Parameter Name Activity state MCC MNC LAC CI TRX Board No. TRX Board Type TRX Board Path No. TRX Freq. Index Type Source Cell Name Neighbor Cell Name Current HO Control Algorithm in Source Cell Index Type Source Cell Name Neighbor Cell Name Current HO Control Algorithm in Source Cell Example ACTIVATED (Activated) 460 00 1 1 0 QTRU(QTRU) 0 1 BYNAME (By Name) Cell1 Cell2 HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) BYNAME (By Name) Cell2 Cell1 HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Adding Cell2 to be the neighboring cell of Cell1 IDXTYPE SRCCELLN AME NBRCELLN AME HOCTRLSW ITCH Adding Cell1 to be the neighboring cell of Cell2 IDXTYPE SRCCELLN AME NBRCELLN AME HOCTRLSW ITCH Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd.

run the SET CELLHOEDBPARA command to Set the parameters that affect overlaid/underlaid subcell handover in enhanced dual-band network. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. LAC=1. SRCCELLNAME="Cell2". run the ADD CELL command to add a single band cell. /*Set the concentric type of the cell to be an enhanced dual-band cell*/ MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. TRXFREQ=1. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. MNC="00". TRXBN=0. AST=ACTIVATED. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLIDX=0. CI=1. TRXPN2=0. run the ADD CELL2GNC command to add the source cell to be the neighboring cell of the 2G unidirectional neighboring cell so that the two cells are bidirectional neighboring cells with each other. /*Add Cell1 to be the neighboring cell of Cell2*/ ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. NBRCELLNAME="Cell1".. CELLNAME="Cell1". BTSIDX=0. Ltd. IUOTP=EDB_cell. CELLINEXTP=Inner. CTYPE=GSM900. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 2-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to EDB_cell(Enhanced double freq cell). SRCCELLNAME="Cell1". ----End Example An example script for adding a single band cell is as follows: /*Add a GSM900 cell*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the ADD CELL2GNC command to add a 2G unidirectional neighboring cell for the source cell. MCC="460". TRXTP=QTRU. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.2 Configuring the Multiband Network HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Concentric cell type Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX IUOTP Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Cell IUO Type Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 EDB_cell (Enhanced double freq cell) Inner(Inner) BYIDX(By Index) 1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning CELLINEXT P DBLFREQA DJIDXTYPE DBLFREQA DJCIDX Cell Inner/Extra Property Same Group Cell Index Type Same Group Cell Index Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NBRCELLNAME="Cell2". /*Add Cell2 to be the neighboring cell of Cell1*/ ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.

Set Load HO Allowed and Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell to NO(No). 4. Make MS 1 camp on the DCS1800 cell and initiate a call. 5. Distance Between Boudaries of Subcells [dB] to 0. 2. and Distance Hysteresis Between Boudaries[dB] to 0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The adjustment of the reserved cell is complete. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the data must be restored because the data needs to be modified. run the SET CELLHOEDBPARA command to set the parameters of the GSM900 cell as follows: set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to YES. 6. and then run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Directed Retry of the two cells to YES. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DBLFREQADJCIDX=1. 2-9 . On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Then. 2. run the SET CELLHOEDBPARA command to set the parameters of the DCS1800 cell as follows: set UL Subcell Assignment Optimization to NO(No). UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 0. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set ECSC of the two cells to YES. Maintain the call of MS 1 and use MS 2 to call the fixed-line phone in the GSM900 cell. OL Subcell Assignment Optimization to YES(Yes). UL Subcell General Overload Threshold[%] to 1. 1. Stop all the calls. Make MS 1 and MS 2 (both supporting GSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands) camp on the GSM900 cell. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Deactivating an enhanced dual-band network 1. MS 2 is assigned to a channel of the DCS1800 cell because the load of the underlaid subcell is higher than UL Subcell General Overload Threshold[%]. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. This indicates that the call in the overlaid cell can be assigned to the underlaid cell when the traffic in the underlaid cell is light. run the MOD CELLHOCTRL command to set Min Power Level For Directed Retry of the DCS1800 cell to 0. and UL Subcell General Overload Threshold[%] to 80. Ltd. MS 1 is assigned to a channel of the GSM900 cell. UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold to 50. This indicates that the call in the underlaid cell can be assigned to the overlaid cell when the traffic in the underlaid cell is heavy and the signals in the overlaid cell are strong enough. run the RMV CELL command to delete the cell on the other frequency band. 7. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal cell). MS 1 is assigned to the underlaid GSM900 cell because the load of the underlaid cell is not higher than UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold(%). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2 Configuring the Multiband Network Postrequisite l Verifying an enhanced dual-band network NOTE After the verification. use MS 1 to call a fixed-line phone.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) DBLFREQADJIDXTYPE=BYIDX. 3.

.

The AMR HR supports the 7. The EFR function is not license-controlled. see the user manuals related to Huawei MSC. BSC. For details. Ltd. see Activate BSC License. NEs Involved MS. The speech version is configured to improve the speech quality. half-rate speech version 3. Prerequisite l l l l The AMR function is license-controlled. the EFR function cannot be enabled forcibly.95 kbit/s coding scheme only when Service Type of the Abis interface is IP or HDLC. The license is activated on the Local Maintenance Terminal. The half rate function is license-controlled. For details. and MSC. None. 3-1 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 3 Configuring the Speech Version 3 Scenario Impact Configuring the Speech Version This describes how to configure the speech version on the Local Maintenance Terminal.. or both. BTS. In A over IP mode. For Huawei MSC. l l l Preparation Table 3-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the EFR/AMR/HR Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 Source Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the BSC should be configured with full-rate speech version 3.

1. One to four coding rates can be selected.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Configure the AMR. run the MOD CELLPWRHW2 or MOD CELLPWRHW3 command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure the parameters related to the AMR power control. Configure AMR rate control switch to select different rate adjustment algorithms. Run the MOD CELLCCAMR command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure AMR FR and AMR HR. 3-2 . Run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure AFR Radio Link Timeout and AHR Radio Link Timeout to configure the timeout period of radio link. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the SET CELLSOFT command to change Cell EFR Forced Switch to YES(YES). 6. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to change Speech Version to FULL_rate_Ver3 (Full-rate Ver 3). select Half_rate_Ver3(Half-rate Ver 3) simultaneously. 7. 4. Configure AMR ACS[F] and AMR ACS[H] to select different coding rates. 2. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to change Speech Version to FULL_rate_Ver2 (Full-rate Ver 2). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure AMR power control parameters of the cell. According to the value of Power Control Switch. Set Power Control Switch to HW2(HW2 Power Control) or HW3(HW3 Power Control).3 Configuring the Speech Version HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID VOICEVER Parameter Name Speech Version Example Configuring EFR: FULL_rate_Ver2 (Full-rate Ver 2) Configuring AMR: Full_rate_Ver3(Full-rate Ver 3). NOTE 3. If the cell supports the HR services. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Configure EFR forcibly On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 5. Set Intracell F-H HO Allowed to YES(YES). Ltd. Run the SET CELLHOBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure the AMR intra-cell TCHF-TCHH handover parameters. Half_rate_Ver3(Half-rate Ver 3) Configuring HR: FULL_rate_Ver1 (Full-rate Ver 1) Source Network planning AVer A Interface Tag GSM_PHASE_2 Network planning Procedure l Configure the EFR. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to change A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2.

set its Channel Type to TCHHR(TCH Half Rate). 1. TCHBUSYTHRES=0. VOICEVER=Full_rate_Ver2-0. /*Configure the AMR call parameters of the cell*/ MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. VOICEVER=Full_rate_Ver1-0&Full_rate_Ver2-1&Full_rate_Ver3-0&Half_rate_Ver1-0&Half_ rate_Ver2-0&Half_rate_Ver3-0. CELLIDX=0. set its Channel Type to TCHFR(TCH Full Rate). ----End Example An example script for configuring the EFR is as follows: MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. To enable the HR services of the TRX that is not configured with TCHHs. ACTCDSETF=4_75Kbps-1&5_15Kbps-1&5_90Kbps-1&6_70Kbps-1. CELLIDX=0. /*Configure the timeout period of radio link*/ MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. To configure a channel as a TCHF fixedly or as a dynamically adjusted channel. ULADJPRD=15. CELLNAME="0". Currently. /*Configure AMR FR and AMR HR*/ MOD CELLCCAMR: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. DLADJPRD=15. 4. /*Configure the AMR intra-cell TCHF-TCHH parameters*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Run the MOD CHAN command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to change the channel type. 2. Run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. 3.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 3 Configuring the Speech Version 8. ACTCDSETH=4_75Kbps-1&5_15Kbps-1&5_90Kbps-1&6_70Kbps-1. CELLIDX=0. Half_rate_Ver2 (Half-rate Ver 2) under Speech Version is reserved. Run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure TCH Traffic Busy Threshold. AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=50. PWRCTRLSW=HW3. CELLIDX=0. Run the MOD BTSMPMODE command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to change the multiplexing mode of the Abis interface. Set Multiplexing Mode to MODE1_1 or MODE2_1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. AHRDSBLCNT=20. /*Configure the parameters related to the AMR power control*/ MOD CELLPWRHW3: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to change Speech Version to FULL_rate_Ver1 (Full-rate Ver 1). An example script for configuring the AMR is as follows: /*Change the A interface tag to be GSM_PHASE_2*/ MOD BSCBASIC: AVer=GSM_PHASE_2. To configure a channel as a TCHH fixedly. no service of halfrate version 2 is available.. NOTE l Configure the HR. AFRDSBLCNT=20. Set Channel Type to TCHHR(TCH Half Rate). RATECTRLSW=ALG1. /*Change the speech version to be full-rate version 2*/ MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the MOD TRXDEV command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES(YES). INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES. An example script for configuring the HR is as follows: Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 3-3 . Ltd. CELLIDX=0. CELLIDX=0. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. CELLIDX=0. /*Configure the AMR power control parameters of the cell*/ MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=YES.

l Deactivating the speech version 1. CELLIDX=0.. or HAMR. run the DSP CALLRES command to query the call resources of a user. TCHBUSYTHRES=50. HR. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTSIDX=1. CELLIDX=0. 3-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the LST CELLCCACCESS command to query the speech version of the cell. VOICEVER=Full_rate_Ver1-1.3 Configuring the Speech Version HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) /*Change the multiplexing mode of the Abis interface*/ MOD BTSMPMODE: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Verify that the corresponding speech version is deactivated. Verify that the speech version in the query result is FR. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . /*Configure TCH Traffic Busy Threshold*/ MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. FAMR. Ltd. /*Change the speech version*/ MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to modify the setting of Speech Version and clear the unnecessary speech versions. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MPMODE=MODE1_1. EFR. Postrequisite l Verifying the speech version – On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

ALC Switch ALC Mode Example 5 0 OPEN(Open) FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed Level Mode) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 4 Configuring ALC 4 Scenario Impact None NEs Involved BSC Configuring ALC Automatic level control (ALC) adjusts the gain of digital voice signals on the uplink and downlink every 20 ms and changes the amplitude of digital voice signals in static or dynamic mode. Slot No. and reduces interference among the normal calls. This keeps the voice level of the entire network in a predefined state. Preparation Table 4-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ALC Parameter ID SRN SN ALCSWITH ALCADAPTMODE Parameter Name Subrack No. Ltd. The GDPUC or GDPUX is already configured. ALC and TFO cannot be enabled at the same time.. 4-1 . Prerequisite l l l ALC is not restricted by the license. ALC is configured to keep the voice level of the entire network in a predefined state and avoid the volume fluctuation of two parties during a call. prevents the volume fluctuation of the two parties during a call.

If you do not set DSP No.4 Configuring ALC HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID Parameter Name Example FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode) ADAPTIVE (Adaptive Mode) Source Network planning Network planning Procedure l Set FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed Level Mode).. l Set FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode). run the MOD DSPTC command. ----End Example An example script for configuring ALC is as follows: /*Configure fixed level mode*/ MOD DSPTC: SRN=5. run the MOD DSPTC command. If you need to reduce the voice. 4-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. all the parameters related to the DSP TC are configured. use the default value 6. ALCSWITH=OPEN. set ALC Fix Target Level [dBm0] to -23. use the default values -4 and -23 respectively. 1. Ltd. ALCSWITH=OPEN. If you do not set DSP No. If you need to reduce the voice. and ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode). l Set ADAPTIVE(Adaptive Mode). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. all the parameters related to the DSP TC are configured. SN=0. set ALC Fix Target Level [dBm0] to -4. SN=0. Set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open). NOTE If you need to raise the voice. /*Configure fixed gain mode*/ MOD DSPTC: SRN=5. 1. all the parameters related to the DSP TC are configured. and ALC Mode to FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed Level Mode). /*Configure adaptive mode*/ MOD DSPTC: SRN=5. run the MOD DSPTC command. set ALC Fix Gain[dB] to 3.. retain the default value -18. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . SN=0. set ALC Fix Gain[dB] to 12. ALCADAPTMODE=FIXEDLEVEL.. ALCADAPTMODE=ADAPTIVE. ALCSWITH=OPEN. For ALC Fix Target Level [dBm0]. NOTE If you need to raise the voice. For ALC Max Target Level[dBm0] and ALC Min Target Level[dBm0]. For ALC Fix Gain[dB]. NOTE The value of the adaptive level should be between ALC Min Target Level[dBm0] and ALC Max Target Level[dBm0]. Set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open). Set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open). On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. ALCADAPTMODE=FIXEDGAIN. 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If you do not set DSP No. and ALC Mode to ADAPTIVE(Adaptive Mode).

ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode). Verifying deactivation of ALC: In the same cell. 4-3 . In the same cell. Ltd. 1. use MS 1 to call MS 2 with a normal voice. hang up the phone. 4. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open).. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ALC Switch to OPEN(Open). run the LST DSPTC command to verify that ALC Switch is set to OPEN. 2. 5. Use MS1 to call MS2 again with a normal voice. and ALC Fix Gain[dB] to 12. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that the voice volume is restored to that before the ALC function is enabled. use MS 1 to call MS 2 with a normal voice.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 4 Configuring ALC Postrequisite l Verifying ALC NOTE This section takes the verification of the FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode) mode as an example. and ALC Fix Gain[dB] to 0. ALC Mode to FIXEDGAIN(Fixed Gain Mode). The volume of the heard voice increases. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Deactivating ALC 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Then. The method of verifying the FIXEDLEVEL(Fixed Level Mode) or ADAPTIVE(Adaptive Mode) mode is similar. 3. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ALC Switch to CLOSE(Close).

.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 5 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation 5 Prerequisite Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation Acoustic echo cancellation (AEC) can decrease acoustic echo caused by the MS. Preparation Table 5-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AEC Data Type TC DSP attributes Parameter ID SRN SN AECSWITH Parameter Name Subrack No. 5-1 .. AEC and TFO cannot be enabled at the same time. Ltd. None NEs Involved BSC l l The GDPUC or GDPUX is already configured. Scenario Impact AEC is configured to reduce or cancel the acoustic echo during the call. thus improving the network quality and voice quality. Slot No. thus improving the voice quality. AEC Switch Example 5 0 OPEN(Open) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

. NOTE l l l l The echo is easily generated when a common MS is enabled with the handsfree function and placed in a sealing box. Verifying deactivation of AEC: Verify that an acoustic echo exists or becomes higher.. If you do not set DSP No. 2. Check whether the acoustic echo is eliminated or becomes lower and whether the call is normal. The electric echo problem needs to be solved by the CN side. Ltd. Postrequisite l Verifying AEC 1. run the MOD DSPTC command to set AEC Switch to CLOSE(Close). run the MOD DSPTC command. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Deactivating AEC 1. The echo generated between an MS and a fixed-line phone is termed as electric echo. SN=0. all the parameters related to the DSP TC are configured. Set AEC Switch to OPEN (Open) and retain the default values of other related parameters. AECSWITCH=OPEN. When the satellite transmission is used over the Abis interface or Ater interface. ----End Example An example script for configuring AEC is as follows: MOD DSPTC: SRN=5. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The acoustic echo is generated between MSs. 5-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.5 Configuring Acoustic Echo Cancellation HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. you need to set AEC Path Delay[ms] to eliminate the extra delay due to satellite transmission.

Ltd. 6. 6-1 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast 6 About This Chapter Configuring Cell Broadcast Cell broadcast is a teleservice that periodically broadcasts messages to all the MSs in a specified area.1 Configuring Cell Broadcast This describes how to configure cell broadcast on the Local Maintenance Terminal with the cooperation of the server and CBC operating system. With cell broadcast..2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast This describes how to configure simplified cell broadcast on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the mobile network operators can provide special services for users. 6.

Preparation Table 6-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring cell broadcast Data Type GXPUM Parameter ID SRN SN BT BackType Parameter Name Subrack No. Prerequisite l l Cell broadcast is restricted by the license.1 Configuring Cell Broadcast This describes how to configure cell broadcast on the Local Maintenance Terminal with the cooperation of the server and CBC operating system. refer to Activate BSC License. Slot No. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . BTS. Ltd. the network sends messages to the MS and does not require any response from the MS. Board Type Back Type Example 0 0 GXPUM NONE (Independent Mode) 0 0 0 OPEN(Open) 0 0 VALID (Valid) H'DF Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning GXPUM port attributes SRN SN PN PortSwitch Subrack No. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. VLAN Port Valid Switch MAC Address Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning GXPUM VLAN parameters SRN SN AddrValid MAC 6-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Panel Port Switch Subrack No. Scenario Impact With cell broadcast.. Port No. and CBC. Slot No. BSC. Slot No.6 Configuring Cell Broadcast HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6. None. For details. NEs Involved MS.

168. Ltd..100. TRX Board Path No. Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 6-3 .1 1 255.160.255.168.1 PHASE_FLA G-1 cbc 192.101. Channel No.255.0 bsc 10 086 460 00 SPPRTSTAN DARD (SupportStand ard CB) 60000 YES(Yes) 192.101.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Data Type Parameter ID IP NETMASK Parameter Name Ip Address Net Mask BSC name Area Code CC MCC MNC Support Cell Broadcast Example 192.6 6 0 46000 BYIDX(By Index) 0 0 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning BSC attributes Name AreaCode CC MCC MNC SpprtCB CB interface CBIPPRT parameters IFCBSHAKE HAND BSCGATEW AYIP CBCItfPara CBC parameters CBCNAME CBCIP CBCPRT OPNAME TRX channel attributes IDXTYPE CELLIDX TRXBN TRXPN CHNO CBC interface port CB interface handshake BSC Gateway CBC Interface Param CBC Name CBC IP CBC port Owned Operator Index Type Cell Index TRX Board No.

. yyy. run the ADD CBC command to add the parameters related to the CBC.255. xxx. Choose Start > Run.xxx to check whether the communication between the CBC and the BSC is normal. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.xxx.255.xxx. the following operations must be performed. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to change Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD(SupportStandard CB). enter ping xxx.yyy.xxx. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The Run text box is displayed.6 Configuring Cell Broadcast HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID CHTYPE Parameter Name Channel Type Example BCCH_CBC H(BCCH +CBCH) Source Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Type cmd to display the command line window. Log in to the CBC operating system as the system administrator. 4. 6-4 . Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1. If the channel is the SDCCH8.xxx. Ltd.yyy.yyy indicates the IP address for the router. l If the channel is the main BCCH.yyy. change SDCCH8(SDCCH8) to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH +CBCH). the following operations need not be performed. run the MOD XPUPORT command to configure the attributes of the port on the GXPUM. run the ADD BRD command to add a GXPUM. 5. 3. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.xxx. Specify the IP address for the CBC. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.xxx indicates the external IP address for the cell broadcast service.yyy. run the MOD XPUVLAN command to configure the VLAN parameters of the GXPUM. run the MOD CHAN command to change the corresponding channel type.255 yyy. run the MOD CBPARA command to change CB interface handshake to YES(Yes). change MBCCH(Main BCCH) to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH +CBCH). enter route add xxx. l Step 9 Configure the route of the CBC server. Otherwise. Step 8 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the setting succeeds.xxx mask 255.xxx. If the communication is normal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 6. NOTE If the CBC and server are in different network segments. Step 7 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. After the setting is complete. 2.yyy. In the displayed window. run the LST CHAN command to check whether Channel Type is set to MBCCH(Main BCCH) or SDCCH8(SDCCH8). Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

BSCGATEWAYIP="192. ----End Example An example script for configuring cell broadcast is as follows: /*Add a GXPUM*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0.. choose Trace > Trace Message on the Abis Interface > RSL Message. BT=GXPUM. A dialog box is displayed. TRXPN=0.255. /*Modify the attributes of the TRX channel*/ MOD CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. /*Modify the parameters related to the CB interface*/ MOD CBPARA: CBIPPRT=60000. NETMASK="255. /*Change "Support Cell Broadcast" to "SPPRTSTANDARD(SupportStandard CB)"*/ MOD BSCBASIC: Name="bsc". TRXBN=0. 6-5 . Ltd. /*Modify the VLAN parameters of the GXPUM*/ MOD XPUVLAN: SRN=0.168. /*Add the parameters related to the CBC*/ ADD CBC: CBCNAME="cbc". Postrequisite l Verifying cell broadcast 1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) NOTE 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast The ping command is used to check the communication between the CBC and the BSC rather than the CBC services. CELLIDX=0.11".168.255. PN=0. On the Trace & Monitor tab page. MNC="00". /*Query the attributes of the TRX channel*/ LST CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. PortSwitch=OPEN.100. CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH. AreaCode=10. SN=0.66". /*Configure the attributes of the port on the GXPUM*/ MOD XPUPORT: SRN=0. IFCBSHAKEHAND=YES. AddrValid=VALID. as shown in Figure 6-1.0". Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CBCPRT=0. MCC="460". SN=0. CC=086. TRXBN=0.101. CHNO=0. CBCItfPara=PHASE_FLAG-0. CBCIP="192.101. IP="192. CELLIDX=0. SN=0. OPNAME="46000". MAC=H'DF.1". SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD. BackType=NONE.160.

if SMS Broadcast Command exists in Message Type. In the displayed dialog box shown in Figure 6-2. and click OK. 3. Ltd.. you can infer that the cell broadcast function operates normally. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Set Tracing Mode to Report.6 Configuring Cell Broadcast HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Figure 6-1 Trace RSL Message on the Abis Interface dialog box 2. Figure 6-2 Tracing the RSL Message at Abis Interface 6-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

The simplified cell broadcast and the cell broadcast provided by the CBC cannot be used at the same time. For details. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Slot No. . Network planning Network planning Network planning 6-7 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Simplified cell broadcast feature cannot be used in combination with the cell broadcast function provided by the CBC. and BSC. l Preparation Table 6-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring simplified cell broadcast Data Type GXPUM Parameter ID SRN SN BT BackType Parameter Name Subrack No. refer to Activate BSC License. 6. Scenario Simplified cell broadcast provides the simplified cell broadcast services without the CBC system.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast l Deactivating cell broadcast 1. you can infer that the cell broadcast function is deactivated successfully. Prerequisite l l Simplified cell broadcast is restricted by the license.. Impact NEs Involved MS. If SMS Broadcast Command does not exist in Message Type. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Board Type Back Type Example 0 0 GXPUM NONE (Independent Mode) 0 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning GXPUM port attributes SRN SN PN Subrack No. Ltd. Port No.2 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast This describes how to configure simplified cell broadcast on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verifying deactivation of cell broadcast: The method of verifying the deactivation of the cell broadcast function is identical to that of verifying the cell broadcast function. None. Slot No. BTS. 2.

255. Slot No. Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning TRX channel attributes IDXTYPE CELLIDX TRXBN TRXPN CHNO 6-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.0 bsc 10 086 460 00 SPPRTSIMPL E (SupportSimpl e CB) 60000 YES(Yes) 192.1 PHASE_FLAG -1 BYIDX(By Index) 0 0 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning GXPUM VLAN parameters SRN SN AddrValid MAC IP NETMASK BSC attributes Name AreaCode CC MCC MNC SpprtCB CB interface parameters CBIPPRT IFCBSHAKEH AND BSCGATEWA YIP CBCItfPara CBC interface port CB interface handshake BSC Gateway CBC Interface Param Index Type Cell Index TRX Board No. Ltd. Channel No. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .6 Configuring Cell Broadcast HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID PortSwitch Parameter Name Panel Port Switch Subrack No.168.101.255.168.101.11 255.. TRX Board Path No. VLAN Port Valid Switch MAC Address Ip Address Net Mask BSC name Area Code CC MCC MNC Support Cell Broadcast Example OPEN(Open) 0 0 VALID(Valid) H'DF 192.

run the MOD XPUPORT command to configure the attributes of the port on the GXPUM. 6-9 . run the ADD BRD command to add the GXPUM. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD XPUVLAN command to configure the VLAN parameters of the GXPUM.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Data Type Parameter ID CHTYPE Parameter Name Channel Type Example BCCH_CBCH (BCCH +CBCH) BYIDX(By Index) 0 YES(YES) Source Network planning Source Cell Name IDXTYPE CELLIDX SUPPORTCEL LBROADCAS T Index Type Cell Index Support cell broadcast name Index type Cell Index Geography scope Code Update Chan ID Coding scheme Content of message Repeat Interval Start time End time Network planning Network planning Network planning Simplified cell broadcast message IDXTYPE CELLINDEX GS CODE UPDATE CHANID SCHEME TEXT REP INT ST ET BYIDX(By Index) 0 LAC(LAC) 3 0 1 GB2312 (GB2312) test 1 2 08-12-19 17:55:50 08-12-19 17:55:51 Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Ltd.

/*Change "Support cell broadcast name" to "YES(YES)"*/ MOD CELLSBC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. SN=0. SCHEME=GB2312. ----End Example An example script for configuring simplified cell broadcast is as follows: /*Add a GXPUM*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. /*Add the simplified cell broadcast message*/ ADD SMSCB: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. /*Modify the VLAN parameters of the GXPUM*/ MOD XPUVLAN: SRN=0. INT=2. TEXT="test". BT=GXPUM. Step 9 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.1". Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. AddrValid=VALID. run the MOD CELLSBC command to change Support cell broadcast name to YES(YES). run the MOD CBPARA command to change CB interface handshake to YES(Yes). l Step 8 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. GS=LAC. A dialog box is displayed. CELLIDX=0. TRXPN=0. AreaCode=10. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to change Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSIMPLE(SupportSimple CB). run the LST CHAN command to check whether Channel Type is set to MBCCH(Main BCCH) or SDCCH8(SDCCH8). TRXBN=0.255. /*Modify the attributes of the TRX channel*/ MOD CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. change SDCCH8(SDCCH8) to SDCCH_CBCH(SDCCH +CBCH). MAC=H'DF. Step 7 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CODE=3. SpprtCB=SPPRTSIMPLE. ET=2008&11&15&15&00&13.. CHNO=0.6 Configuring Cell Broadcast HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Query the attributes of the TRX channel*/ LST CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.101. NETMASK="255.168. /*Configure the attributes of the port on the GXPUM*/ MOD XPUPORT: SRN=0. BSCGATEWAYIP="192. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . change MBCCH(Main BCCH) to BCCH_CBCH(BCCH +CBCH). Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MCC="460". CELLIDX=0. CHTYPE=BCCH_CBCH. CC=086. TRXBN=0.255. Ltd. IFCBSHAKEHAND=YES. as shown in Figure 6-3. CBCItfPara=PHASE_FLAG-0. l If the channel is the main BCCH. SN=0. SUPPORTCELLBROADCAST=YES. ST=2008&11&15&15&46&13. CHANID=1. Postrequisite l Verifying simple cell broadcast 1. On the Trace & Monitor tab page.168. /*Modify the parameters related to the CB interface*/ MOD CBPARA: CBIPPRT=60000.0". IP="192. run the MOD CHAN command to change the corresponding channel type. BackType=NONE. /*Change "Support Cell Broadcast" to "SPPRTSIMPLE(SupportSimple CB)"*/ MOD BSCBASIC: Name="bsc". If the channel is the SDCCH8. SN=0.101. UPDATE=0. MNC="00". REP=1. PortSwitch=OPEN. choose Trace > Trace Message on the Abis Interface > RSL Message. PN=0. CELLINDEX=0. run the ADD SMSCB command to add the simplified cell broadcast message for the cell. CELLIDX=0. 6-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.11".

Set Tracing Mode to Report. if SMS Broadcast Command exists in Message Type. you can infer that the simple cell broadcast runs normally. Figure 6-4 Trace the RSL Message at Abis Interface dialog box Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. In the displayed dialog box shown in Figure 6-4. 3. 6-11 .. and click OK.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 6 Configuring Cell Broadcast Figure 6-3 Trace RSL Message on the Abis Interface dialog box 2.

2. 6-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set Support Cell Broadcast to NOTSPPRTBC(NotSupport CB).. Ltd. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verifying deactivation of simple cell broadcast: The method of verifying the deactivation of the simple cell broadcast function is identical to that of verifying the simple cell broadcast function. If SMS Broadcast Command does not exist in Message Type. you can infer that the simple cell broadcast function is deactivated successfully.6 Configuring Cell Broadcast HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l Deactivating simplified cell broadcast 1. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

Ciphering is configured to ensure the information security. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 7-1 . For details. and HLR Prerequisite l l Ciphering is license-controlled.. AUC. MSC/VLR. Preparation Table 7-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ciphering Data Type Basic call control attributes of the cell Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX RACHBUSYTH RED PAGTIMES ASSLOADJUDG EEN Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index RACH Busy Threshold Paging Times Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 16 4 DISABLE (DISABLE) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Activate BSC License. Ltd. BTS. NEs Involved MS. BSC.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 7 Configuring Ciphering 7 Scenario Impact None Configuring Ciphering The ciphering algorithm encrypts the subscriber information such as the voice and data so that the information is securely transmitted on the Um interface.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . A5/3 bsc 12 086 460 00 GSM_PHASE_ 2Plus Cell basic attributes BSC basic attributes ENCRY Name AreaCode CC MCC MNC AVer 7-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 Configuring Ciphering HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID DTLOADTHRE D MSMAXRETRA N ERGCALLDIS ECSC MBR REASSEN EMLPPEN Parameter Name Directed Retry Load Access Threshold MS MAX Retrans Emergent Call Disable ECSC Multi-band report Allow Reassign Allow EMLPP SD Fast Ho Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC[s] Timer For SD Fast Ho trig Encryption Algorithm BSC name Area Code CC MCC MNC A Interface Tag Example 85 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 4_Times (4_Times) YES(YES) YES(YES) 2 YES(YES) YES(YES) ON(ON) 10 Cell software parameters Cell timer SDFASTHOSWI TCH WAITRESVCHA NREFRESHTIM ER WTSDFASTHOTRIGTMR 5 A5/0.. Ltd.

ERGCALLDIS=YES. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to configure the ciphering algorithm. ECSC=YES. ENCRY=A5/0-1&A5/3-1. CC=086. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to configure the basic call parameters of the cell. run the SET CELLTMR command to set Timer For SD Fast Ho trig. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 7-3 l Deactivating ciphering 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 6 Enable the A5/0 and A5/3 ciphering algorithms on the MSC side. AVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 7 Configuring Ciphering Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. PAGTIMES=4. 2. NOTE A5/0 must be included in the encryption algorithm. CELLIDX=0. DTLOADTHRED=85. When the call is set up. see the related configuration manual. REASSEN=YES. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l Verifying ciphering 1. MSMAXRETRAN=4_Times. ----End Example An example script for configuring ciphering is as follows: /*Modify the basic call parameters of the cell*/ MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. RACHBUSYTHRED=16. EMLPPEN=YES. /*Set "Encryption Algorithm"*/ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. AreaCode=12. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to modify the setting of the Encryption Algorithm parameter by clearing the unnecessary ciphering algorithms. Ltd. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . MNC="00". MBR=2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. After the window for tracing the BSSAP messages on the A interface is opened. CELLIDX=0. initiate a call in the test cell. WAITRESVCHANREFRESHTIMER=10. run the SET CELLSOFT command to set SD Fast Ho. MCC="460". /*Set "Timer For SD Fast Ho trig"*/ SET CELLTMR: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ASSLOADJUDGEEN=DISABLE. WTSDFASTHOTRIGTMR=5. CELLIDX=0. NOTE SD Fast Ho is configured to improve the security of the A5 ciphering algorithm. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. /*Set "SD Fast Ho"*/ SET CELLSOFT: SDFASTHOSWITCH=ON. /*Set "A Interface Tag"*/ MOD BSCBASIC: Name="bsc". verify that the Cipher Mode CMD message is present. For details. For details. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2 or GSM_PHASE_2Plus.

. Verify that the Cipher Mode CMD message does not exist in the queried result. Verifying deactivation of ciphering: The method of verifying the deactivation of the ciphering function is identical to that of verifying the ciphering function. 7-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 Configuring Ciphering HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

8. The application of frequency hopping in the GSM supresses the interference and increases the system capacity. The frequency hopping improves the speech quality.3 Changing None FH to Baseband FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to baseband FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping 8 Context Configuring Frequency Hopping About This Chapter With this feature. 8. however. and high security. it may have negative impact on the network.5 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to RF FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 8. Therefore. MCS5-MCS9. it has negative impact on PS services. Ltd.Frequency hopping is a spread-spectrum technology.1 Principles of Configuring the FH Cell This describes the principles of configuring the frequency hopping (FH) cell. 8.. Especially in high data rate coding schemes such as CS3-CS4. Frequency hopping involves RF hopping and baseband hopping. 8.4 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to baseband FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. anti-attenuation. you are advised not to enable frequency hopping in this case.2 Changing None FH to RF FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to RF FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 8.6 Changing RF FH to None FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 8.7 Changing Baseband FH to None FH Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. which has the features such as resistance to interference. wanted signals are transmitted by switching a carrier among many frequencies according to the specified sequences. 8-1 .

8-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 8. Ltd.9 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from hybrid FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 8.8 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH This describes how to set the FH mode of a cell to hybrid FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal..8 Configuring Frequency Hopping HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 8.10 Configuring MA Group This describes how to configure a MA group for the cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. E-GSM. In initial configuration. the base station color code (BCC) of a cell must be the same as the training sequence code (TSC) in the FH data table. 8-3 l l l l l l l l l l l Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . the cells cannot contain the frequencies from the incompatible EGSM or 1800M band. If a cell is configured with less than two TRXs. the frequencies from the 900P. they cannot be configured simultaneously. and the RGSM band provides the frequencies numbered from 955 to 974. and R-GSM. For frequency hopping in non co-BCCH cells. the odd-numbered channels on the TRXs in the underlaid subcell must be SDCCHs. 900E. the base station color code (BCC) of a cell must be different from the training sequence code (TSC) in the FH data table. the frequency band where the TRX with the SDCCH operates should not be higher than that where the TRX with the main BCCH operates. the frequencies from the 900P and 900E bands are called compatible frequencies while those from the 900R and 1800M bands are called incompatible frequencies. In a double-timeslot cell.1 Principles of Configuring the FH Cell This describes the principles of configuring the frequency hopping (FH) cell. the TRX carrying the main BCCH must be configured in the underlaid subcell. The P-GSM (900P) band provides the frequencies numbered from 1 to 124. and 900R bands are called compatible frequencies while the frequencies from the 1800M band are called incompatible frequencies. When a double-timeslot cell is also a concentric cell. the first channel to be configured is the BCCH by default. the TRXs in the underlaid subcell should not be in the same FH group with other TRXs. The frequency of the TRX that carries the SDCCH can be compatible or incompatible with the main BCCH frequency. if the main BCCH frequency belongs to the 900P band.. In RF FH. the frequencies in a FH group must be on the same frequency band. the frequencies from the 900P band are called compatible frequencies while those from the 900E and 1800M bands are called incompatible frequencies. When the cell software parameter TSC Plan Enable is set to the ON state. at least one static PDCH should be configured in the overlaid subcell. If baseband FH is configured in a COBCCH cell. the E-GSM (900E) provides the frequencies numbered 0 and those numbered from 975 to 1023. If a double-timeslot cell is configured with baseband FH. the TRX carrying the main BCCH must be set to No FH.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping 8. If the baseband FH and the EDGE functionality conflict. When the cell software parameter TSC Plan Enable is set to the OFF state. adhere to the following principles: l The GSM900 is classified into sub frequency bands: P-GSM. If the frequency of the TRX that carries the SDCCH and the main BCCH frequency belong to the same frequency band. If the main BCCH frequency belongs to the 900E band. If the main BCCH frequency belongs to the 900R band. When configuring an FH cell. Ltd. the cell should not be configured as an FH cell. If the main BCCH frequency belongs to the 900P band. The PDCH can configured only on the TRX of compatible main BCCH frequency. In a double-timeslot cell.

the parameter Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of Concentric Cell of GPRS Attributes should be set to Convert dynamic channel in both subcells and underlaid subcell preferred. If a single-transceiver BTS is configured with baseband FH. or the number of carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier in an EGPRS cell is greater than 16 but smaller than or equal to 32. l In a concentric cell. the carrier assigned to the MS accessing the network for the first time should meet the following conditions: It should be located in the UL subcell and be compatible with the BCCH carrier. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . In a cell. the TCHs on the carriers incompatible with the BCCH carrier can be converted into PDCHs if the MS supports the related frequency bands. When the long-range FH switch is turned on. The carriers incompatible with the BCCH carrier can be configured with PDCHs or the channels on these carriers can be converted into PDCHs so that the MS can be assigned these carriers through the Packet Timeslot Reconfigure procedure. if the BCCH carrier is located in the OL subcell.8 Configuring Frequency Hopping l HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) In the baseband FH. In RF FH. The carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier and those incompatible with the BCCH carrier should not be configured in the same MA list. and PDCH should be configured on the carrier. the carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier should be configured with PDCHs. you are advised to enable a TRX (the BCCH TRX is preferred) to meet one of the following conditions to ensure the initial access of the MS: – l l The TRX does not participate in FH and is compatible with the BCCH. the same timeslots should not have the same FH group number and the same Mobile Allocation Index Offset (MAIO) simultaneously. If the number of carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier in a cell is greater than 32. Ltd. at least one non-FH TRX should be configured in the cell. the TCHs on only the carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier can be converted into PDCHs if the MS does not support the related frequency band. if the BCCH carrier is located in the UL subcell. the TRX is configured with static PDCHs or channels that can be converted into PDCHs. If there is an MA containing a BCCH-compatible frequency and a non-BCCH-compatible frequency in the configured FH cell.. the FH group of non-main BCCH frequencies in timeslot 0 is exclusive to the main BCCH frequencies. In addition. the number of carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier can be greater than 24 in a GPRS cell or greater than 16 in an EGPRS cell. a maximum of one MA list in which the carriers are compatible with the BCCH carrier can be configured. the TRXs whose frequencies are in one FH group must be configured in the same cabinet. the TRXs whose frequencies are in one FH group must be configured in the same cabinet group.If the number of carriers compatible with the BCCH carrier in a GPRS cell is greater than 24 but smaller than or equal to 32. In addition. Otherwise. If a double-transceiver BTS is configured with baseband FH. the TRX is configured with static PDCHs or channels that can be converted into PDCHs. If all the traffic channels in a concentric cell are configured as dynamic PDTCHs. In a concentric cell. the TRX carrying the main BCCH must be set to No FH. and the carriers incompatible with the BCCH carrier can be configured with PDCHs or the channels on these carriers can be converted into PDCHs. – 8-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. but the following conditions must be met: – – l l l l l At least one static PDCH should be configured on the BCCH carrier. For the FH TRXs. The TRX participates in FH. the MS cannot access the network. but all the frequencies in the MA are compatible with the BCCH.

and BSC NOTE When the FH mode of a cell is changed from none FH to RF HP. Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. improves the antiinterference capability. the system automatically changes the FH attributes of all TRXs in a cell to RF FH. The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. BTS. it has negative impact on PS services. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name. NEs Involved MS. and increases the capacity of the system. ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to RF FH is as follows: MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Scenario Impact The frequency hopping simplifies frequency planning.2 Changing None FH to RF FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to RF FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. and then set the Frequency hopping mode to RF_FH(RF FH). however.. Preparation Table 8-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing none FH to RF FH Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME FHMODE Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Frequency hopping mode Example BYNAME Cell_1 RF_FH(RF FH) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping 8. 8-5 . CELLNAME="Cell_1". Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. FHMODE=RF_FH. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command.

Then. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name. Start the tracing of the RSL messages on the Abis interface. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . and BSC Prerequisite l l The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. The frequency hopping improves the speech quality.8 Configuring Frequency Hopping HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Postrequisite l Verifying FH 1. BTS. improves the antiinterference capability. 8. see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. and increases the capacity of the system. Select the Frequency hopping mode to 8-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Verify that that the call is normal and the voice quality is good. Scenario Impact The frequency hopping simplifies frequency planning.3 Changing None FH to Baseband FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to baseband FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. it has negative impact on PS services. For details. Ltd.. Preparation Table 8-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing none FH to baseband FH Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME FHMODE BCCHTRXHP Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Frequency hopping mode Frequency hopping mode of BCCH TRX Example BYNAME Cell_1 BaseBand_FH (BaseBand FH) Hop(Hop) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The BTS supports baseband FH. The result shows that the Assignment Command message is traced and the information element h:rf-hoppingchannel in the message is 1. observe the Abis signaling tracing window. NEs Involved MS. Use the MS to make a call in the cell to be verified. however. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command.

the BCCH timeslot is not involved. it has negative impact on PS services. but the rest timeslots can participate in the baseband hopping. see 8. see 8. The BTS supports baseband FH. The Assignment Command message is traced and the information element h:rf-hopping-channel in the message is 1. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. Prerequisite l l The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. Postrequisite l Verifying FH 1. improves the antiinterference capability.6 Changing RF FH to None FH. and BSC NOTE The BSC does not allow the direct switch from RF FH to baseband FH. For how to change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to baseband FH . For how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to none FH. ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to baseband FH with the BCCH TRX involving in FH is as follows: MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. set the BCCH carrier frequency hopping. For details.4 Changing RF FH to Baseband FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to baseband FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. change the FH mode of a cell from RH FH to none FH. The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. Then.3 Changing None FH to Baseband FH. BCCHTRXHP=Hop. however. CELLNAME="Cell_1". BTS. Therefore. 8-7 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . FHMODE=BaseBand_FH. Verify that that the call is normal and the voice quality is good. Scenario Impact The frequency hopping simplifies frequency planning. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 8. see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Ltd. Use the MS to make a call in the cell to be verified.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping BaseBand_FH (BaseBand FH) and then Select the Frequency hopping mode of BCCH TRX to Hop. observe the Abis signaling tracing window. This feature depends on baseband hopping and mutually exclusive RF hopping. and then from none FH to baseband FH. NOTE For the FH that the BCCH carrier participates in. and increases the capacity of the system.. NEs Involved MS.

Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. The frequency hopping improves the speech quality.8 Configuring Frequency Hopping HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. For change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to none FH . FHMODE=BaseBand_FH. NEs Involved MS. and BSC NOTE The BSC does not allow the direct switch from baseband FH to RF FH. change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to RF FH. improves the antiinterference capability.7 Changing Baseband FH to None FH. Scenario Impact The frequency hopping simplifies frequency planning. from RF FH to none FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1". Therefore. and then change baseband FH to none FH. FHMODE=NO_FH. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command and set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH(NO FH). see 8. BTS.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command and set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH(NO FH). Ltd. ----End 8-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BCCHTRXHP=Hop. ----End Example An example script of changing RF FH to baseband FH is as follows: /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. however. see 8.2 Changing None FH to RF FH. 8. from none FH to baseband FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1". run the MOD CELLHOPTP command and set the Frequency hopping mode to RF_FH(RF FH). Change the FH mode of a cell from none FH to RF FH. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command and set the Frequency hopping mode to BaseBand_FH(BaseBand FH). and increases the capacity of the system.5 Changing Baseband FH to RF FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to RF FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it has negative impact on PS services.

The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. BCCHTRXHP=Hop. 8. Preparation Table 8-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing RF FH to none FH Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME FHMODE Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Frequency hopping mode Example BYNAME Cell_1 NO_FH(NO FH) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to none FH is as follows: Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. FHMODE=NO_FH. and BSC Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. NEs Involved MS. FHMODE=RF_FH. however.. from none FH to RF FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1". Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name and set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH (NO FH). it has negative impact on PS services.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping Example An example script of changing baseband FH to RF FH is as follows: /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. from baseband FH to none FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1". Scenario Impact In high data rate coding schemes of PS services. /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.6 Changing RF FH to None FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. BTS. 8-9 . run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. the frequency hopping may have negative impact on the network.

FHMODE=NO_FH. however.8 Configuring Frequency Hopping HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.8 Setting FH Mode to Hybrid FH This describes how to set the FH mode of a cell to hybrid FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name and set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH (NO FH). Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. Ltd. BTS. NEs Involved MS. Preparation Table 8-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing baseband FH to none FH Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME FHMODE Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Frequency hopping mode Example BYNAME Cell_1 NO_FH(NO FH) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. FHMODE=NO_FH. The frequency hopping improves the speech quality.. the frequency hopping may have negative impact on the network. ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to none FH is as follows: MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. 8. 8-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Scenario Impact In high data rate coding schemes of PS services. CELLNAME="Cell".7 Changing Baseband FH to None FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLNAME="Cell_1". 8. and BSC Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. it has negative impact on PS services.

and BSC NOTE The BSC does not allow the direct switch from baseband FH/RF FH to hybrid FH. Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. l l If the FH mode of a cell is none FH. however. BTS.6 Changing RF FH to None FH. do as follows: 1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping Scenario Impact The frequency hopping simplifies frequency planning. and increases the capacity of the system. For how to change the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH to none FH . Ltd. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. The frequency hopping improves the speech quality.7 Changing Baseband FH to None FH. set the FH mode to hybrid FH directly. Preparation The configuration parameters of changing the FH mode from none FH to hybrid FH or from baseband FH or RF FH to hybrid FH are almost the same. NEs Involved MS. improves the antiinterference capability. The following is an example of the parameters planned for changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to hybrid FH. and then from none FH to hybrid FH. l l For how to change the FH mode of a cell from RF FH to none FH. change the FH mode from baseband or RF FH to none FH. see 8.. If the FH mode of a cell is baseband FH or RF FH. 8-11 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name and set the Frequency hopping mode to Hybrid_FH(Hybrid FH). see 8. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. it has negative impact on PS services. Table 8-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to hybrid FH Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME FHMODE BCCHTRXHP Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Frequency hopping mode Frequency hopping mode of BCCH TRX Example BYNAME Cell_1 Hybrid_FH(Hybrid FH) Hop(Hop) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure l If the FH mode of a cell is none FH.

2. Prerequisite The number of TRXs in a cell must be greater than or equal to two. and BSC NOTE To change the FH mode of a cell from hybrid FH to baseband FH or RF FH. 8-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Use the MS to make a call in the cell to be verified. Ltd. NEs Involved MS.8 Configuring Frequency Hopping HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l If the FH mode of a cell is baseband FH or RF FH. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. and then change none FH to baseband FH or RF FH. BCCHTRXHP=Hop. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. the frequency hopping may have negative impact on the network. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command to select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name. BTS. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and then set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH(NO FH). 8. Then. to none FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1". The Assignment Command message is traced and the information element h:rf-hopping-channel in the message is 1. observe the Abis signaling tracing window. ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from none FH to hybrid FH is as follows: MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME..9 Changing Hybrid FH to None FH This describes how to change the FH mode of a cell from hybrid FH to none FH on the Local Maintenance Terminal. first change hybrid FH to none FH. Postrequisite l Verifying FH 1. however. FHMODE=NO_FH. do as follows: 1. Scenario Impact In high data rate coding schemes of PS services. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name and set the Frequency hopping mode to Hybrid_FH(Hybrid FH). BCCHTRXHP=Hop. it has negative impact on PS services. from none FH to hybrid FH*/ CELLNAME="Cell_1". see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. CELLNAME="Cell_1". Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. Verify that that the call is normal and the voice quality is good. FHMODE=Hybrid_FH. An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from baseband FH/RF FH to hybrid FH is as follows: /*Change the FH mode of a cell MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. FHMODE=Hybrid_FH.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping Preparation Table 8-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing hybrid FH to none FH Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME FHMODE Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Frequency hopping mode Example BYNAME Cell_1 NO_FH(NO FH) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Select the target cell according to the Cell Index or Cell Name and set the Frequency hopping mode to NO_FH (NO FH). 8. it affects the PS services. The difference between the maximum ARFCN and the minimum ARFCN is not greater than 111. ----End Example An example script of changing the FH mode of a cell from hybrid FH to none FH is as follows: MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. improve the anti-interference capability. run the MOD CELLHOPTP command. and increase the system capacity. and BSC Prerequisite l l The current cell is configured with FH mode. FHMODE=NO_FH. The interval between two adjacent frequencies is not less than 913. The frequencies of cells must meet at least one of the following conditions: – – The ARFCN is greater than 0 but not greater than 124. CELLNAME="Cell_1". The frequency hopping improves the speech quality. BTS. Scenario Impact The MA group is configured to simplify the frequency planning. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 8-13 – Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .10 Configuring MA Group This describes how to configure a MA group for the cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal. however.. NEs Involved MS.

8 Configuring Frequency Hopping – – – HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) The number of frequencies is not greater than 16.maximum frequency + 1024) is greater than 786. Ltd. The number of frequencies is not greater than 29 and the maximum interval between two frequencies (or minimum frequency .maximum frequency + 1024) is greater than 512. The number of frequencies is not greater than 22 and the maximum interval between two frequencies (or minimum frequency .maximum frequency + 1024) is greater than 896.. . The number of frequencies is not greater than 18 and the maximum interval between two frequencies (or minimum frequency . The number of frequencies is 17 and the minimum ARFCN is 0. – – Preparation Table 8-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the MA group Parameter Type Cell frequency Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME FREQ1 FREQ2 FREQ3 MA group IDXTYPE CELLNAME HSN TSC HOPMODE FREQ1 FREQ2 Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name frequency 1 frequency 2 frequency 3 Index Type Cell Name HSN TSC Frequency hopping mode frequency 1 frequency 2 Example BYNAME Cell_1 30 35 40 BYNAME Cell_1 0 0 BaseBand_FH (BaseBand FH) 30 35 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 8-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

run the MOD CELLCHANHOP command to configure the FH index and MAIO for the added MA groups. Ltd. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script for configuring the MA group is as follows: /*Query the configuration information about the MA group of the cell*/ LST CELLMAGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST CELLCHANHOP command to query the configuration information about the FH index and MAIO of the cell. No. Trx1 Hop Index Trx1 Maio Example 40 BYNAME Cell_1 1 2 0 5 11 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning FH index and MAIO IDXTYPE CELLNAME CHANNO TRXBN1 TRXPN1 TRX1HOPIND EX TRX1MAIO Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.1 TRX Board Pass No. run the LST CELLMAGRP command to query the configuration information about the MA group of the cell. /*Add frequencies*/ Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the ADD CELLMAGRP command to add MA groups for the cell.1 TRX Board No. skip this step. run the MML command MOD CELLMAGRP. 8-15 . If the frequencies configured for the cell are sufficient.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping Parameter Type Parameter ID FREQ3 Parameter Name frequency 3 Index Type Cell Name Channel No. CELLNAME="Cell_1". run the ADD CELLFREQ command to add frequencies for the cell. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. HSN should be the same as the corresponding BCC.. No. NOTE If the original MA groups need to be modified.

/*Query the FH index and MAIO*/ LST CELLCHANHOP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. CELLNAME="Cell_1". FREQ3=40. FREQ2=35. CELLNAME="Cell_1". CELLNAME="Cell_1". Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . HOPMODE=BaseBand_FH. FREQ2=35.8 Configuring Frequency Hopping HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) ADD CELLFREQ: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. TRXPN1=0. TRX1MAIO=11. TSC=0.. HSN=0. FREQ1=30. /*Add MA groups*/ ADD CELLMAGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Ltd. FREQ1=30. 8-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. FREQ3=40. CELLNAME="Cell_1". /*Configure the FH index and MAIO*/ MOD CELLCHANHOP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. TRX1HOPINDEX=5. TRXBN1=2. CHANNO=1.

Ltd. BSC. l l Preparation Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example.. Table 9-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS Data Type BTS basic attributes Parameter ID BTSNAME TYPE UPNODE Parameter Name BTS Name BTS Type Up Node Type Example BTS3012 BTS3012 BSC Source Network planning Network planning Network planning 9-1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Activate BSC License. the call with higher priority is served preferably. The GXPUM and Abis interface board are configured on the GMPS or GEPS. . and MS Prerequisite l l The eMLPP function is restricted by the license. and there is idle port on the Abis interface board. The eMLPP feature should be supported by the MSC. BTS. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. HLR. If the network is congested. NEs Involved HLR. The eMLPP function is configured to ensure normal conversation of the MS with higher priority if the network resources are insufficient. The eMLPP service allows a subscriber to initiate calls with different priorities. MSC. The network side employs different channel assignment strategies for the subscribers according to the priorities.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 9 Configuring eMLPP 9 Scenario Impact None Configuring eMLPP The eMLPP is a supplementary service offered by the GSM system. and MS.

. Slot No. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Port No. 0 26 0 Example Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning TDM BTS3012 MODE4_1 FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) FALSE(Not Support) TDM TDMCELL GSM900 460 34 62 98 UNSUPPORT(Not Support) 0 5 9-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TRX Freq. BTS Description Multiplexing Mode Flex Abis Mode Abis By Pass Mode Service Type Cell Name Cell type Cell MCC Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI Separate Mode TRX Board No.9 Configuring eMLPP HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID SRN SN PN BTSDESC MPMODE FlexAbisMode AbisByPassMod e ServiceMode DCELLNAME DCTYPE DCMCC DCMNC DCLAC DCCI CPLMode TRXBN FREQ Parameter Name Subrack No.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script for configuring eMLPP for a BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode is as follows: /*Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME = "BTS3012". The priorities of the MSs in the HLR are as follows: MS 1 > MS 2 > MS 3. run the MOD CELLGSMR command to configure eMLPP priority. /*Enable the eMLPP function*/ MOD CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. BTSDESC = "TDM BTS3012" . EMLPPEN=YES. TYPE = BTS3012. /*Configure eMLPP*/ MOD CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. CPLMode = UNSUPPORT.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 9 Configuring eMLPP Table 9-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring eMLPP Data Type GSM-R Parameters of the cell Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME EMLPPPRIORIT Y Basic call control parameters of the cell EMLPPEN Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name eMLPP Priority Allow EMLPP Example BYNAME (By Name) TDMCELL Priority2 (Priority 2) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set Allow EMLPP to YES(YES) to enable the eMLPP function. ServiceMode = TDM. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS. DCCI = 98. SRN = 0. TRXBN = 0. DCLAC = 62. DCMCC = "460". FREQ = 5. UPNODE = BSC. 9-3 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .DCELLNAME = "TDMCELL ". SN=26. FlexAbisMode = FLEX_ABIS. EMLPPPRIORITY = Priority2. MPMODE = MODE4_1. NOTE Priority4(Priority 4) is the highest priority whereas PriorityB(Priority B) is the lowest priority. PN = 10. DCTYPE = GSM900. CELLNAME="TDMCELL". Ltd. AbisByPassMode = False. DCMNC = "34". CELLNAME="TDMCELL". Postrequisite l Verifying eMLPP 1.

run the SET BTSOBJ command to block the remaining idle TCHs in the cell. Verifying deactivation of eMLPP: The method of verifying the deactivation of the eMLPP function is identical to that of verifying the eMLPP function. In the test cell. 5. If the handover fails. 3. The call initiated by MS 2 is not affected. must comply with the priorities. The assignment request message can be viewed in the A interface tracing window. Ensure that a higher-priority MS can preempt the channel used by a lower-priority MS by configuring the data on the MSC side. when the eMLPP function is enabled. l Deactivating eMLPP 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. For details. 6.9 Configuring eMLPP HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. When the eMLPP function is enabled. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set Allow EMLPP to NO(NO). NOTE 4. whether an MS with a lower priority can be handed over to another cell is determined by whether the neighboring cell relations is configured correctly (the configuration of the neighboring cell relations is not involved in the configuration of the eMLPP function). see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface and Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Use MS 1 to make a call to the PSTN.. MS 3 is found to be handed over to other cells. Use MS 1 to make a call to the PSTN. which indicates the MS that can be preempted. the channel used by MS 3 is released and then occupied by MS 1. The call initiated by MS 2 is not affected. Choose Trace Message on the A Interface > BSSAP Message and Trace Message on the Abis Interface > RSL Message. use MS 2 and MS 3 separately to make a call to the PSTN. Ltd. The channel used by MS 3 is released (no handover attempt) and then occupied by MS 1. the data configuration on the CN side must be correct. and the configuration relations included in the Priority information element (IE) of the assignment request message. In addition. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 9-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

The priority-based resource reservation function can be combined with the eMLPP function to guarantee the benefits of users and improve the users' satisfaction. NEs Involved BSC.. and MS Prerequisite l l The priority-based resource reservation function is license-controlled.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 10 Configuring Priority-Based Resource Reservation 10 Configuring Priority-Based Resource Reservation With priority-based resource reservation. For details. . the system reserves a certain number of TCHFs for the high-priority users to ensure their QoS. BTS. operators can provide services of different levels for users with different priorities. thus increasing the operators' revenues. Scenario Impact The priority-based resource reservation function is configured to provide services of different levels for users with different priorities. By using this function. Preparation Table 10-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring priority-based resource reservation Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME GRADEACCALLO W HPRIOR Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Grade Access Allow Highest Priority Example BYNAME(By Name) CELL01 YES(YES) 2 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 10-1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. see Activate BSC License.

. it indicates that the function of priority-based resource reservation is activated. Ltd. Postrequisite l Verifying priority-based resource reservation – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Deactivating priority-based resource reservation 1. REVCHANNUM=50. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Grade Access Allow to NO(NO).10 Configuring Priority-Based Resource Reservation HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID REVCHANNUM Parameter Name Reserved Channel Number Example 50 Source Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. set Highest Priority and Reserved Channel Number based on the actual network conditions. HPRIOR=2. In addition. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it indicates that the function of priority-based resource reservation is deactivated. GRADEACCALLOW=YES. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . CELLNAME="CELL01". 2. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Grade Access Allow to YES(YES). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the parameter is set to NO. If the parameter is set to YES. 10-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the LST CELLCHMGBASIC command to check the setting of Grade Access Allow. run the LST CELLCHMGBASIC command to check the setting of Grade Access Allow. ----End Example An example script for configuring priority-based resource reservation is as follows: /*Configure priority-based resource reservation*/ SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. MINRESTIMETCH=60.

Scenario The transmit power of the BTS that serves the MS supporting the SAIC can be reduced on the network side. Therefore. In this way. l Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. AMR full-rate services (AFS). the value of Power Control threshold Adjust for SAIC should be added to that of DL Qual. Ltd. or AMR half-rate services (AHS) in different situations. half-rate services (HS). BTS.. the value of HW3 threshold Adjust for SAIC should be subtracted from that of HW3DL**RexQualHighThred[dB] and HW3DL**RexQualLowThred[dB]. This technique is especially adopted in the single antenna scenario to reduce the interference on the reception of downlink signals. l When Huawei II power control algorithm is applied. Upper Threshold and DL Qual. The Single Antenna Interference Cancellation (SAIC) is a technique for restraining the co-channel interference and adjacentchannel interference. None. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 11-1 . When Huawei III power control algorithm is applied. the interference on the entire network is reduced. Impact NEs Involved BSC.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 11 Configuring Network Support SAIC 11 Configuring Network Support SAIC This describes how to configure the Network Support SAIC. Lower Threshold. see Activate BSC License. the range of the power control threshold can be adjusted according to the following policies during the power control of the BSC or the BTS. ** indicates full-rate services (FS). For details. The MS supports the SAIC function. and MS Prerequisite l l The Network Support SAIC function is license-controlled. l Preparation The MS supporting the SAIC function has a stronger anti-interference capability.

11 Configuring Network Support SAIC HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Table 11-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the Network Support SAIC Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME BTSSAICPCADJSWITCH Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC Power Control Adjustment Power Control Switch Saic Allowed Example BYNAME(By Name) CELL01 ON(ON) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning PWRCTRLSW SAICALLOWED HW3(HW3 Power Control) YES(YES) Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLNAME="CELL01". DLAFSREXQUALLOWTHRED=14. and then set HW3 threshold Adjust for SAIC to 2. and then set Power Control threshold Adjust for SAIC. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 11-2 . DLFSREXQUALLOWTHRED=14. HW3SAICTHREDAPDTVALUE=2. and then set Power Control Switch to HW3(HW3 Power Control) and set Saic Allowed to YES (YES). PWRCTRLSW=HW3. MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command. DLAHSREXQUALHIGHTHRED=16. CELLNAME="CELL01". DLHSREXQUALLOWTHRED=18. run the MOD CELLPWRHW3 command. ----End Example An example script for configuring the Network Support SAIC is as follows: /*Configure Network Support SAIC*/ SET CELLSOFT: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. NOTE l When Huawei III power control algorithm is applied. and then set Switch for BTS Supporting SAIC Power Control Adjustment to ON(ON). CELLNAME="CELL01". Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MOD CELLPWRHW3: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. run the MML command MOD CELLPWRHW2. SAICALLOWED=YES. DLAFSREXQUALHIGHTHRED=14.. BTSSAICPCADJSWITCH=ON. DLHSREXQUALHIGHTHRED=18. DLAHSREXQUALLOWTHRED=16. DLFSREXQUALHIGHTHRED=18. run the SET CELLSOFT command. Ltd. Postrequisite l Verifying network support SAIC Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

l Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. 2.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 11 Configuring Network Support SAIC 1. For details. 2. Verify that the value of the SAIC information element in the MS capability field carried in the Channel Activation message is 0. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Deactivating network support SAIC 1.. Verifying the deactivation of network support SAIC: The operations are the same as those for Verifying Network Support SAIC. 3. Use an MS occupying the non-BCCH to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the test cell. Verify that the value of the SAIC information element in the MS capability field carried in the Channel Activation message is 1.run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command. 11-3 . and set Saic Allowed to NO(NO). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.

.

the system interference is reduced. NEs Involved BSC.. the BSC controls the uplink and downlink power so that the MS and the BTS transmit signals at the proper power.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 12 Configuring Active Power Control 12 Scenario Impact Configuring Active Power Control This describes how to configure the active power control. and the power consumption of the BTS and the MS is decreased. Through the active power control. BTS.1dB) Expected DL RX_LEV Example BYNAME(By Name) CELL01 YES(YES) 50 200 150 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning EXPDLRXLEV 20 Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and MS Preparation Table 12-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the active power control Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME PWRBCDALLOW D COMBINERLOSS DOUBLEANTENN AGAIN PATHLOSS Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Power Forecast Allowed Combiner Loss (0. the QoS is improved. The active power control is enabled to control the transmit power of the BTS and the MS so that the system interference is reduced and the QoS is improved.1dB) Path Loss of Different Frequency Band(0. power control can be performed in time. After an MS accesses the network or an intra-BSC handover is performed successfully. Ltd. In this way. 12-1 .1dB) Double Antenna Gain(0. None.

see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. PATHLOSS=150. Postrequisite l Verifying active power control 1. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 2. COMBINERLOSS=50. set Power Forecast Allowed to YES(YES) and set the following parameters according to the actual conditions of the existing network: Combiner Loss(0. Then. If the parameter is set to NO. On the Local Maintenance Terminal..12 Configuring Active Power Control HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID EXPULRXLEV Parameter Name Expected UL RX_LEV Example 30 Source Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command to set Power Forecast Allowed to NO(NO). 12-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Verify that the values of power-level in the ms-power and bs-power information elements in the Channel Activation messages are greater than those when the active power control function is disabled. Path Loss of Different Frequency Band(0. ----End Example An example script for configuring the active power control is as follows: /*Configure the active power control*/ MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Double Antenna Gain(0. PWRBCDALLOWD=YES. it indicates that the function of active power control is deactivated. run the LST CELLPWRBASIC command to check the setting of Power Forecast Allowed.1dB).1dB). run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command. EXPDLRXLEV=20. EXPULRXLEV=30. Ltd. Expected DL RX_LEV. l Deactivating active power control 1. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. 2.1dB). For details. and Expected UL RX_LEV. CELLNAME="CELL01". DOUBLEANTENNAGAIN=200.

Preparation Table 13-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the robust air interface signalling function Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Example BYNAME(By Name) CELL01 Source Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The speech quality is slightly affected because the signaling messages are repeatedly sent through frame stealing. The robust air interface signalling function includes repeated sending of the FACCH frames in the downlink and the repeated sending of the SACCH frames in the uplink and downlink. and MS Prerequisite l l The robust air interface signalling function is license-controlled. the antiinterference capability of the FACCH and SACCH is improved through repeated sending of the FACCH and SACCH frames.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 13 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling 13 Scenario Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling With the robust air interface signalling function.. the MS and BSC can receive the signaling messages more successfully. when the radio quality is poor. Impact NEs Involved BSC. 13-1 . see Activate BSC License. For details. thus reducing the call drop rate of the MS and improving the accuracy of the BSC handover and power control decision. Ltd. BTS. The robust air interface signalling function helps to improve the performance of the FACCH and SACCH . Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In this manner.

If the two parameters are set to NO. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. set Repeated Downlink FACCH Threshold based on the actual conditions of the network. l Deactivating robust air interface signalling 1. it indicates that the function of robust air interface signalling is activated. 2. Ltd. it indicates that the function of robust air interface signalling is deactivated..13 Configuring Robust Air Interface Signalling HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID REPEATDLFASET REPEATDLFATHR ED REPEATSASET Parameter Name Repeated Downlink FACCH Repeated Downlink FACCH Threshold Repeated SACCH Example YES(YES) 5 YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the two parameters are set to YES. run the LST CELLCCBASIC command to check the settings of Repeated Downlink FACCH and Repeated SACCH. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . run the LST CELLCCBASIC command to check the setting of Repeated Downlink FACCH and Repeated SACCH. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set Repeated Downlink FACCH and Repeated SACCH to NO(NO). Postrequisite l Verifying robust air interface signalling – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. REPEATDLFASET=YES. REPEATDLFATHRED=5. and Repeated SACCH to YES(YES). In addition. 13-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set Repeated Downlink FACCH to YES(YES). REPEATSASET=YES. CELLNAME="CELL01". ----End Example An example script for configuring the robust air interface signalling function is as follows: /*Configure robust air interface signalling*/ MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

the MS in the packet transfer state can respond to the CS domain paging. This function is implemented in built-in PCU mode. Preparation Table 14-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BSS paging coordination function Parameter ID ACOOPERATPAGINGSWITCH IDXTYPE CELLNAME BSSPAGINGCOOR DINATION Parameter Name A Interface Collaboration Paging Switch Index Type Cell Name BSS Paging Coordination Example OPEN(Open) Source Network planning BYCELLNAME(By Cell Name) CELL01 YES(YES) Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l l The BSS paging coordination function is not license-controlled.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 14 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination 14 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination With the BSS paging coordination function. In this manner. 14-1 . the network can send the CS domain paging message to an MS in the packet transfer state on the PACCH if the Gs interface is not configured between the MSC/VLR and the SGSN.. the BSS paging coordination function helps to increase the paging success rate if no Gs interface is configured. Ltd. Scenario Impact In the network with a lot of PS services. None.

SET PSBASE: IDXTYPE=BYCELLNAME. it indicates that the function of BSS paging coordination is deactivated. l Deactivating BSS paging coordination 1.. run the SET PSBASE command to set BSS Paging Coordination to NO(NO). run the SET PSBASE command to set BSS Paging Coordination to YES(YES). 14-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If BSS Paging Coordination is set to YES. CELLNAME="CELL01". Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set A Interface Collaboration Paging Switch to OPEN(Open). ----End Example An example script for configuring the BSS paging coordination function is as follows: /*Configure BSS paging coordination*/ SET PSSOFTPARA: ACOOPERATPAGINGSWITCH=OPEN.14 Configuring BSS Paging Coordination HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST PSBASE command. run the LST PSBASE command. BSSPAGINGCOORDINATION=YES. If BSS Paging Coordination is set to NO. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Postrequisite l Verifying BSS paging coordination – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it indicates that the function of BSS paging coordination is activated. Ltd. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

15-1 . Co-BCCH cell increases the traffic capacity of a cell. which is used to expand the coverage area. Ltd. get familiar with the related information based on which the parameters are set. 15. and the TRXs on the DCS1800M (or PCS1900M) are configured in the overlaid subcell. and improves the continuous coverage and sparse coverage in hot spots. which is used to absorb the traffic. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 15.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell 15 About This Chapter Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell Co-BCCH cell is realized on the basis of the principles of the concentric cell. The TRXs on the GSM900M (or GSM850M) are configured in the underlaid subcell.. decreases handovers and interference. 15.2 Preparations for the Co-BCCH Cell Configuration Before configuring a co-BCCH cell.3 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell This describes how to configure a co-BCCH cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal.1 Co-BCCH Cell Configuration Principles This describes the configuration principles of the co-BCCH cell. The TRXs on two bands are distributed in the overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell that share one BCCH TRX.

the GSM900M or GSM850M is configured in the underlaid cell to expand the coverage. the underlaid subcell is configured in the GSM850M. the incoming intercell handover request is not directly assigned to the overlaid subcell.1 Co-BCCH Cell Configuration Principles This describes the configuration principles of the co-BCCH cell. The frequency hopping within the same frequency band is allowed.5-1 km. The frequency hopping between the GSM900M and the DCS1800M is not allowed. the following restrictions apply: 15-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . including the following items: l l l l l Subscriber distribution and traffic volume in the coverage of the site Ratio of the coverage of the DCS1800/PCS1900 to that of the entire cell Ratio of the coverage of the GSM900/GSM850 to that of the entire cell Whether the TRXs in the GSM900/GSM850 can carry all the traffic in the cell Number of the TRXs in the GSM900/GSM850 and DCS1800/PCS1900 in the co-BCCH cell. the signal power of the DCS1800M is about 15 dB less than the signal power of the GSM900M. PDCH. the underlaid subcell is configured in the GSM900M or GSM850M. If the overlaid subcell is configured in the PCS1900M. the overlaid subcell channel is not directly assigned to a call.15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 15. The priorities of different types of TRXs are: P-GSM > E-GSM > R-GSM. whether the frequency reuse on the GSM900/GSM850 is tight and whether interference exists During network planning. Configure the BCCH in the GSM900M TRX. Generally. The traffic in the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell should be properly assigned to maintain the traffic balance between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid subcell. A co-BCCH cell consists of an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. The configuration of the co-BCCH cell should comply with the following principles: l Generally. Avoid a multi-layer concentric cell due to inconsistent combination mode of the TRXs on the same frequency band. and BCCH on the same TRX.2 Preparations for the Co-BCCH Cell Configuration Before configuring a co-BCCH cell. Ltd. Get familiar with the status of the current cell. and a call beyond the coverage of the DCS1800M TRX is not forcibly assigned to the overlaid subcell. whereas the DCS1800M or PCS1900M is configured in the overlaid cell to absorb the traffic. l l l l l 15. At the distance of 0. such as handover success rate and assignment success rate.. The specific band configuration is as follows: l If the overlaid subcell is configured in the DCS1800M. A multi-layer concentric cell affects the network KPIs. Configure the SDCCH. get familiar with the related information based on which the parameters are set. NOTE l The signal loss of the DCS1800M is faster with the transmission distance.

If the co-BCCH cell has a low priority. the number of TRXs configured in the underlaid subcell can be small. If the co-BCCH cell is not adjacent to two or more single-band cells at the same time. the congestion is unlikely to occur in the underlaid subcell. The purpose is to prevent the calls on the edge of a common cell from being handed over to the co-BCCH cell. Thus. the number of TRXs in the underlaid subcell should be greater or be equal to that in the overlaid subcell to prevent the congestion in the underlaid subcell. – 15. If the traffic load of neighboring cells is high. If the traffic volume in the underlaid subcell is high. If the co-BCCH cell has to be used. the congestion is likely to occur in a fully-loaded cell at high traffic hours. 15-3 . you should consider the network hierarchy. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. None NEs Involved BSC. you should analyze the traffic distribution based on the congestion conditions in the underlaid subcell and then adjust the handover parameters of related cells. – – – l Neighboring cell – – If the co-BCCH cell has a high priority. Otherwise. The BTS and MS should support the co-BCCH cell.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l 15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell Number of TRXs – If the traffic is distributed mainly in the overlaid subcell. The BTS that adds a co-BCCH cell must support the configured frequency band. the co-BCCH cell is not recommended. Ltd. this factor is negligible. the traffic distributed on the edge of a common cell is switched to the co-BCCH cell. Scenario Impact Co-BCCH cell improves the traffic capacity of a cell. the underlaid subcell in the co-BCCH cell is likely to be congested and the network KPIs such as TCH Seizure Success Rate and Handover Success Rate deteriorate. In such a case. The serving BSC has enabled the concentric cell function. The network KPIs such as TCH Seizure Success Rate and Handover Success Rate deteriorate. If the TRXs in the underlaid subcell are not sufficient. this factor is negligible. BTS Prerequisite l l l l l Co-BCCH cell is not restricted by the license. The co-BCCH cell function and the extended cell function cannot be enabled at the same time. Therefore.3 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell This describes how to configure a co-BCCH cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal.. you should consider the traffic load of the neighboring cells.

Support High Frequency Band Cell Index Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable MS MAX Retrans Emergent Call Disable ECSC Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 cell GSM900_DCS1 800 ACTIVATED (Activated) 460 00 1 1 0 1 PCS1900 0 ENABLE (ENABLE) 2_Times (2_Times) NO(NO) NO(NO) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 15-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Band Activity State MCC MNC LAC CI TRX Board No. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . TRX Freq.15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation Table 15-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring a co-BCCH cell Data Type Cell attributes Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX CELLNAME CTYPE AST MCC MNC LAC CI TRXBN TRXFREQ BSC basic attributes Basic call control parameters of the cell HiFreqBandSupport CELLIDX ASSLOADJUDG EEN MSMAXRETRA N ERGCALLDIS ECSC Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Cell Name Freq.. Ltd.

NOTE If the cell to be added is in the GSM900_DCS1800 or GSM850_1800. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.GSM850_1800 or GSM850_1900..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell Data Type Parameter ID REASSEN Parameter Name Allow Reassign Cell IUO Type Enhanced Concentric Allowed BCCH IUO of Double Freq Cell Current HO Control Algorithm UL to OL HO Allowed OL to UL HO Allowed RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed TA for UO HO Allowed Example YES(Yes) Concentric_cell (Concentric cell) YES(Yes) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Cell concentric attributes IUOTP ENIUO DBFREQBCCHIU O Cell concentric handover parameters HOCTRLSWITC H ULTOOLHOALL OW OLTOULHOALL OW RECLEVUOHOA LLOW RECQUALUOHO ALLOW TAFORUOHOAL LOW Extra(Extra) HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) NO(NO) YES(Yes) YES(Yes) NO(NO) YES(Yes) Procedure Step 1 (Optional) When you select GSM850_1900. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set Support High Frequency Band to PCS1900. It is recommended that BCCH IUO of Double Freq Cell be set to Extra (Extra). Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Band to GSM900_DCS1800. you should modify the BSC attributes. 15-5 . Set Freq. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric cell). Ltd. and then set Enhanced Concentric Allowed and BCCH IUO of Double Freq Cell according to the actual network condition. run the MOD CELLIUO command to configure cell concentric attributes. skip this step. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to configure the basic call parameters of the cell according to the actual network condition. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD CELL command to add a co-BCCH cell. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

15 Configuring a Co-BCCH Cell

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOIUO command to configure concentric handover parameters of the cell according to the actual network condition. ----End

Example
An example script for adding a co-BCCH cell is as follows:
/*(Optional) When you select "GSM850_1900", you should modify the BSC attributes. Set "Support High Frequency Band" to "PCS1900".*/ MOD BSCBASIC: HiFreqBandSupport=PCS1900; /*Add a co-BCCH cell in the GSM900_DCS1800*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, BTSIDX=0, CELLNAME="cell", CTYPE=GSM900_DCS1800, AST=ACTIVAED, MCC="460", MNC="00", LAC=1, CI=1, TRXBN=0, TRXFREQ=1; /*Configure the basic call control parameters of the cell*/ MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, ASSLOADJUDGEEN=ENABLE, MSMAXRETRAN=2_Times, ERGCALLDIS=NO, ECSC=NO, REASSEN=YES; /*Configure cell concentric type*/ MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, IUOTP=Concentric_cell, ENIUO=YES, DBFREQBCCHIUO=Extra; /*Configure concentric handover parameters of the cell*/ SET CELLHOIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, ULTOOLHOALLOW=NO, OLTOULHOALLOW=YES, RECLEVUOHOALLOW=YES, RECQUALUOHOALLOW=NO, TAFORUOHOALLOW=YES;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying co-BCCH cell
NOTE

In this section, the verification of a GSM900&DCS1800 co-BCCH cell is taken as an example. The verification of the co-BCCH cell with other frequency bands combined is similar.

1. 2. 3.

Use an MS supporting the GSM900 frequency band to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. The call is normally connected. Use an MS supporting the DCS1800 frequency band to camp on a 1800 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. The call is normally connected. Use an MS supporting the GSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands to camp on a 900 MHz cell. Perform the dialing test. After the call is connected, move the MS towards the 1800 MHz cell. Then, observe the window displaying the monitored channel status. The MS is handed over to the 1800 MHz cell, and the call is still normally connected.

15-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability

16

Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability

The 2G/3G interoperability feature enables an MS to be handed over to or reselected to the GSM network if the serving cell of the MS is not covered by the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network or if the serving WCDMA/TD-SCDMA cell is in a weak coverage area. In addition, an MS can be handed over to or reselected to the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network if the MS requires the PS services. When a dual-mode MS enters the coverage of the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network again, or the MS detects that the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA cell is better than the serving GSM cell, the MS can be handed over to or reselected to the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network if the handover or cell reselection conditions are met. Then, the MS can use the abundant services provided by the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network. Scenario This feature is used for the MS reselection and handovers between the GSM network and the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA network, and the interactions between the GSM network and other 3G networks. None

Impact

NEs Involved MS, BTS, BSC, MSC

Prerequisite
l

The MS must be a dual-mode MS, which supports the GSM and WCDMA/TD-SCDMA networks. The MS must support bidirectional (2G to 3G and 3G to 2G) cell reselection and handovers. A Interface Tag, Um Interface Tag, and Abis Interface Tag are all set to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. 2G/3G interoperability requires the support of the BSS and NSS. The NSS and BSS must support inter-RAT cell selection, cell reselection, location update procedures, flow control during inter-RAT handovers, handover decisions, and handover signaling procedures. The configuration of 2G/3G interoperability is license-controlled. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details, see Activate BSC License.

l

l

l l

Preparation
The procedure for configuring GSM/WCDMA interoperability is similar to the procedure for configuring GSM/TD-SCDMA interoperability. The configuration of GSM/TD-SCDMA interoperability is taken as an example. The negotiated and planned data is as follows:
Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 16-1

16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Table 16-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GSM/TD-SCDMA Interoperability Parameter Cell Name Cell MCC Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI Utran cell type Sync case Load Handover Support Load Req.on Candidate Cell Index Type Cell Name MSC Version indication HO Control Switch Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable TDD System Information Optimized Allowed TDD MI System Information Broadcasting Prohibit Qsearch I Qsearch P Qsearch C TDD cell reselect diversity [db] ECSC Example 3G External Cell-1 460 86 10 11 TDD(TDD) SyncCase1(Sync case 1) YES(YES) 50 BYNAME (By Name) CELL_1 R99_or_above(R99 or above) HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II) YES(YES) YES(YES) YES(YES) YES(YES) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning

5 5 5 5 YES(YES)

Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning

16-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability

Procedure
Step 1 Run the ADD CELL3GEXTC command to add a 3G external cell. Set Utran cell type to TDD (TDD),Sync case to SyncCase1 (Sync case 1).
NOTE

l l

The value of Sync case must be the same as that set for the source 3G cell. If the 2G/3G Interoperability is required, set Utran cell type to FDD(FDD) and set the following parameters according to the network condition: Ec/No threshold for layer Of 3G cell, Min Ec/No threshold, and PS FDD Ec/No Quality Threshold.

Step 2 Run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to configure the 2G cell handover parameters. Set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to YES(YES), Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to YES(YES), and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to YES(YES).
l

If the inter-RAT load handover function needs to be configured, set Load HO Allowed to YES(YES). In addition, run the SET CELLHOAD command to set Inter RAN Load Information Allowed to YES(YES). If the inter-RAT service handover function needs to be configured, you should also run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set Service Based Handover Switch to OPEN (Open).

l

Step 3 According to the type of the 3G external cells that perform interoperability, run the MOD CELLHOUTRANFDD or MOD CELLHOUTRANTDD command to configure the data relevant to the handover from the GSM system to the WCDMA/TD-SCDMA system. Step 4 Run the MOD CELLCCUTRANSYS command to configure the cell call control parameters. 1. Set MSC Version indication to R99_or_above(R99 or above) and set the following parameters according to the current network condition: Qsearch I, Qsearch P, and Qsearch C.
NOTE

If Utrancell type is set to FDD(FDD), skip Step b. Then, set FDD Q offset according to the current network condition.

2.

Based on the current cell type, set TDD System Information Optimized Allowed to YES (YES) and TDD MI System Information Broadcasting Prohibit to YES(YES). Then, set TDD cell reselect diversity according to the network condition.

Step 5 Run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set ECSC to YES(YES). Step 6 Run the ADD CELL3GNC command to configure the neighboring cell relations. Then, set RSCP Offset according to the network condition.
NOTE

If Utrancell type is set to FDD(FDD), set Ec/No Offset according to the network condition.

----End

Example
/*Add a 3G external cell*/ ADD CELL3GEXTC: CELLNAME="3G External Cell-1 ", MCC="460", MNC="86", LAC=10, CI=11, SYNCCASE=SyncCase1, UTRANCELLTYPE=TDD,LoadHoEn=YES, LoadAccThres=50; /*Configure the cell handover parameters*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="CELL_1", HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2, INTERRATOUTBSCHOEN=NO, INTERRATINBSCHOEN=YES, INTERRATCELLRESELEN=YES;

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16-3

16 Configuring 2G/3G Interoperability

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

/*Configure the cell call parameters*/ MOD CELLCCUTRANSYS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="CELL_1", MSCVER=R99_or_above, QI=5, QP=5, QSEARCHC=5, TDDCELLRESELDIV=5, TDDSIOPTIMIZEDALLOWED=YES, TDDMIPROHIBIT=YES; MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="3G External Cell-1", ECSC=YES; /*Configure the neighboring cell relations*/ ADD CELL3GNC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, SRCCELLNAME="CELL_1", NBRCELLNAME="3G External Cell-1";

Postrequisite
l

Verifying 2G/3G interoperability 1. 2. Start the tracing of the RSL messages over the Abis interface. For details, see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Query the CS-related BCCH Information messages over the Abis interface to identify the messages whose system-info-type is system-information-2quater. Then, check whether the L3 contents of the messages are null. If they are not null, it indicates that 2G/3G inter-RAT reselection takes effect. Query the CS-related SACCH Filling messages over the Abis interface to identify the messages whose system-info-type is measurement-information. Then, check whether the L3 contents of the messages are null. If they are not null, it indicates that 2G/3G inter-RAT handover takes effect. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Inter-RAT Cell Reselection Enable to NO(NO), Inter-RAT Out BSC Handover Enable to NO(NO), and Inter-RAT In BSC Handover Enable to NO (NO). Verifying the deactivation of 2G/3G interoperability: The operations are the same as those for Verifying deactivation of 2G/3G interoperability. Check the L3 contents of the messages are null.

3.

l

Deactivating 2G/3G interoperability 1.

2.

16-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

17 Configuring TRX Cooperation

17
Scenario Impact None

Configuring TRX Cooperation

With this feature, when the BCCH TRX or the TRX involved in baseband FH is faulty, the cell automatically rectifies the faults. Thus, the services in the cell are not affected before the faulty TRX is replaced. Based on the type of faulty TRXs and the handling method, the TRX cooperation is classified into BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation. For the non-baseband FH cell, only the BCCH TRX cooperation occurs. For the baseband FH cell, both BCCH TRX cooperation and baseband FH TRX cooperation are likely to occur. TRX Cooperation is configured to ensure that the cell is always in service.

NEs Involved BTS, BSC

Prerequisite
l l

TRX Cooperation is not restricted by the license. At least two TRXs are configured in the cell.

Preparation
Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example. Table 17-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS Parameter ID BTSNAME TYPE UPNODE SRN Parameter Name BTS Name BTS Type Up Node Type Subrack No. Example BTS3012 BTS3012 BSC 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning
17-1

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17 Configuring TRX Cooperation

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Parameter ID SN PN BTSDESC MPMODE FlexAbisMode AbisByPassMode ServiceMode DCELLNAME DCTYPE DCMCC DCMNC DCLAC DCCI CPLMode TRXBN FREQ

Parameter Name Slot No. Port No. BTS Description Multiplexing Mode Flex Abis Mode Abis By Pass Mode Service Type Cell Name Cell type Cell MCC Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI Separate Mode TRX Board No. TRX Freq.

Example 26 10 TDM BTS3012 MODE4_1 FIX_ABIS(Fix Abis) FALSE(Not Support) TDM TDMCELL GSM900 460 34 62 98 UNSUPPORT(Not Support) 0 5

Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning

17-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

17 Configuring TRX Cooperation

Table 17-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring TRX Cooperation Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME TRXAIDSWITC H Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name TRX Aiding Function Control Example BYNAME (By Name) TDMCELL AllowReForbid(Allowed & Recover Forbidden) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to set TRX Aiding Function Control as required. ----End

Example
An example script for configuring TRX Cooperation is as follows:
/*Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME = "BTS3012", TYPE = BTS3012, UPNODE = BSC, SRN = 0, SN=26, PN = 10, BTSDESC = "TDM BTS3012" , MPMODE = MODE4_1, FlexAbisMode = FIX_ABIS, AbisByPassMode = False, ServiceMode = TDM, DCELLNAME = "TDMCELL", DCTYPE = GSM900, DCMCC = "460", DCMNC = "34", DCLAC = 62, DCCI = 98, CPLMode = UNSUPPORT, TRXBN = 0, FREQ = 5; /*Configure TRX Cooperation*/ MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="TDMCELL", TRXAIDSWITCH=AllowReForbid;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying TRX cooperation 1. 2. Switch off the power of the main BCCH TRX. In this way, the main BCCH TRX becomes faulty, and thus the main BCCH TRX mutual aid is triggered. After a period of time (less than 15 minutes), the cell begins to be reinitialized. In this case, run the MML command DSP CHNSTAT to query the channel status. The query result shows that Current Channel Type of one TRX (not the initially configured main BCCH TRX) whose channel number is 0 is set to Main BCCH. Make a call in the cell where the TRX mutual aid is enabled. The call is successfully set up, and the voice is clear. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to set TRX Aiding Function Control to TRXAid_NotAllow. Verifying deactivation of TRX cooperation: Switch off the power supply of the main BCCH TRX in the cell so that the main BCCH of the cell becomes faulty. Use the test
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 17-3

3.
l

Deactivating TRX cooperation 1. 2.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

17 Configuring TRX Cooperation HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) MS to initiate a call in the cell. 17-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. it indicates that the TRX cooperation function is deactivated. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Ltd. If the call fails to be set up.

NEs Involved BSC.. Cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an RF hopping loopback test is performed. Preparation Table 18-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring cell frequency scan Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX STRTM TIME FREQBAND Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Start time Duration minute Frequency Band Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 17:06:07 5 E-GSM900 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BTS Cell frequency scan has the following impacts on other features: l l l Cell frequency scan occupies an idle TCH. The cell frequency scan cannot be performed when an idle frame test is performed.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 18 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan 18 Scenario Impact NOTE Configuring Cell Frequency Scan The cell frequency scan function enables the scanning of the levels of the uplink signals at specific frequencies on a specific channel of a cell. Ltd. The cell frequency scan provides a reference for network optimization. The scanned results of the signal levels provides references for engineers to select proper operating frequencies. Scanning the cell frequencies may affect the performance of other features. 18-1 .

Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the STP FREQSCAN command to stop the cell frequency scan. no restriction is imposed on the number of commands in the batch processing file when the commands are processed in batches. some cells cannot be scanned. 50 commands are executed per 30 seconds in sequence. FREQLST_E900=0&975&1023. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . /*Query the frequency scan information of the cell with index of 0*/ LST FREQSCAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. In addition. a maximum of 50 commands are allowed in the batch processing file when the commands are processed in batches. CELLIDX=0. 18-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.18 Configuring Cell Frequency Scan HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Duration minute cannot be set to a very small value. ----End Example An example script of configuring cell frequency scan is as follows: /*Configure cell frequency scan*/ SET FREQSCAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. the execution of the commands cannot be completed in the specified duration. NOTE l If a BSC earlier than BSC6000V900R008C12SP25 is used. Otherwise. If a BSC in BSC6000V900R008C12SP25 or a later version is used.. l Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLIDX=0. run the LST FREQSCAN command to query the information of cell frequency scan. If more than 50 commands exist in the batch processing file. Therefore. CELLIDX=0. TIME=5. FREQBAND=E-GSM900. /*Stop the frequency scan information of the cell with index of 0*/ STP FREQSCAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the SET FREQSCAN command to configure cell frequency scan. STRTM=17&06&07.

Therefore. Preparation Table 19-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring high-speed signaling links in BM/TC combined mode Parameter ID SERVICEMODE SRN ASN Parameter Name Service Mode Subrack No. Generally. A Interface Slot No. MSC. the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is configured with more timeslots. With this feature.. Compared with 64 kbit/s signaling link. thus. the N timeslots in an E1 are bound for the physical transmission of the SS7 signaling. and MGW Prerequisite l l The GEIUA is configured. high-speed signaling links are used for terrestrial transmission instead of satellite transmission and used together with the Local Multiple Signaling Points feature to support more flexible signaling networking mode. This feature should be supported by the MSC.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 19 Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links 19 Scenario Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links The BSC uses the high-speed signaling when the 64 kbit/s signaling fail to meet the signaling requirements on the A interface due to high traffic volume. 19-1 . the bandwidth of a signaling link is extended to N x 64 kit/s and a maximum of 2 Mbit/s E1 bandwidth (N = 31) can be used. Ltd. Example TOGETHER(BM/TC Together) 0 24 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Impact NEs Involved BSC. the signaling transmission capacity of the 2 Mbit/s signaling link is greatly enhanced.

19 Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID APN ATSMASK SLC SLCSEND DPC LKRATE Parameter Name A Interface Port No. Ltd. A Interface Timeslot Mask Ater Interface Timeslot Mask SLC SLC Send DPC Link Rate Type Example SEPARATE(BM/TC Separate) 0 24 0 TS8(8)-TS11(11) TS8(9)-TS11(11) 0 0 h'cc 2 M(2 Mbit/s) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. A Interface Timeslot Mask SLC SLC Send DPC Link Rate Type Example 0 TS8(8) 23 0 h'cc 2 M(2 Mbit/s) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 19-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring high-speed signaling links in BM/TC separate mode Parameter ID SERVICEMODE ATERPIDX ASN APN ATSMASK ATERTSMASK SLC SLCSEND DPC LKRATE Parameter Name Service Mode Ater Connection Path Index A Interface Slot No.. run the ADD N7LNK command to add SS7 signaling links. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 19-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. A Interface Port No.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) NOTE 19 Configuring High-Speed Signaling Links Set the parameter value of Service Mode based on the current service mode in the system. Enter the specified DPC Code obtained from adding a high-speed signaling link to query the corresponding DPC Index. run the DEA MTP3LNK command to deactivate SS7 signaling links. /*Configure high-speed signaling links in BM/TC separate mode. ----End Example An example script of configuring high-speed signaling links is as follows: /*Configure high-speed signaling links in BM/TC combined mode*/ ADD N7LNK: SERVICEMODE=TOGETHER. SLCSEND=0. ASN=24. and there is a connection path on the Ater interface*/ ADD N7LNK: SERVICEMODE=SEPARATE. DPC=h'cc. ASN=24. Ltd. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST N7DPC command. run the LST N7LNK command to query the information of the SS7 signaling link. 19-3 . you are advised not to select TS1 under Ater Interface Timeslot Mask for the SS7 signaling link in the main GTCS subrack. Specify the Service Mode as required.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ATERPIDX=0. when the GTCS is configured remotely. ATSMASK=TS0-0&TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0& TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS 18-0&TS19-0&TS20-0&TS2 1-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0. If INUSE is YES. SLC=0. APN=0. The Link Type should be 2 M. Set the Destination signalling point index according to the DPC Index obtained from step 2. 2. and set Link Rate Type to 2 Mbit/s. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. LKRATE =2M. SLCS END=0. SRN=0. SLC=0. DPC=h'cc. Run the LST BSCBASIC command to query the current service mode. the configured high-speed signaling link is normal. ATERTSMASK=TS0-0&TS1-0&TS2-0& TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0&TS7-0&TS8-1&TS9-1&TS10-1&TS11-1&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS150&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0 & TS19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&TS22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS300&TS31-0. In BM/TC separate mode. 3. APN=0. and then check the current status of the MTP link. Postrequisite l Verifying high-speed signaling links 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the DSP MTP3LNK command. LKRATE=2M. ATSMASK=TS0-0&TS1-0&TS2-0&TS3-0&TS4-0&TS5-0&TS6-0 & TS7-0&TS8-1&TS9-0&TS10-0&TS11-0&TS12-0&TS13-0&TS14-0&TS15-0&TS16-0&TS17-0&TS18-0&T S19-0&TS20-0&TS21-0&T S22-0&TS23-0&TS24-0&TS25-0&TS26-0&TS27-0&TS28-0&TS29-0&TS30-0&TS31-0. l Deactivating high-speed signaling links – Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

.

you should configure the mapping between the BM subrack and the local signaling point. the signaling load on the A interface and the call establishment time are increased. Impact NEs Involved BSC. Ltd. Thus. Thus. Each signaling point can be independently connected to other signaling points and thus meets the signaling link requirements for large capacity processing of the BSC6000. A maximum of four OPCs. Table 20-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the mapping between the first OPC and the subrack Data Type OPC attributes Parameter ID NAME Parameter Name OPC Name Example OPC1 Source Network planning 20-1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 32 DPCs.. For each signaling point.Used together with the High Speed Signaling feature to support more flexible signaling networking mode. MSC and MGW NOTE For each BM subrack. The two OPCs correspond to number 0 and number 1 BM subracks. you should configure SS7 signaling links. a physical node is logically classified into multiple signaling points. the requirements for the signaling networking capability of the MSC are reduced because the highspeed signaling technology is not used.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 20 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points 20 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points With this feature. which effectively reduces the impact of the paging traffic on the BSC. The configuration procedure is the same as that for configuring general SS7 signaling links. With this feature. In addition. . the operators' investment is saved. the original intra-BSC handover or intra-BSC directed retry may be converted into outgoing BSC handover or outgoing BSC directed retry. and 32 STPs can be configured to a BSC. Preparation This operation takes the configuration of two OPCs and one DPC as an example. Scenario The traffic volume is properly distributed to the logical BSCs.

20 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID OPC Parameter Name OPC Code Subrack No.. OSP Code Example OPC2 H'A2 1 H'A2 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 20-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DPC Data Type DPC attributes Parameter ID NAME DPC USESTP DPCGIDX CNID Parameter Name DPC Name DPC Code Using STP DPC Group Index MSC ID Example DSP1 H'C1 YES(Yes) 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 20-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. OSP Code Example H'A1 0 H'A1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Configuring the mapping between the subrack and the OPC SRN OPC Table 20-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the mapping between the Second OPC and the subrack Data Type OPC attributes Parameter ID NAME OPC Configuring the mapping between the subrack and the OPC SRN OPC Parameter Name OPC Name OPC Code Subrack No. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 20 Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Add the mapping between the subrack and the OPC*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=0. /*Add the second OPC*/ ADD OPC: NAME="OPC2". On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the RMV OPC command to delete the corresponding OPC. 20-3 . ----End Example Example scripts of configuring local multiple signaling points are as follows: /*Add an OPC*/ ADD OPC: NAME="OPC1". Postrequisite l Verifying local multiple signaling points – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the status of the SCCP subsystem is "allowed". DPC=H'C1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the DSP SCCPSSN command to query the status of the SCCP subsystem.Using STP should be set to YES(Yes). Ltd.. USESTP=YES. CNID=0. OPC=H'A2. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. OPC=H'A1. run the ADD STP command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to add the STP. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Add a DPC*/ ADD N7DPC: NAME="DSP1". run the ADD SROPCMAP command to configure the mapping between the subrack and the OPC. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 Repeat step 1 and step 2 to add the second OPC and the mapping between the second OPC and the subrack. run the MOD SROPCMAP command to modify the OPC of the non-main subrack to be the same as that of the main subrack. run the ADD OPC command to add the first OPC. NOTE If there is no direct physical link between the OPC and the DPC. OPC=H'A1. l Deactivating local multiple signaling points 1. it indicates that local multiple signaling points are successfully activated. DPCGIDX=0. OPC=H'A2. run the ADD N7DPC command to add DPCs. /*Add the mapping between the subrack and the OPC*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=1. 2. Step 5 Optional: When you need to configure the STP. then you have to configure STPs.

.

21. 21. 21-1 . Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Configuring DRX This describes how to configure discontinuous reception (DRX) on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.1 Configuring DTX This describes how to configure discontinuous transmission (DTX) on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX 21 About This Chapter Configuring DTX and DRX Discontinuous transmission (DTX) and discontinuous reception (DRX) increases the standby time and call duration of an MS..

Ltd. Table 21-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS Data Type BTS basic attributes Parameter ID BTSNAME Parameter Name BTS Name Example BTS3012 Source Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g TYPE BTS Type BTS3012 UPNODE Up Node Type BSC 21-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.21 Configuring DTX and DRX HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21. BTS. The setting of uplink DTX is completed by the BSC.1 Configuring DTX This describes how to configure discontinuous transmission (DTX) on the Local Maintenance Terminal. NEs Involved BSC. the downlink DTX does not work. The setting of downlink DTX should be performed at both the BSC and MSC. save system resources. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . DTX affects only the transmission of TCH frames. and increase the call duration and standby time. and MS CAUTION DTX cannot be configured in co-cell mode.. Scenario Impact DTX is configured to reduce power and system interference. Preparation Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example. Prerequisite l l l DTX is not restricted by the license. Otherwise.

. 21-3 . 26 PN Port No. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX Data Type Parameter ID SRN Parameter Name Subrack No. 0 BTSDESC BTS Description TDM BTS3012 MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE4_1 FlexAbisMode Flex Abis Mode FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) AbisByPassMod e Abis By Pass Mode FALSE(Not Support) ServiceMode Service Type TDM DCELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL DCTYPE Cell type GSM900 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Example 0 Source Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g SN Slot No.

5 Table 21-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DTX Data Type Filter and penalty data of the cell handover Parameter ID IDXTYPE Parameter Name Index Type Example BYNAME (By Name) Source Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g CELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL 21-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.21 Configuring DTX and DRX HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID DCMCC Parameter Name Cell MCC Example 460 Source Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g DCMNC Cell MNC 34 DCLAC Cell LAC 62 DCCI Cell CI 98 CPLMode Separate Mode UNSUPPORT(Not Support) TRXBN TRX Board No.. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 0 FREQ TRX Freq.

TYPE=BTS3012. DCCI=98. TRXBN=0. UPNODE=BSC. DCLAC=62. AbisByPassMode=False. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the SET CELLHOFITPEN command to set DtxMeasUsed to OPEN(open). DCMNC="34".. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set TCH/F Uplink DTX or TCH/H Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use) and set TCH/F Use Downlink DTX or TCH/H Use Downlink DTX to YES(YES). ServiceMode=TDM. PN=0. SN=27. SRN=0. CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. 21-5 . ----End Example An example script for configuring DTX for a BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode is as follows: /*Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME="BTS3012". FREQ=5. DCMCC="460". Ltd. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. FlexAbisMode=FLEX_ABIS. HOCTRLSWITCH = HOALGORITHM1. BTSDESC="TDM BTS3012". Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DCTYPE=GSM900. CELLNAME = "TDMCELL".HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX Data Type Parameter ID HOCTRLSWIT CH Parameter Name HO Control Switch Example HOALGORITHM 1(HO Algorithm I) Source Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g DTXMEASUSE D DtxMeasUsed OPEN(open) Cell basic attributes FRULDTX TCH/F Uplink DTX Shall_Use(Shall Use) HRULDTX TCH/H Uplink DTX Shall_Use(Shall Use) FRDLDTX TCH/F Use Downlink DTX YES(Yes) HRDLDTX TCH/H Use Downlink DTX YES(Yes) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DTXMEASUSED = OPEN. MPMODE=MODE4_1. DCELLNAME="TDMCELL". run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS. /*Set "DtxMeasUsed" to "OPEN(open)"*/ SET CELLHOFITPEN: IDXTYPE = BYNAME.

Check the Channel Activation messages in the messages on the Abis interface in the CS domain. CELLNAME="TDMCELL". Verify that the values of dtx-uplink and dtx-downlink are 0. it indicates that the downlink DTX is allowed on the MSC. it indicates that the BSC supports the uplink DTX function. Check the BCCH Information messages in the Abis messages in the CS domain and find out the messages whose system-info-type is system-information-3 in the detailed information. If the value of dtx-uplink in the messages with channel-type being bm-acch is 1. 3.21 Configuring DTX and DRX HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) /*Set "TCH/F Uplink DTX" or "TCH/H Uplink DTX" to "Shall_Use(Shall Use)" and set "TCH/F Use Downlink DTX" or "TCH/H Use Downlink DTX" to "YES(YES)"*/ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE = BYNAME. it indicates that the BSC supports the downlink DTX. Check the Channel Activation messages in the Abis messages in the CS domain. If the value of the downlink-dtx-flag information element is 0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Use the MS to make a call. TCH/F Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes).. TCH/H Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use). run the SND SYSMSG command to forcedly send system information to the test cell. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set TCH/F Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use). The operations for verifying deactivation of DTX are the same as those for Verifying DTX. If the value of dtx in the cell-options information element is 1. HRDLDTX=YES. HRULDTX = Shall_Use. TCH/F Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set TCH/F Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use). it indicates that the system information is sent correctly. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The call is successfully set up. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set TCH/F Uplink DTX or TCH/H Uplink DTX to Shall_NOT_Use (Shall Not Use) and set TCH/F Use Downlink DTX or TCH/H Use Downlink DTX to NO (No). 3. Verify that the Abis signaling messages in the CS domain and the A signaling messages are traced. Ltd. and TCH/H Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes). and TCH/H Use Downlink DTX to YES(Yes). Check that the A signaling messages and Abis signaling messages in the CS domain are traced. If dtx-downlink in the channel-mode information element is 1. l Deactivating DTX 1. Check the Assignment Request messages in the messages on the A interface. 2. FRDLDTX=YES. 21-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 5. 4. Use the MS to make a call. 2. TCH/H Uplink DTX to Shall_Use(Shall Use). The call is successfully set up. FRULDTX = Shall_Use. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . – Verifying the downlink DTX 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l Verifying DTX – Verifying the uplink DTX 1. 2.

0 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BTS. . Preparation Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example. Scenario Impact DRX increases the call duration and standby time of an MS..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX 21. and MS Prerequisite DRX is not restricted by the license. 27 PN Port No. None NEs Involved BSC. 0 SN Slot No.2 Configuring DRX This describes how to configure discontinuous reception (DRX) on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. Table 21-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS Data Type BTS basic attributes Parameter ID BTSNAME Parameter Name BTS Name Example BTS3012 Source Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g 21-7 TYPE BTS Type BTS3012 UPNODE Up Node Type BSC SRN Subrack No.

.21 Configuring DTX and DRX HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID BTSDESC Parameter Name BTS Description Example TDM BTS3012 Source Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g MPMODE Multiplexing Mode MODE4_1 FlexAbisMode Flex Abis Mode FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) AbisByPassMod e Abis By Pass Mode FALSE(Not Support) ServiceMode Service Type TDM DCELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL DCTYPE Cell type GSM900 DCMCC Cell MCC 460 DCMNC Cell MNC 34 DCLAC Cell LAC 62 21-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Ltd.

0 FREQ TRX Freq. Ltd. 21-9 . 5 Table 21-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring DTX Data Type Basic idle parameters of the cell Parameter ID IDXTYPE Parameter Name Index Type Example BYNAME (By Name) Source Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g CELLNAME Cell Name TDMCELL BSAGBLKSRE S Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH Number of multiframes in a cycle on the paging channel 2 BSPAMFRAM 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 21 Configuring DTX and DRX Data Type Parameter ID DCCI Parameter Name Cell CI Example 98 Source Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g CPLMode Separate Mode UNSUPPORT(Not Support) TRXBN TRX Board No. run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

FlexAbisMode=FLEX_ABIS. /*Configure DRX*/ MOD CELLIDLEBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. FREQ=5. 21-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the paging-group information element in the message is M% 1000%14%14. MPMODE=MODE4_1. TYPE=BTS3012. Use an MS to call another MS with a known IMSI (such as M). Ltd. DCLAC=62. ServiceMode=TDM. Postrequisite l Verifying DRX 1. the MS can implement DRX by listening to the paging subchannel. run the MOD CELLIDLEBASIC command to set Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH to 2 and set Number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period). TRXBN=0. it indicates that the setting of the paging group that delivers the paging messages is consistent with that set in the system information. run the SND SYSMSG command to forcedly send system information to the test cell. Check the BCCH Information messages in the Abis messages in the CS domain and find out the messages whose system-info-type is system-information-3 in the detailed information. it indicates that the system information is sent correctly. Check whether bs-ag-blks-res (the corresponding parameter is Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH) is 2. BSAGBLKSRES=2. CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DCELLNAME="TDMCELL". 5. SRN=0. In this case. run the MOD CELLIDLEBASIC command to set Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH to 2 and set Number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel to 2_M_PERIOD(2 Multiframe Period).. The obtained paging group number is decimal. NOTE 2. PN=0. SN=27. DCMCC="460". % in M%1000%14%14 indicates the modulo operator. UPNODE=BSC. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 4. DCTYPE=GSM900. The call is successfully set up. 3. If so. Check the Page Command messages in the messages traced over the Abis interface in the CS domain. BSPAMFRAMS=2_M_PERIOD. AbisByPassMode=False. DCCI=98. CELLNAME="TDMCELL". ----End Example An example script for configuring DRX for a BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode is as follows: /*Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME="BTS3012". DCMNC="34". BTSDESC="TDM BTS3012". and whether bs-pamfrms (the corresponding parameter is Number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel) is 0 in the control-channel-description information element.21 Configuring DTX and DRX HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The simple location service can locate an MS based on the information obtained during single-user message tracing. trip scheduling. business planning. 22. 22. and transportation conditions. emergency assistance. 22-1 .1 Configuring Location Service This describes how to configure location service (LCS) on the Local Maintenance Terminal. These services include weather forecasts. Ltd. stock information.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 22 Configuring Location Service 22 About This Chapter Configuring Location Service Location sevice (LCS) enables the network to provide various services for an MS based on the location of the MS..2 Configuring Simple Location Service This describes how to configure simple location service on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

. Scenario Impact The built-in SMLC supports the BSS-based Cell ID+TA location service. see Activate BSC License.22 Configuring Location Service HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 22. BSC. LCS Support Control Index Type Cell Index Latitude and Longitude input mode NS Latitude Latitude int part Latitude decimal part WE Longitude Example 5 YES BYIDX(By Index) 0 Degree(degree) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Cell LCS parameters NSLATI LATIINT LATIDECI WELONGI North_latitude (North latitude) 45 5 East_Longitude (East Longititude) 22-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and MS Prerequisite l l LCS is restricted by the license.1 Configuring Location Service This describes how to configure location service (LCS) on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Preparation Table 22-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring LCS Data Type Other software parameters on the A Interface Parameter ID DPC LcsSupportControl IDXTYPE CELLIDX INPUTMD Parameter Name Subrack No. Ltd. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTS. None NEs Involved SGSN. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . For details.

run the SET AITFOTHPARA command to configure LCS. it indicates that the location service is active. Analyze the A interface signaling. l Deactivating location service 1. and set LCS Support Control to NO. Verify that Perform Location Response does not contain Location Estimate IE. LATIINT=45. NSLATI=North_latitude. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLHOCTRL command to configure cell LCS parameters. LONGIINT=115. /*Configure cell LCS parameters*/ MOD CELLIDLEBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLIDX=0.2 Configuring Simple Location Service This describes how to configure simple location service on the Local Maintenance Terminal. INPUTMD=Degree. if the signaling Perform Location Request and Perform Location Response. run the SET AITFOTHPARA command. WELONGI=East_Longitude.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 22 Configuring Location Service Data Type Parameter ID LONGIINT LONGIDECI Parameter Name Longitude int part Longitude decimal part Example 115 6 Source Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. 22. Verifying the deactivation of location service: The operations are the same as those for Verifying location service. 22-3 . 3. 2. Ltd. On the BSC6000 Local Maintenance Terminal. see Tracing CS Domain User Messages in the BSC LMT User Guide. Use an MS to make a call in the cell where the location service is enabled. enable the single-user tracing to trace the call signaling of the MS. Postrequisite l Verifying location service 1. LATIDECI="5".. LONGIDECI="6". LcsSupportControl=YES. ----End Example An example script for configuring LCS is as follows: /*Configure the BSC to support LCS*/ SET AITFOTHPARA: DPC=12. 2. and if Perform Location Response contains Location Estimate IE.

see Activate BSC License. None NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l l Simple location service is restricted by the license. For details. Ltd. 22-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Preparation Table 22-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring simple location service Data Type Simple location service attributes Parameter ID ITFTYPE TRCCONDITIO N MSISDN STRDT STRTM ENDDT ENDTM TASKNO TRCTYPE TRCMODE Parameter Name Interface type Tracing condition MSISDN Start date Start time End date End time trace task number Trace type Trace mode Example AITF(A INTERFACE) MSISDN 1399455166 2008-11-15 21:22:51 2008-11-15 22:22:51 3212 USERTRACE (User Trace) RMSTREAM (STREAM) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.22 Configuring Location Service HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Scenario Impact The simple location service is configured to trace the MS. configure LCS. see Configuring Location Service.. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

----End Example An example script for configuring simple location service is as follows: /*Create a tracing task*/ CRE USERTRCTASK: ITFTYPE=AITF. TASKNO=3212. run the DEL TRCTASK command to delete the tracing task. /*Query the tracing task*/ LST TRCTASK: TRCTYPE=USERTRACE. MSISDN="1399455166". run the STR TRCTASK command to start the tracing task. /*Start the tracing task*/ STR TRCTASK:TASKNO=3212. 22-5 . run the STP TRCTASK command to stop the tracing task. STRTM=21&22&51. /*Stop the tracing task*/ STR TRCTASK:TASKNO=3212. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. TASKNO=3212. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 22 Configuring Location Service Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Delete the tracing task*/ STR TRCTASK:TASKNO=3212. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ENDTM=2 1&22&51. TRCCONDITION=MSISDN. STRDT=2008&11&15. ENDDT=2008&11&15. TRCMODE=RMSTREAM. NOTE The task started must be a task that is not running. NOTE The task stopped must be a task that is running. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST TRCTASK command to query the tracing task. run the CRE USERTRCTASK command to create a tracing task.

.

the speech signal is encoded at the MS initiating the call and decoded at the MS terminating the call for only once. This process is called tandem free operation (TFO). Configure the TFO according to the combination types of the BSC subracks: l l In BM/TC separated mode. MSC. In addition. Thus. MGW. In A over TDM. AEC. Ltd. When the calling MS and the called MS use the same speech version. or ANR. 23-1 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 23 Configuring TFO 23 Scenario Impact Configuring TFO The TFO feature can reduce the speech signal degradation caused by tandem operation. the TFO should be configured for the GDPUX in the GMPS/GEPS. the degradation of the speech signals due to tandem operation is reduced and the voice quality is improved. In BM/TC combined mode and the TDM transmission is adopted on the Abis interface. the TFO should be supported by the TCs at both ends.. NEs Involved MS. the TFO link is established through the in-band signaling negotiation. The data between the TCs at the two ends should be transmitted transparently. the traffic volume is evenly distributed in the MSC pool. None. l Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. This function cannot be enabled at the same time as ALC. In this manner. the least significant bit (or the second least significant bit) is stolen to seize the 8 kbit/s (or 16 kbit/s) sublink of the PCM transmission link for transparent transmission of TFO frames and bypass TC encoding/decoding. the TFO should be configured for the GDPUC/GDPUX in the GTCS and the GDPUX of the GMPS/GEPS does not require the configuration of the TFO. Prerequisite l l The GDPUC/GDPUX is configured. thus improving the voice quality. and HLR NOTE The TFO is not supported in A over IP. BSC. In addition.

. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the TC attributes of all the DSPs are configured. Ltd. Verify that no service channel with the TFO status being Connect exists. Use the test MS to call another MS.. Postrequisite l Verifying TFO 1. and then hold on the call. Tfo_Switch=OPEN.. 3. The operations for deactivating TFO are the same as those for Verifying TFO. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If you do not set DSP No. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . SN=5. 23-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Slot No. run the DSP DSPSVRSTAT.. the verification of the TFO is successful. If the TFO state of certain channels is Connect. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Deactivating TFO 1.If you do not set DSP No.23 Configuring TFO HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation Table 23-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring TFO Parameter ID SRN SN Tfo_Switch Parameter Name Subrack No. 2. If Available State is Normal in the result. TFO Switch Example 0 5 OPEN(Open) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If you do not set DSP No. the status of all DSPs are queried. the DSP is normal. ----End Example An example script of configuring TFO is as follows: MOD DSPTC: SRN=0. run the MOD DSPTC command to set TFO Switch to CLOSE(Close). the service status of all DSPs are queried. run the MOD DSPTC command to set TFO Switch to OPEN(Open). run the DSP DSPSTAT command.

the downlink transmit power is higher than the transmit power of the original signals. Ltd. and then transmits the combined signals.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 24 Configuring PBT 24 About This Chapter Context Configuring PBT In the DTRU. 24-1 . the timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage. two TRXs are integrated into a TRX module that is configured with a combiner. The TRX attributes and antenna feeder mode for the DBS3900 GSM are set on the BSC side.2 Configuring PBT This describes how to configure PBT on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 24. and the transmit power with high gain is achieved and the downlink coverage is extended. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.3 Configuring Dynamic PBT Dynamic Power Boost Technology (PBT) is a timeslot-based PBT. The method of configuring PBT for the DBS3900 is the same as that for the BTS3012/ BTS3012AE. 24.1 Installing Hardware (PBT) This describes how to connect the cables in PBT mode. This describes how to configure dynamic PBT on the Local Maintenance Terminal. The combiner combines the radio signals of the same frequency and same phrase from two TRXs. 24.. In this way.

Ltd. Procedure l Figure 24-1 shows the connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .24 Configuring PBT HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 24. 24-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Installing Hardware (PBT) This describes how to connect the cables in PBT mode.

24-3 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 24 Configuring PBT Figure 24-1 Connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in PBT mode DDPU RUN ALM VSWRA VSWRB COM POWER RXA1 RXA2 TXA RXA3 RXA4 RXB1 RXB2 RXB3 TXB RXB4 DTRU TX1 TCOM TX2 RUN ACT ALM RF_IND RS T RXM1 RXD1 RXM2 RXD2 POWER Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd..

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . ----End Example An example script for configuring PBT is as follows: 24-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NOTE When you configure PBT. l Preparation Table 24-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PBT Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX TRXBN TRXPN SNDMD Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index TRX Board No. The following BTSs support the PBT: BTS3012. None. With this feature. and DBS3900 (RRU3004 available). the signal can be transmitted through only channel 0. Send Mode Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 0 0 PBT(PBT) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. BSC Prerequisite l l The PBT is restricted by the license. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. refer to Activate BSC License.24 Configuring PBT HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) ----End 24. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to PBT(PBT). TRX Board Path No. BTS3900 or BTS3900A (DRFU available). For details. NEs Involved BTS. the two TRXs in the DTRU are used as one TRX.2 Configuring PBT This describes how to configure PBT on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTS3012AE (DTRU available). Scenario Impact The PBT is used to increase the coverage area of a BTS.

None. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST TRXDEV command to verify that Send Mode is set to PBT(PBT). 24-5 . This describes how to configure dynamic PBT on the Local Maintenance Terminal. NOTE This step is required only when the main BCCH is not carried on the test TRX. l Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then record the test result. CELLIDX=0. run the LST TRXDEV command to verify that Send Mode is set to NONE. Scenario Impact Dynamic PBT is configured to achieve the balance between capacity and coverage. 2. 5. 3. Ltd. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to NONE(none). Use the test MS to make a call. Test the BTS power by using the power meter. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRXBN=0. dynamic PBT is supported by the following types of BTSs: BTS3012/ BTS3012AE configured with the DTRU BTS3900/BTS3900A configured with the DRFU. 24. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRXPN=0. It indicates that the PBT is deactivated.3 Configuring Dynamic PBT Dynamic Power Boost Technology (PBT) is a timeslot-based PBT. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Deactivating PBT 1. SNDMD=PBT. If the power obtained in Step 4 is much larger than that obtained in Step 2. Postrequisite l Verifying PBT 1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 24 Configuring PBT MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. it indicates that the PBT is activated. DBS3900 configured with the RRU3004. Test the BTS power by using the power meter. Compare the test result recorded in Step 2 with that recorded in Step 4. Currently. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. the timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage. and then record the test result. BSC Prerequisite l l Dynamic PBT is restricted by the license. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to NONE(none). 4. NEs Involved BTS.. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to PBT(PBT). refer to Activate BSC License.

TRXBN=1. dynamic PBT cannot be configured on the MBCCH. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported to DPBT(DPBT). ----End Example An example script for configuring dynamic PBT is as follows: MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the channel status monitoring interface shows that the call occupies two channels on the same timeslots of two TRXs. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode of the TRX in the overlaid subcell to DPBT(DPBT). In addition. TRX Board Path No. 24-6 . TRXPN=1. IUOTP=Concentric_cell. When a call occupies a TRX with dynamic PBT enabled. MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. To configure dynamic PBT. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 2. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.24 Configuring PBT HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation Table 24-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring dynamic PBT Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX TRXBN TRXPN SNDMD Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index TRX Board No. SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. two TRXs must be configured. and use the test MS to initiate an emergency call in an area with weak signals (such as at the boundary between an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell). Postrequisite l Verifying dynamic PBT 1. SNDMD=DPBT. Send Mode Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 0 0 DPBT(DPBT) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLIDX=0. CELLIDX=0. NOTE l l You can use the LST TRXIUO command to check whether the TRX is in the overlaid subcell or underlaid subcell. DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DPBT. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric cell). Monitor the channel status.

. If Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported is set to Not Support. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 24-7 . 2. l Deactivating dynamic PBT 1. it indicates that the dynamic PBT function is deactivated.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 24 Configuring PBT The status of one channel is Working. run the LST CELLCHMGBASIC command. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. whereas that of another channel is Subordinate Channel. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support).

.

the downlink coverage is improved.. In this way. Therefore. the BTS can enable this feature through data configuration.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity About This Chapter In the DTRU. the two independent multi-path signals are processed by the equalizer of the MS. When the DTRU works in single TRX mode. and the quality of the receive signal is improved.3 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity Dynamic transmit diversity is timeslot-based transmit diversity.1 Installing Hardware (Transmit Diversity) This describes how to connect the cables in transmit diversity mode. timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 25. Then. the two TRXs on the DTRU transmit the correlated signals of the same carrier. Ltd. 25. This provides two independent multi-path signals for the downlink.2 Configuring Transmit Diversity This describes how to configure transmit diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the diversity gain is obtained.This describes how to configure dynamic transmit diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 25-1 . two TRXs are integrated into one TRX module. 25. With this feature.

25 Configuring Transmit Diversity HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25. Ltd. 25-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 Installing Hardware (Transmit Diversity) This describes how to connect the cables in transmit diversity mode.. Procedure l The blue lines in Figure 25-1 show the cable connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in the BTS3012/BTS3012AE in transmit diversity mode. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

Ltd..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity Figure 25-1 Cable connections between the DTRU and the DDPU in the BTS3012/ BTS3012AE in transmit diversity mode DDPU RUN ALM VSWRA VSWRB COM POWER RXA1 RXA2 TXA RXA3 RXA4 RXB1 RXB2 RXB3 TXB RXB4 DTRU TX1 TCOM TX2 RUN ACT ALM RF_IND RS T RXM1 RXD1 RXM2 RXD2 POWER Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 25-3 .

Ltd.. Figure 25-2 Cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3006C in transmit diversity mode. DDRM DSEM TX1- TX2- DMCM DSEM DDPM TXB TXA RXB1 RUN ALM VSWR A RUN/SLPACTALMRF_IND RXA1 RXM1RXD1- RXB2 VSWRB RXA2 RXM2RXD2FAN- RXB3 RXA3 ANTB ANTA l Figure 25-3 shows the cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3002E in transmit diversity mode. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 25-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.25 Configuring Transmit Diversity HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l Figure 25-2 shows the cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3006C in transmit diversity mode.

Ltd..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity Figure 25-3 Cable connections between the DDPM and the DDRM in the BTS3002E in transmit diversity mode DDPM DDRM DPSM TX1TXB TXA RXB1 RUN ALM VSWRB RXB2 RXA2 RXA1 TX2- VSWR A RXB3 RXA3 ANTB ANTA DMCM DATM FAN- DOOR l Figure 25-4 shows the cable connections in the DBS3900 GSM in transmit diversity mode. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 25-5 .

refer to Activate BSC License. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) l 25-6 . The following BTSs or TRXs support the transmit diversity: BTS3012.. For details. In addition. NEs Involved BTS. at least a pair of dual-polarized antenna feeders or two pairs of single-polarized antenna feeders are required. None. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BSC Prerequisite l l Transmit diversity is restricted by the license. Scenario Impact Transmit diversity is configured to improve the downlink signal strength by manually realizing multipath. Ltd.2 Configuring Transmit Diversity This describes how to configure transmit diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The two TRXs enabling the transmit diversity work as only a TRX.25 Configuring Transmit Diversity HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Figure 25-4 Cable connections in the DBS3900 GSM in transmit diversity mode ANT Antenna ANT_TX/RXA ANT_TX/RXB RX_IN/OUT RRU0 CPRI_E CPRI_W CPRI0 ~ CPRI5 BBU ----End 25.

NOTE When you configure transmit diversity. SNDMD=DIVERSITY. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to a value other than DIVERSITY(DiversityTransmit).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity BTS3012AE (DTRU available). it indicates that the transmit diversity function takes effect. Then. Send Mode Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 0 0 DIVERSITY (DiversityTrans mit) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 2. TRXPN=0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. record the test results. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . BTS3900 or BTS3900A (DRFU available). and DBS3900 (RRU3004 or RRU3008 available). Ltd. TRXBN=0. the signal can be transmitted through only channel 0. ----End Example An example script for configuring transmit diversity is as follows: MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Preparation Table 25-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring transmit diversity Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX TRXBN TRXPN SNDMD Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index TRX Board No. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode to Diversity(DiversityTransmit). CELLIDX=0.. 25-7 l Deactivating transmit diversity 1. It indicates that the transmit diversity is deactivated. In addition. TRX Board Path No. If the power is not 0. one double-transceiver unit serves as one TRX. run the LST TRXDEV command to verify that Send Mode is set to a value other than DIVERSITY(DiversityTransmit). Postrequisite l Verifying transmit diversity – Test the power of channel B on the TRX whose Send Mode is set to DIVERSITY (DiversityTransmit) by using a power meter. BTS3006C or BTS3002E (DDRM available).

NEs Involved BTS. For details. refer to Activate BSC License. None. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Prerequisite l l Dynamic transmit diversity is restricted by the license. Currently.BTS3900/BTS3900A configured with the DRFU. Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 Concentric_cell (Concentric cell) NO(NO) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning DYNPBTSUPPOR TED DDIVERSITY (DDiversityTransmit) Network planning TRXBN TRXPN 1 0 Network planning Network planning 25-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Scenario Impact Dynamic transmit diversity makes full use of the idle timeslots to expand the coverage in the areas with weak signals.3 Configuring Dynamic Transmit Diversity Dynamic transmit diversity is timeslot-based transmit diversity. TRX Board Path No. The cell to which dynamic transmit diversity is applied must be configured with a minimum of one dual-polarized antenna or two uni-polarized antennas..BTS3006C/BTS3002E configured with the DDRM.DBS3900 configured with the RRU3004 or RRU3008. timeslot-based dynamic transmit diversity maintains optimal balance between capacity and coverage. Ltd. this feature is supported by the following types of BTSs:BTS3012/BTS3012AE configured with the DTRU. BSC.This describes how to configure dynamic transmit diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Preparation Table 25-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring transmit diversity Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX IUOTP ENIUO Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Cell IUO Type Enhanced Concentric Allowed Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported TRX Board No. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.25 Configuring Transmit Diversity HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25.

NOTE l l You can run the LST TRXIUO command to check whether the TRX is in the overlaid subcell or in the underlaid subcell. ENIUO=NO. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Monitor the channel status. To configure dynamic transmit diversity. MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 25 Configuring Transmit Diversity Parameter ID SNDMD Parameter Name Send Mode Example DDIVERSITY (DDiversityTransmit) Source Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DYNPBTSUPPORTED=DDIVERSITY. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . CELLIDX=0. Ltd. and use the test MS to initiate an emergency call in an area with weak signals (such as at the boundary between an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell). dynamic transmit diversity cannot be configured on the MBCCH. run the LST CELLCHMGBASIC command. two TRXs must be configured. SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Send Mode of the TRX in the overlaid subcell to DDIVERSITY(DDiversityTransmit). run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported to DDIVERSITY(DDIVERSITY). TRXPN=0. Postrequisite l Verifying dynamic transmit diversity 1.. l Deactivating dynamic transmit diversity 1. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric cell). 2. the channel status monitoring interface shows that the call occupies two channels on the same timeslots of two TRXs. If Dynamic Transmission Div<PBT> Supported is set to Not Support. whereas that of another channel is Subordinate Channel. When a call occupies a TRX with dynamic transmit diversity enabled. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. IUOTP=Concentric_cell. The status of one channel is Working. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 25-9 2. In addition. TRXBN=1. SNDMD=DDIVERSITY. it indicates that the dynamic transmission diversity function is deactivated. CELLIDX=0. ----End Example An example script for configuring dynamic transmit diversity is as follows: MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

.

26. 26. 26-1 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity About This Chapter With appropriate design. the 4-way receiver diversity technology allows one TRX module to receive the uplink signals from four RX channels and then combine the uplink signals to achieve better signal quality and demodulation performance.2 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity This describes how to configure 4-way receive diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.1 Installing Hardware (4-Way Receive Diversity) This describes how to connect the cables in 4-way receive diversity mode. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Thus.. the receive sensitivity is improved. and the receive effect is much better than that of none receiver diversity and that of two-way receiver diversity.

The red lines in Figure 26-1 shows the connection between the DTRU and the DDPU in 4-way receive diversity mode. Procedure Step 1 This takes the BTS3012/BTS3012AE as an example.26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 26.1 Installing Hardware (4-Way Receive Diversity) This describes how to connect the cables in 4-way receive diversity mode. Ltd.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 26-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity Figure 26-1 Connection between the DTRU and the DDPU in 4-way receive diversity mode DDPU RUN ALM VSWRA VSWRB DDPU RUN ALM VSWRA VSWRB COM COM POWER POWER RXA1 RXA2 TXA RXA3 RXA4 RXB1 RXB2 RXB3 TXB RXB4 RXA1 RXA2 TXA RXA3 RXA4 RXB1 RXB2 RXB3 TXB RXB4 DTRU TX1 DTRU TX1 TCOM TCOM TX2 RUN ACT ALM RF_IND TX2 RUN ACT ALM RF_IND RS T RXM1 RXD1 RXM2 RXD2 RS T RXM1 RXD1 RXM2 RXD2 POWER POWER Table 26-1 Description of ports on the DTRU Port TX1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Type N female connector Explanation TX1 output 26-3 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

TX2 output Main receive port of TRX 1 or diversity receive port 1 of TRX 1 Diversity receive port of TRX 1 or diversity receive port 2 of TRX 1 Main receive port of TRX 2 or diversity receive port 3 of TRX 1 Diversity receive port of TRX 2 or diversity receive port 4 of TRX 1 Power input Table 26-2 Description of ports on the DDPU Port COM Type DB26 female connector Explanation l Receives control signal. clock signal. Receives control signal. communication signal.26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Port TCOM TX2 RXM1 RXD1 RXM2 RXD2 PWR Type N female connector N female connector SMA female connector SMA female connector SMA female connector SMA female connector 3V3 power connector Explanation Combines and exports signals from TX1 and TX2 or exports PBT combined signals.. l POWER TXA TXB RXA1 RXA2 RXA3 RXA4 RXB1 RXB2 RXB3 RXB4 3V3 power connector N female connector N female connector SMA female connector SMA female connector SMA female connector SMA female connector SMA female connector SMA female connector SMA female connector SMA female connector Power input Combined TX input from the DTRU to the DCOM Combined TX input from the DTRU to the DCOM Main output port for route 1 Main output port for route 2 Main output port for route 3 Main output port for route 4 Diversity output port for route 1 Diversity output port for route 2 Diversity output port for route 3 Diversity output port for route 4 26-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . communication signal. Ltd. and clock signal from the DSCB of the BTS3012AE. and rack number signal from the DCTB of the BTS3012.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity Port ANTA Type DIN female connector Explanation l Connects to the BTS3012 indoor 1/2-inch jumper or the Bias-Tee. For details. BTS. Scenario Impact The 4-way receive diversity is configured to improve the gain of the uplink signals on the radio channel and the receiver sensibility. . l Preparation Table 26-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 4-way receive diversity Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX TRXBN Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index TRX Board No. None. Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning 26-5 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.BTS3006C/BTS3002E configured with the DDRM. The 4-way receive diversity is restricted by the license.. refer to Activate BSC License. NEs Involved MS.2 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity This describes how to configure 4-way receive diversity on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Connects to the BTS3012 indoor 1/2-inch jumper or the Bias-Tee. this feature is supported by the following types of BTSs: BTS3012/BTS3012AE configured with the DTRU. and BSC. Connects to the BTS3012AE indoor 1/4-inch jumper or the Bias-Tee. Ltd. Prerequisite l l l Only one TRX can be configured on a DTRU. and BTS3900/BTS3900A configured with the DRFU. Currently. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Connects to the BTS3012AE indoor 1/4-inch jumper or the Bias-Tee. The cell to which 4-way receiver diversity is applied must be configured with two dualpolarized antennas or four uni-polarized antennas. l ANTB DIN female connector l l ----End 26.

DDIVERSITY(DDiversityTransmit). NOTE l l If the TRX of the DTRU is allocated to channel O. run the LST TRXDEV command to verify that Receive Mode is set to a value other than FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver). On the Local Maintenance Terminal.26 Configuring 4-Way Receive Diversity HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID TRXPN RCVMD Parameter Name TRX Board Path No. Send Mode can be set to only NOCOMB (NoCombin). run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Receive Mode to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver). TRXBN=0. DIVERSITY(DiversityTransmit). run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Receive Mode to a value other than FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver). CELLIDX=0. 2. set Send Mode to NOCOMB(NoCombin). TRXPN=0. PBT (PBT). l 26-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the LST TRXDEV command to verify that Receive Mode is set to FOURDIVERSITY(Four Diversity Receiver). ----End Example An example script for configuring 4-way receive diversity is as follows: MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . RCVMD=FOURDIVERSITY. It indicates that the 4-way receive diversity function is activated. It indicates that the 4-way receive diversity function is deactivated. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l Verifying 4-way receive diversity – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. l Deactivating 4-way receive diversity 1. Receive Mode Example 0 FOURDIVERSIT Y(Four Diversity Receiver) Source Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the TRX of the DTRU is allocated to channel 1.. or DPBT(DPBT).

NEs Involved BTS. BSC. The SDCCH dynamic adjustment can decrease the TCH traffic bearer capability and increase intra-cell handovers. and radio resources are fully utilized.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 27 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment 27 Scenario Impact Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment SDCCH dynamic adjustment is to dynamically adjust the number of SDCCHs according to the load of the TCHs and SDCCHs.This describes how to configure SDCCH dynamic adjustment on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In this way. The SDCCH dynamic adjustment is performed to reduce the SDCCH congestion rate and the impact of the SDCCH initial configuration on the system performance. Ltd.. Preparation Table 27-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring SDCCH dynamic adjustment Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX SDDYN IDLESDTHRES CELLMAXSD MINRESTIMETC H Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum TCH Minimum Recovery Time<s> Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 YES(YES) 2 80 60 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the effect of the initial configuration of the SDCCH on the system is minimized. 27-1 .

Ltd. Postrequisite l Verifying SDCCH dynamic adjustment – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and TCH Minimum Recovery Time<s>. it indicates that the function of SDCCH dynamic adjustment is deactivated. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to YES(YES). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MINRESTIMETCH=60. Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum. run the LST CELLBASICPARA command. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it indicates that the function of SDCCH dynamic adjustment is activated. 27-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. IDLESDTHRES=2. SDDYN=YES. l Deactivating SDCCH dynamic adjustment 1.27 Configuring SDCCH Dynamic Adjustment HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.. run the LST CELLBASICPARA command. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed to NO(No). 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Idle SDCCH Threshold N1. CELLIDX=0. ----End Example An example script for configuring SDCCH dynamic adjustment is as follows: MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. If SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed is set to No. If SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed is set to YES. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . CELLIDX=0. CELLMAXSD=80.

BSC. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Therefore. NACC is restricted by the license. refer to Activate BSC License. and PCU. NACC is configured to reduce the time of service interruption caused by the cell reselection. Configuring NACC NACC refers to network-assisted cell reselection.. the service interruption time due to the cell reselection is minimized. To implement rapid PS access after cell reselection. For details. Prerequisite l l l The cell supports the GPRS services. Preparation Table 28-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring NACC Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX NCO GPRS NACCSPT Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Network Control Mode GPRS NaccSpt Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 nc0(nc0) SupportAsInnPcu (SupportAsInnPcu) YES(Yes) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 28 Configuring NACC 28 Scenario Impact None. This describes how to configure NACC on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 28-1 . NEs Involved MS. Ltd. the BSC sends the system information about the target cell to the MS before cell reselection.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Deactivating NACC 1. 3. 28-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Then. Adjust the position of the MS or increase the power of the target cell so that the level of the target cell is higher than that of the serving cell. NACCSPT=YES. Set NaccSpt to YES(Yes). 1. the MS sends a PACKET CELL CHANGE NOTIFICATION message to the BSC.. run the SET PSBASE command to set Network Control Mode to nc0(nc0) or nc1(nc1). run the SET CELLGPRS command to set NaccSpt to NO(No). and SI13 of the target cell. run the SET CELLGPRS command to set Nc2Spt to NO(No). After receiving the message. Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(SupportAsInnPcu) or SupportAsExtPcu (SupportAsExtPcu) as required.28 Configuring NACC HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NOTE When Network Control Mode is set to NC2. NCO=nc0. Postrequisite l Verifying NACC 1. SET CELLGPRS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. the BSC sends a PACKET CELL CHANGE CONTINUE message to the MS to instruct the MS to continue with cell reselection. GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu. Ltd. CELLIDX=0. Then. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 2. When detecting that the signal strength of the serving cell weakens and that a neighboring cell with better signal strength is available. CELLIDX=0. The operations for verifying deactivation of NACC are the same as those for Verifying NACC. the BSC replies a PACKET NEIGHBOUR CELL DATA message containing SI1. 2. you are advised to disable the NC2 function before verifying NACC. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Thus. ----End Example An example script for configuring NACC is as follows: SET PSBASE: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. Make an MS camp on the serving cell. SI3. 2. Verify that the message interchange in Verifying NACC does not exist. 4. the cell reselection procedure is the NC2 procedure. activate the GPRS services and trace the signaling on the Um interface. Trace PS messages on the Um interface. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET CELLGPRS command.

NEs Involved MS. For details. 29-1 . Preparation Table 29-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring NC2 Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX NCO GPRS NC2SPT Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Network Control Mode GPRS Nc2Spt Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 nc2(nc2) SupportAsInnPcu (SupportAsInnPcu) YES(Yes) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Configuring NC2 The network-controlled cell reselection (NC2) refers to the situation that the MS in packet transfer mode can be controlled by the network to reselect a cell according to the measurement report.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 29 Configuring NC2 29 Scenario Impact None.This describes how to configure NC2 on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. With NC2. BSC.. Prerequisite l l l The cell supports the GPRS services. the network instructs the MS to perform cell reselection. NC2 is restricted by the license. Ltd. refer to Activate BSC License.

29-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CELLIDX=0. run the SET CELLGPRS command.29 Configuring NC2 HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that network-control-order in the Packet PSI13 message is NC2 in the tracing result. run the SET CELLGPRS command. activate the GPRS services and trace the signaling on the Um interface. 1. 3. Verify that network-control-order in the Packet PSI13 message is not NC2. Ltd. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NC2SPT=YES. Start the tracing of the messages on the Um interface. GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu. l Deactivating NC2 1. run the SET PSBASE command to set Network Control Mode to nc2(nc2). see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Postrequisite l Verifying NC2 1. NCO=nc2. Set Nc2Spt to YES(Yes). SET CELLGPRS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. 2. For details. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Then. 2. and set Nc2Spt to NO(No).. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . ----End Example An example script for configuring NC2 is as follows: SET PSBASE: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. Make an MS camp on the serving cell. CELLIDX=0. Set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu(SupportAsInnPcu) or SupportAsExtPcu (SupportAsExtPcu) as required. 2. Verifying the deactivation of NC2: The operations are the same as those for Verifying NC2.

l In external PCU mode. and you can run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 0 command to disable the function of takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. For PCU commands. Then. see the Manual of Commands related to the PCU. run the following command: pcu add privateoptpara<LCNo><PSPrecedence><UpTbfRelDelay>2000<DnTbfRelDelay> l In built-in PCU mode. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Extended uplink TBF can decrease transmission delay. the BSC6000V900R008C02 and later versions support takeover of immediate assignment and packet assignment by the BTS When the PCU is in external mode. To configure the duration of the inactive period timer to 2000 ms. 30-1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Ltd. run the SET PRIVATEOPTPARA command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure the duration of the inactive period timer.. and takeover of the packet immediate assignment by the BTS can improve MS access performance and decrease access delay. The packet performance improvement function is not license-controlled.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 30 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement 30 Prerequisite Context Configuring Packet Performance Improvement This describes how to configure packet performance improvement on the external PCU maintenance console or Local Maintenance Terminal. NOTE l l When the PCU is in external mode. reset the cell. run the PCU add privateoptpara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the duration of the inactive period timer. Procedure Step 1 Configure extended uplink TBF. you can run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 0 command to disable the function of takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS. 11-bit EGPRS access on CCCH can improve the EDGE MS performance.

Step 3 Configure takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS. Then. EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH – 3. with the takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS enabled and disabled.. l In external PCU mode. l In external PCU mode. reset the cell. Takeover of immediate and packet immediate assignments by the BTS – – 30-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In built-in PCU mode. run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptImmAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS. Ltd. l ----End Postrequisite l Verifying Packet Performance Improvement 1. run the following command: pcu set egprspara<LCNo><LQCMode> <BepPeriod>no<UpFixMcs><UpDefaultMcs><DnFixMcs><DnDefaultMcs> l In built-in PCU mode. run the SET PSBASE command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to enable the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages. run the PCU set egprspara command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH for the cell. with the takeover of packet assignment by the BTS enabled and disabled. run the pcu cfgpara add<BoardNo>g_bCellSptPackAssDlShift 4 1 command on the PCU maintenance terminal to configure takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. run the SET PSOTHERPARA command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure takeover of immediate assignment by the BTS. Connect an MS to a PC to test the Ping service performance. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Connect an MS to a PC to test the Ping service performance. In built-in PCU mode. with the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH enabled and disabled. – To enable the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH for the cell. Extended uplink TBF – Connect an MS supporting the GERAN Feature Package 1 to a PC to test the Ping service performance. 2. l In external PCU mode. Then. reset the cell. Connect an EGPRS capable MS to a PC to test the Ping service performance. run the SET PSOTHERPARA command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to configure takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. with the extended uplink TBF enabled and disabled.30 Configuring Packet Performance Improvement HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Step 2 Configuring EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH. l Step 4 Configure takeover of packet assignment by the BTS. run the following command: pcu set egprspara<LCNo><LQCMode> <BepPeriod>yes<UpFixMcs><UpDefaultMcs><DnFixMcs><DnDefaultMcs> – To disable the EGPRS access of 11-bit messages on the CCCH for the cell.

31.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 Configuring Flex Abis 31 About This Chapter Configuring Flex Abis Flex Abis implements the sharing of the transmission resources on the Abis interface between different BTSs. and thus improves the resource utilization. the transmission resources on the Abis interface can be used in an efficient way. and services. 31-1 . Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. That is. and the cells configured with the EGPRS function. Context For the impact of configuring the Flex Abis on the system.. the transmission resources on the Abis interface form a resource pool to share resources between CS services and PS services (including idle timeslots) and also between different cells or BTSs. Ltd. cascading BTSs.2 Configuring Exclusive Timeslot This describes how to configure exclusive timeslots on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 31. Especially when Flex Abis is enabled in multi-cell large capacity BTSs. see BSS Feature Description. Flex Abis is an allocation mode of the transmission resources on the Abis interface.1 Configuring Flex Abis This describes how to configure Flex Abis on the Local Maintenance Terminal. cells.

The license is activated through the Local Maintenance Terminal. After the BTS local switching is performed. This can save the transmission resources on the Abis interface. The signaling load on the Abis interface is increased and the reliability of the system is reduced. The Flex Abis and Abis bypass functions can be enabled simultaneously. the occupied transmission resources on the Abis interface are released.31 Configuring Flex Abis HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31. The Abis bypass function is not supported. Scenario Impact With the Flex Abis feature. NEs Involved BSC. the utilization of the transmission resources on the Abis interface are greatly improved. For details. Flex Abis serves as the basis of the BTS local switching.1 Configuring Flex Abis This describes how to configure Flex Abis on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the following restrictions should apply: – l l l Flex Abis must be enabled in all the BTSs. When BTS ring topology I and Flex Abis are simultaneously enabled. The 16 kbit/s LAPD link is not supported. BTS Prerequisite l l The configuration of Flex Abis is license-controlled. see Activate BSC License. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .. and only the forward and reverse single E1 link is supported. – – 31-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

If the extension cabinet group needs to process data services. and if the high-rate coding schemes (CS3 and CS4. the access success rate of the CS service users is increased if the Abis transmission resources are insufficient. Ltd. the system allocates TCHHs preferentially if the fixed Abis channel seizure rate exceeds Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred{%} and the Flex Abis channel seizure rate exceeds Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred{%}. When the BTS is initially configured. If there are no lower-level BTSs. and if the channel type is changed to static PDCH. That is. l l l l After a call is released. if an upper-level BTS is in Flex Abis mode. indicating fixed timeslots. you are advised to set both Sublink resources preemption switch and Lower-level sublink resources preemption switch to Yes. you need to set only Sublink resources preemption switch to Yes to increase the access success rate of the CS service users if the Abis transmission resources are insufficient. After Flex Abis is enabled in the BSC. the Abis timeslots allocated to the extension cabinet group are displayed as TCH. and if a lower-level BTS is in SemiSolid mode. idle timeslots need to be configured. l l l Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Sub Res Preempt Flag is set to YES(YES) to allow the CS services to preempt the resources of PS services on the secondary link in the same-level BTSs. 31-3 . In this case.If the lower-level BTS needs to process data services. PCU Support PREEMPT_ABIS_LINK message is set to YES(YES) to allow the BSC to send a PREEMPT_ABIS_LINK message to the PCU so that the CS services can preempt the transmission resources occupied by the PCU if the PCU supports the processing of this message. When the built-in PCU is configured. MCS3 to MCS9) are required. When the external PCU is configured. idle timeslots need to be configured. If the Flex Abis function is enabled on the BTS. the transmission resources on the Abis interface can be dynamically allocated without configuring the static PDTCH and idle timeslots if the actual traffic volume is smaller than the estimated value in network design. set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) or SEMI_ABIS(Semisolid Abis). and if the extension cabinet group is directly connected to the BSC. the transmission link that the call uses can be reserved if a new call can totally or partly uses the link. the type of the timeslots allocated to the lower BTS is displayed as TCH. Flex Abis Mode is set to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) or SEMI_ABIS(Semisolid Abis) to enable Flex Abis. indicating fixed timeslots. you need to set FlexAbis Bypast-connect Status to Yes. as shown in Figure 31-1.. In this manner. l l l l l l The CS services can preempt the resources of PS services on the secondary link (or even the primary link if necessary) in a BTS and its lower-level BTS. and if the high-rate coding schemes (CS3 and CS4. When Flex Abis is enabled and Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch is set to YES (YES). To enable this function. MCS3 to MCS9) are required. This can prevent an additional 64 kbit/s timeslot from being occupied. In the case of cascaded BTSs. If Flex abis needs to be enabled after the BTS is configure. If the Flex Abis function is enabled on the BTS. If there are lower-level BTSs. the CS services and PS services share the transmission resources on the Abis interface. indicating fixed timeslots. After Flex Abis is enabled. the allocation of TCHHs can be triggered based on the Abis transmission resource load to increase the call access success rate. the primary link and secondary link are dynamically allocated. When Flex Abis is enabled. Multiplexing Mode can be set to 5:1 or 6:1 to multiplex five or six RSLs onto a 64 kbit/s timeslot. the Abis transmission resources may be insufficient even if there are still available TCHFs. but the timeslot type that the upper-level BTS reports to the BSC is displayed as Flex. In this manner.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 Configuring Flex Abis Preparation NOTE l l When Flex Abis is enabled. the Abis interface transmission link can be quickly established when the new call arrives. Low Lev Sub Res Preempt Flag is set to YES(YES) to allow the CS services to preempt the resources of PS services on the secondary link in the lower-level BTSs. the type of corresponding Abis timeslots is automatically changed to TCH.

BTS Description Multiplexing Mode Flex Abis Mode Example BTS3012 BTS3012 BSC 0 26 0 TDM BTS3012 MODE4_1 FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 31-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.31 Configuring Flex Abis HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Figure 31-1 Configuration of BTS combined cabinets and cabinet groups BTS Master cabinet group Flex Abis/SemiSolid BSC Extension cabinet group Fix Abis The following is an example of configuring Flex Abis for the BTS3012 in TDM service mode. Port No. Table 31-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Flex Abis Parameter ID BTSNAME TYPE UPNODE SRN SN PN BTSDESC MPMODE FlexAbisMode Parameter Name BTS name BTS Type Up Node Type Subrack No.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Ltd. Slot No.

31-5 .. run the MOD FLEXABIS command to configure parameters of Flex Abis.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 Configuring Flex Abis Parameter ID AbisByPassMod e ServiceMode DCELLNAME DCTYPE DCMCC DCMNC DCLAC DCCI CPLMode TRXBN FREQ SUBRESPREE MPTFLG LOWLEVSUBR ESPREEMPTFL G ABISRESADJT CHHFUNSWIT CH FIXABISPRIOR ABISLOADTH RED FLEXABISPRI ORABISLOAD THRED FLEXABISUSE CONNSTATE Parameter Name Abis By Pass Mode Service Type Cell Name Cell Type Cell MCC Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI Separate Mode TRX Board No. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TRX Freq. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD BTS command. Add a BTS and set the Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis). Sub Res Preempt Flag Low Lev Sub Res Preempt Flag Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred{%} Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred{%} FlexAbis Bypastconnect Status Example FALSE(Not Support) TDM TDMCELL GSM900 460 01 8240 1 UNSUPPORT(Not Support) 0 988 YES(YES) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning YES(YES) Network planning 80 Network planning 85 Network planning YES(YES) Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

MPMODE=MODE4_1. 7. and hold on the call. The Abis timeslot Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. DCELLNAME="TDMCELL". run the LST BTSTS command to query the timeslots on the ports of the BTS. and End Sub Timeslot NO. ABISRESADJTCHHFUNSWITCH=YES. DCTYPE=GSM900. /*Configure Flex Abis parameters*/ MOD FLEXABIS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. SDCCH. PN=0. 3. TYPE=BTS3012. ServiceMode=TDM. Reserve only one 16 kbit/s subtimeslot for services during the test because the timeslots are blocked in unit of 16 kbit/s subtimeslots. Postrequisite l Verifying Flex Abis 1. BTSNAME="BTS3012". Ltd. NOTE 2. FLEXABISPRIORABISLOADTHRED=85. according to the Flex Abis timeslots and sub-timeslots queried in Step 2.. SUBRESPREEMPTFLG=YES. Use the test MS to initiate a call in the cell. ----End Example An example script of configuring Flex Abis on BTS3012 in TDM service mode is as follows: *Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME="BTS3012". and two TCHs by deactivating cells through MOD CELLACS and blocking channels through SET BTSOBJ. The call occupies another TCH in the cell.. and hold on the call. End Timeslot NO. LOWLEVSUBRESPREEMPTFLG=YES. run the MOD FLEXABIS command to set Abis By Pass Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) and Multiplexing Mode to MODE16K. Then. run the SET BTSFORBIDTS command to block the Flex Abis timeslots. 5. Run the DSP ABISTS command to query the timeslot status. DCMNC="01". DCLAC=8240. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 6. set the FlexAbis Bypast-connect Status to YES(YES). /*Configure FlexAbis Bypast-connect Status*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: FlexAbisUseConnState=YES. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. FREQ=988. MODE=FLEX_ABIS. block the Flex Abis timeslots and sub-timeslots until only two consecutive 8 kbit/s Flex Abis sub-timeslots are available. Do not block any timeslot other than Flex Abis timeslots.. Verify that State is set to OCCUPIED(Occupied). SRN=0. Verify that State is set to OCCUPIED (Occupied).31 Configuring Flex Abis HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Step 3 (Optional)On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Run the DSP ABISTS command to query the timeslot status. FlexAbisMode=FLEX_ABIS. UPNODE=BSC.. DCMCC="460". only one unblocked channel is available. BTSDESC="TDM BTS3012". Start Sub Timeslot NO. Then. CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. Leave only cell 1 with the main BCCH. run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command. DCCI=1. SN=26. End the call and block the occupied TCH. do as follows: Select Start Timeslot NO. To block the Flex Abis timeslots. Use the test MS to call a fixed-line phone in the cell. FIXABISPRIORABISLOADTHRED=80. 4. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRXBN=0. 31-6 . It is found that the Abis timeslot corresponding to the channel occupied by the call is the unblocked Flex Abis timeslot.

Prerequisite l Both the GXPUM and GXPUT are configured. The BTS is configured. 31.2 Configuring Exclusive Timeslot This describes how to configure exclusive timeslots on the Local Maintenance Terminal. or a TCH. run the MOD FLEXABIS command to set Abis By Pass Mode to FIX_ABIS(Fix Abis). 8. This indicates that the configuration takes effect. End Timeslot No.. run the LST FLEXABIS command to verify that Abis By Pass Mode is set to FIX_ABIS(Fix Abis). run the SET BTSFORBIDTS command to disable the specified timeslots on a BTS. None NEs Involved BSC. 31-7 . Ltd. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Release the call. an RSL. Scenario Impact Test the timeslots on the port to check whether the timeslots work normally. l Preparation Table 31-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring exclusive timeslots Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSNAME OPTYPE PN STARTTS ENDTS Parameter Name Index Type BTS name Operate Type Port No. BTS NOTE If a timeslot on the port is disabled. There are idle ports on the configured GEIUB. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The test personnel disables the other timeslots on the port to check whether a timeslot without being disabled work normally.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 31 Configuring Flex Abis corresponding to the occupied TCH is the unblocked Flex Abis timeslot. 2. Start Timeslot No. it cannot serve as an OML. Example BYNAME (By Name) BTS3012 FORBID(Forbid) 0 10 23 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Deactivating Flex Abis 1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET BTSFORBIDTS command to set Operate Type to RESTORE(Restore). An example script of configuring exclusive timeslots is as follows: SET BTSFORBIDTS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 2.31 Configuring Flex Abis NOTE HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) You can also run this command to enable the exclusive timeslots. OPTYPE=FORBID. ----End Example Disable the timeslots from 10 to 23 on the BTS3012. run the LST BTSTS command to view the timeslots on the ports of the BTS. Ltd. ENDTS=23. Postrequisite l Verifying exclusive timeslot – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. PN=0. numbered from 1 to 30. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 31-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the LST BTSTS command to view the timeslots on the ports of the BTS. l Unblocking exclusive timeslot 1. BTSNAME="BTS3012".. STARTTS=10.

32-1 . The BSC and the MSC are Huawei devices. one BSC can be connected to multiple MSCs at the same time. see Activate BSC License. a maximum of 32 MSCs form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers under one group of BSCs. the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the MSCs in the pool according to the NRI or load balancing principle. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.2 Configuring the MSC Pool (A over IP) This describes how to configure the MSC pool in A over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Through the MSC pool. In addition.. The MSC server interconnects with the MGW.1 Configuring MSC Pool (A over TDM) This describes how to verify the MSC pool in A over TDM on the Local Maintenance Terminal. and the relevant data is configured correctly. 32. For details. The MSC pool requires a license. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32 Configuring the MSC Pool 32 About This Chapter Prerequisite l l l l Configuring the MSC Pool With this feature. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 32.

Start CIC DPC Group Index Operator Name Example dsp1 h'cc 0 0 5 14 0 0 0 46000 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 32-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the traffic volume is evenly distributed in the MSC pool. Scenario Impact In A over TDM. This describes how to configure the MSC pool in A over TDM on the BSC. MGW. Port No.. NEs Involved MS. and HLR Preparation The prerequisites of the operation is that the mapping between the OPC and the subrack is configured.1 Configuring MSC Pool (A over TDM) This describes how to verify the MSC pool in A over TDM on the Local Maintenance Terminal. None.32 Configuring the MSC Pool HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32. BSC. MSC. Slot No. Table 32-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MSC Pool in A over TDM Data Type DPC attributes Parameter ID NAME DPC DPCGIDX CNID Attributes of E1 on the A interface SRN SN PN STCIC DPCGIDX MSC pool switch attributes OPNAME Parameter Name DPC Name DPC Code DPC Group Index MSC ID Subrack No. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

/*Enable the MSC pool function*/ SET MSCPOOL: OPNAME="46000". Set MSC Pool Function Enabled to YES(Yes) and specify Length of NRI in TMSI and NULL-NRI Value. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DPCGIDX=0. DPCGIDX=0. MSCNULLNRI=4.. such as the NRI and NULL_NRI of each MSC. PN=0. The start CICs of different ports within a DPC group cannot be duplicate. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details on parameter settings. run the ADD N7DPC command to add DPCs. MSCPOOLALLOW=YES. the first DPC is the default signaling point. see the user manuals related to the MSC products. You can run the MOD N7DPC command to modify the default signaling point. SN=14. For Huawei core network devices. ----End Example Assume that the OPC is configured according to the network planning. enable the MSC pool on the MSC side. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MNC. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. available capacity of the MSC. CNID=0.For details on parameter settings. run the ADD AE1T1 command to add E1s on the A interface.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32 Configuring the MSC Pool Data Type Parameter ID MSCPOOLAL LOW NRILEN MSCNULLNR I Parameter Name MSC Pool Function Enabled Length of NRI in TMSI NULL-NRI Value NRI Value DPC Example YES(Yes) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 3 4 3 h'cc Mapping between the NRI and the MSC NRI DPC Procedure Step 1 Configure the data of the MSC server and the MGW. 2. STCIC=0. NRILEN=3. and MSC ID. DPC=h'cc. NOTE When you add multiple DPCs. 32-3 . /*Add an E1 on the A interface*/ ADD AE1T1: SRN=5. run the ADD NRIMSCMAP command to configure the mapping between the NRI and the MSC. run the SET MSCPOOL command. Example scripts are as follows: /*Add a DPC*/ ADD N7DPC: NAME="dsp1". Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Configure the parameters related to the MSC pool. Ltd. see relevant user manuals of the MSC. 1.

DPC=h'cc. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and HLR 32-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. NEs Involved MS. NOTE 3. Power on MS 1 so that MS 1 initiates the location update procedure on MSC 1. run the SET MSCPOOL command to enable the MSC pool function. Start the trace of the messages on the A interface. the core network allocates the TMSI to MS 2. On the BSC side. 5. Ltd. run the MOD N7DPC command to set MSC Administrable State of the MSCs except for this specific MSC to UNAVAIL(Unavail). 8. Then. Use MS 1 to call MS 2 in the area covered by the MSC pool. Power on MS 2 so that MS 2 initiates the location update procedure on MSC 2. run the LST MSCPOOL command to verify that MSC Pool Function Enabled is set to NO. the core network allocates the TMSI to MS 1. MGW. 7. In addition. 4. Set DPC Code(Hex) to the DPC code of MSC 1/MSC 2. 6. Postrequisite l Verifying MSC Pool (A over TDM) 1. and ensure that the BSC status and MSC status are normal. 32.32 Configuring the MSC Pool HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) /*Configure the mapping between the NRI and the MSC*/ ADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=3. It indicates that the MSC pool(A over TDM) function is deactivated. Run the MOD N7DPC command to set MSC Administrable State of MS 1 to UNAVAIL(Unavail). Scenario Impact In A over IP. 2.. BSC. run the SET MSCPOOL command to set MSC Pool Function Enabled to NO(No). enable the TMSI reallocation function on the core network side. After the location update is complete. Verify that the call is normal. None. Then. change the value of MSC Administrable State to NORMAL(Normal). the traffic volume is evenly distributed in the MSC pool. Combine MSC 1 and MSC 2 to form an MSC pool. If you want to make an MS to initiate the location update procedure on a specific MSC. Then. Get two MSs that are registered in the MSC pool ready. ensure that the values of parameters such as Length of NRI in TMSI and NULL-NRI are same as those on the MSC side. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Verify the A signaling messages between BSC and MSC 1/ MSC 2. and MSC 2 assigns a new TMSI to MS 1 according to the messages traced over the A interface. 2. and set Selected Cells on the BSSAP tab page to the cell where the MS camps. l Deactivating MSC pool(A over TDM) 1. MSC.2 Configuring the MSC Pool (A over IP) This describes how to configure the MSC pool in A over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

This describes how to configure the MSC pool in A over IP on the BSC. 32-5 . Signaling Link Set Index Signaling Link Set Index Subrack No. Destination Entity No. Table 32-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring links on the A interface Data Type M3UA destination entity Parameter ID DENO NAME DPC RTCONTEXT SSN CNID M3UA link set SIGLKSIDX NAME DENO Parameter Name Destination Entity No. Destination Entity Name DPC Code Routing Context Subsystem Number Network Element ID Signaling Link Set Index Signaling Link Set Name Adjacent Destination Entity No. Example 1 m3de h'cc 0 254 0 0 linkset_1 1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning M3UA route DENO SIGLKSIDX 1 0 0 0 2048 2048 M3UA link SIGLKSIDX SRN LOCPN PEERPN Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Destination Port No. Local Port No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32 Configuring the MSC Pool Preparation The prerequisites of the operation is that the M3UA local entity and the mapping between the OPC and the subrack is configured. Ltd.

2. 32-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and MSC ID.32 Configuring the MSC Pool HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID LOCIP1 PEERIP1 Parameter Name First Local IP Address First Destination IP Address Example 192. For details on parameter settings.168. run the ADD M3DE command to add M3UA destination entities. MNC. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Step 5 Configure GFGUA/GOGUA. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. see the user manuals related to the MSC products.1 Source Network planning Network planning Table 32-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MSC Pool in A over IP Data Type MSC pool switch attributes Parameter ID OPNAME MSCPOOLAL LOW NRILEN MSCNULLNR I Mapping between the NRI and the MSC NRI DPC Parameter Name Operator Name MSC Pool Function Enabled Length of NRI in TMSI NULL-NRI Value NRI Value DPC Example 46000 YES(Yes) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 3 4 3 h'cc Procedure Step 1 Configure the data of the MSC server and the MGW.. see relevant user manuals of the MSC.2 192.30. Configure the parameters related to the MSC pool. such as the NRI and NULL_NRI of each MSC. Ltd. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. enable the MSC pool on the MSC side.168. run the ADD M3RT command to add the M3UA route.10. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. For Huawei core network devices. available capacity of the MSC.For details on parameter settings. run the ADD M3LKS command to add M3UA link sets. 1.

Postrequisite l Verifying MSC pool (A over IP) 1. /*Add an M3UA link*/ ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSIDX=0. Then. change the value of MSC Administrable State to NORMAL(Normal).2. ----End Example Assume that the M3UA local entity is configured according to the network planning. and ensure the BSC status and MSC status are normal. NAME="m3de". RTCONTEXT=0. SRN=0. the core network allocates the TMSI to MS 2. run the ADD NRIMSCMAP command to configure the mapping between the NRI and the MSC. CNID=0. LOCIP1="1. run the SET MSCPOOL command to configure the parameters related to the MSC pool. MSCNULLNRI=4. Set DPC Code(Hex) to the DPC code of MSC 1/MSC 2. 32-7 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 4. MSCPOOLALLOW=YES. /*Add an M3UA link set*/ ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSIDX=0. DPC=h'cc. /*Configure the mapping between the NRI and the MSC*/ ADD NRIMSCMAP: NRI=3. 2. the core network allocates the TMSI to MS 1. LOCPN=2048. /*Add an M3UA route*/ ADD M3RT: DENO=1.1. NOTE 3.1. If you want to make an MS to initiate the location update procedure on a specific MSC.2. Get ready two MSs that are registered in the MSC pool. enable the TMSI reallocation function on the core network side. Then. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Power on MS 2 so that MS 2 initiates the location update procedure on MSC 2. In addition. 5. NRILEN=3. Example scripts are as follows: /*Add an M3UA destination entity*/ ADD M3DE: DENO=1. run the SET MSCPOOL command to enable the MSC pool function. Start the trace of the messages on the A interface. run the ADD M3LNK command to add M3UA links. NAME="linkset_1".HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 32 Configuring the MSC Pool Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DPC=h'cc. PEERIP1="2. Step 8 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD N7DPC command to set MSC Administrable State of the MSCs except for this specific MSC to UNAVAIL(Unavail). Then. PEERPN=2048. and set Selected Cells on the BSSAP tab page to the cell where the MS camps. 6. SIGLKSIDX=0. Combine MSC 1 and MSC 2 to form an MSC pool. On the BSC side.2". 7. Run the MOD N7DPC command to set MSC Administrable State of MS 1 to UNAVAIL(Unavail)..1". After the location update is complete. ensure the values of parameters such as Length of NRI in TMSI and NULL-NRI are same as those on the MSC side. Verify the A signaling messages between BSC and MSC 1/ MSC 2. DENO=1. Set MSC Pool Function Enabled to YES(Yes) and specify Length of NRI in TMSI and NULL-NRI Value. Power on MS 1 so that MS 1 initiates the location update procedure on MSC 1. Step 7 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Enable the MSC pool function*/ SET MSCPOOL: OPNAME="46000". SSN=254. Ltd.

l Deactivating MSC pool(A over IP) 1.32 Configuring the MSC Pool HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 8. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that the call is normal. and MSC 2 assigns a new TMSI to MS 1 according to the messages traced over the A interface. 2. run the SET MSCPOOL command to set MSC Pool Function Enabled to NO(No). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST MSCPOOL command to verify that MSC Pool Function Enabled is set to NO. 32-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Use MS 1 to call MS 2 in the area covered by the MSC pool. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .. It indicates that the MSC pool(A over IP) function is deactivated. Ltd.

the BTS services are disrupted.5 Manually Switching over BTS Ring Topology This describes how to manually switch over the BTS ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. thus forming a ring. Several BTSs form a chain.3 Querying BTS Ring Topology This describes how to query the ring topology attributes of a BTS on the Local Maintenance Terminal.1 Configuring BTS Ring Topology This describes how to configure the BTS ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal.. and the lowest-level BTS is connected to the BSC through the transmission link. 33. the services of the reverse-link BTS are not disrupted after the transmission is interrupted.2 Changing Non-Ring Topology to Ring Topology This describes how to change a BTS in non-ring topology to a BTS in ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the reverse-link BTS is reinitialized after the transmission is interrupted. 33. In BTS ring topology I. 33. If there is a breakpoint on the ring. 33.4 Deleting a BTS from the Ring Topology This describes how to delete a BTS from the ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In BTS ring topology II. the BTSs that precede the breakpoint remain unchanged in networking mode whereas the BTSs that follow the breakpoint form a new chain connection in the reverse direction. The BTS ring topology is categorized into two types: Huawei BTS ring topology I and Huawei BTS ring topology II. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology 33 Context Configuring BTS Ring Topology About This Chapter The ring networking mode is a special chain networking mode. 33-1 . 33.

a wide range of services are affected when the transmission links are disrupted. you are advised to deploy the ring topology. The ring topology with Flex Abis enabled does not support the preemption of the lower-level PS secondary links. l Ring topology II Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. After link disconnection. and HubBTS functions are not supported. the GBSS automatically switches the terrestrial TDM transmission link on the Abis interface to a backup satellite transmission link. Ring topology I – – – – Impact – If you switch over the BTS in ring topology I manually. At the sites in the areas with frequent earthquakes. The BTS is configured. Scenario – At the sites with high traffic volume. the Abis transmission backup function is recommended.33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33. NEs Involved BSC. Ring topology I – – The Abis over IP. you are advised to deploy the ring topology. The BTS ring topology with Flex Abis enabled has the following impact on other features: Flex Abis must be enabled in all the BTSs and only the forward and reverse single E1 link can be configured. and GEIUB are configured on the GMPS or GEPS in the BSC. The 16 kbit/s LAPD signaling link is not supported. the BTS is reset and the services of the BTS are affected. – – – – Ring topology II The switchover between the forward link and the reverse link of the BTS in ring topology (the time between the disconnection of the physical link and the restoration of the OML and the RSL) is less than eight seconds. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 33-2 . OML backup. Ltd. In satellite transmission mode. you are advised to deploy the ring topology. When the active SDH transmission link is faulty due to a natural disaster. the services are disrupted in the case of switchover. the disconnected BTS is initialized and the services of the BTS are affected.. The Abis transmission backup function is license-controlled. To facilitate the maintenance of the unstable transmission quality or the transmission at the sites in mountainous areas or isolated islands. thus maintaining the normal operation of the network. Thus. The Abis bypass function is not supported. BTS Prerequisite l l l The GXPUM. To improve the security and reliability of the chain topology in the multilevel cascading network.1 Configuring BTS Ring Topology This describes how to configure the BTS ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. GXPUT.

Table 33-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS ring topology Parameter ID BTSNAME TYPE UPNODE SRN SN PN BTSDESC MPMODE FlexAbisMode Parameter Name BTS name BTS Type Up Node Type Subrack No. The Flex Abis.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) – – – – l 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology The Abis over IP. and 16 kbit/s LAPD signaling links are not supported. The Flex Abis and Abis bypass functions are not supported. The configuration of exclusive timeslots is supported but the configuration of monitoring timeslots is not supported. The conversion of the bearing modes is not supported. In satellite transmission mode. 33-3 . Port No. The cabinets of the BTS30 or BTS312 cannot be used in cabinet groups. BTS Description Multiplexing Mode Flex Abis Mode Example BTS3012 BTS3012 BSC 0 26 0 TDM BTS3012 MODE4_1 Fix Abis(Fix Abis) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and HubBTS functions are not supported. In HDLC ring topology. local switching. Only the forward and reverse single E1 link can be configured. HDLC ring topology – – – – – – Preparation The following is an example of configuring a BTS3012 in TDM service mode. that is.. The HDLC-TDM hybrid networking and the connection of secondary links are not supported. the conversion from the HDLC ring topology to the TDM ring topology is not supported. timeslots cannot be manually allocated. Slot No. Ltd. Abis bypass. OML backup. the services are disrupted in the case of switchover.

NETSTRUCT=BIT14.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Example FALSE(Not Support) TDM TDMCELL GSM900 460 01 8240 1 UNSUPPORT(Not Support) 0 988 YES(Yes) 26 1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 33-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. OPC=h'aa. Ltd. ----End Example An example script of configuring ring topology for the BTS3012 in TDM service mode is as follows: /*Add an OPC*/ ADD OPC: NAME="1". TRX Freq. Ring Mode Rev ring slot No.33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID AbisByPassMode ServiceMode DCELLNAME DCTYPE DCMCC DCMNC DCLAC DCCI CPLMode TRXBN FREQ REVCFGRING REVSN REVPN Parameter Name Abis By Pass Mode Service Type Cell Name Cell Type Cell MCC Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI Separate Mode TRX Board No. NI=NATB. Rev ring port No. run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS.

PN=0. CNID=0. When the active SDH transmission link is faulty due to a natural disaster. REVPN=1. UPNODE = BSC. ServiceMode=TDM. BackType=OUTPEER. TRXBN=0. DPC=h'cc. thus maintaining the normal operation of the network. BackType=OUTPEER. 33-5 . TYPE = BTS3012. the Abis transmission backup function is recommended. FlexAbisMode=FLEX_ABIS. DCCI=1. BTSDESC = "TDM BTS3012". /*Add Subrack-OPC Mapping*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=0. FREQ=988. Scenario – At the sites with high traffic volume. DCLAC=8240. the GBSS automatically switches the terrestrial TDM transmission link on the Abis interface to a backup satellite transmission link. REVSN=26. DCELLNAME="TDMCELL". The BTSs are configured in the non-ring topology mode. /*Add a GEIUB*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. DCMCC="460". /*Add a GXPUT*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. BT=GEIUB. 33. NEs Involved BSC. Ltd. DCMNC="01". AbisByPassMode=False. a wide range of services are affected when the transmission links are disrupted. To facilitate the maintenance of the unstable transmission quality or the transmission at the sites in mountainous areas or isolated islands. The BTSs must be in the chain topology. /*Add a GXPUM*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. BT=GXPUT. SN=2. SN=1. /*Add a BTS3012 and configure BTS ring topology*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME= "BTS3012". SN=26. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SRN = 0. MPMODE = MODE4_1. you are advised to deploy the ring topology. you are advised to deploy the ring topology. CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. – – – Impact Performing this operation leads to the resetting of the BTS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology /*Add a DPC*/ ADD N7DPC: NAME="2". you are advised to deploy the ring topology. WorkMode=E1.. REVCFGRING=YES. To improve the security and reliability of the chain topology in the multilevel cascaded network. At the sites in the areas with frequent earthquakes. OPC=h'aa. DPCGIDX=1. DCTYPE=GSM900. BackType=OUTPEER.2 Changing Non-Ring Topology to Ring Topology This describes how to change a BTS in non-ring topology to a BTS in ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Thus. BT=GXPUM. BTS Prerequisite l l l The GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB board is configured. and port 1 of the upper-level BTS must be connected to port 0 of the lower-level BTS. SN=26.

run the MOD BTSRINGATTR command. Scenario Impact Query the BTS ring topology. ----End Example An example script of configuring ring topology for BTSs is as follows: MOD BTSRINGATTR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.3 Querying BTS Ring Topology This describes how to query the ring topology attributes of a BTS on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) ... Ltd. Example YES(Yes) 26 1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 33. BTS Prerequisite The BTS is configured. CONFIGRING=YES. REVPN=1. NEs Involved BSC. 33-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and then set Configure ring to NO(No). None. STNAME="BTS3012".33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation Table 33-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for changing non-ring topology to ring topology Parameter ID CONFIGRING REVSN REVP Parameter Name Configure ring Reverse slot No. Set Configure ring to YES(Yes) and set the corresponding Reverse slot No. Reverse port No. and Reverse port No. Postrequisite To change a BTS in ring topology to a BTS in non-ring topology. REVSN=26. enter the MOD BTSRINGATTR command on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

run the MOD BTSACTSTAT command to modify the Active State to NOT_ACTIVATED(Not Activated). RMV BTS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. BTS Prerequisite The BTSs are configured in the ring topology mode. run the RMV BTS command to delete a BTS from the ring topology.2 Changing Non-Ring Topology to Ring Topology. the BTS ring topology improves the reliability of the system. 33-7 . Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script of deleting a BTS3012 from the ring topology is as follows: MOD BTSACTSTAT: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Scenario Impact Besides saving transmission resources. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. 33. BTSNAME="BTS3012". Reverse slot No. run the LST BTSRINGATTR command to query the ring topology information of the BTS. For the impact of deleting a BTS from the ring topology on the system. NOTE Check whether the Configure ring. NOTE If the deleted BTS has lower-level BTSs. are consistent with the settings in the 33. and Reverse port No. see BSS Feature Description. the lower-level BTSs are also deleted.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. BTSNAME="BTS3012". BTSNAME="BTS3012". Ltd. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ACTSTAT=NOT_ACTIVATED. ----End Example An example script of querying the ring topology attribute of a BTS is as follows: LST BTSRINGATTR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.4 Deleting a BTS from the Ring Topology This describes how to delete a BTS from the ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. NEs Involved BSC.

the maintenance personnel can manually switch over the link to the reverse direction. Thus. The transmission in the forward and reverse directions must work normally during manual switchover. After the switchover. however.33 Configuring BTS Ring Topology HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 33. 33-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script of manually switching over the ring topology of a BTS3012 from forward direction to reverse direction is as follows: SWP BTSRING: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. perform the switchover on the next BTS. BTSNAME="BTS3012". l Prerequisite l l The BTSs are configured in ring topology mode. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. start from the highest-level BTS in the forward direction and then the other BTSs in sequence. The maintenance personnel. start from the highest-level BTS in the reverse direction. The BTS link cannot switch over to the forward direction automatically. After a BTS is successfully connected in the reverse direction and automatically initialized.. Ltd. Impact NEs Involved BTS. the BTS reverse link is set up and the transmission is restored. can forcibly switch over the link to the forward direction. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . OMLCPT=1. Set the port for link establishment after the switchover as required to manually switch over the ring topology direction of a BTS. BSC NOTE l When the switchover is performed manually from the forward link to the reverse link. run the SWP BTSRING command. the BTS cannot work for a certain period. Scenario After a link is broken. When the switchover is performed manually from the reverse link to the forward link. The manual switchover of BTS ring topology is critical to operation and maintenance.5 Manually Switching over BTS Ring Topology This describes how to manually switch over the BTS ring topology on the Local Maintenance Terminal. perform this operation with caution. When the transmission quality in the forward direction is poor.

and GOIUP. In BM/TC combined and A over IP mode. APS can be configured on the GOIUA. NEs Involved MSC. Then the traffic signals are switched from the channel used to receive the data to the protection channel. In BM/TC separated and built-in PCU mode. the APS function is supported by default and cannot be deactivated after the GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT is added. GOIUT.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 34 Configuring APS 34 Scenario Impact Configuring APS The automatic protection switching (APS) function applies to optical port backup. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The APS configuration consists of configuring and verifying APS. The GOIUA. APS can be configured on the GOIUA. GOIUT. In A over IP and external PCU mode. The default configuration is recommended for the BSC. the BSC negotiates with the optical transmission equipment on the protection channel through the APS to switch traffic signals onto the protection channel. the BSC negotiates with the optical transmission equipment on the protection channel through the APS to switch over the active OIUa and standby OIUa. APS can be configured on the GOIUA and GOIUB. When the BSC is connected to the optical transmission equipment and the working channel is faulty. GOIUB. MGW. GOIUB. BSC. Prerequisite The principles of and requirements for configuring APS are as follows: l The APS attributes at the local and peer ends must be consistent. APS can improve the stability and maintainability of the entire system. GOIUB. Ltd. and SGSN NOTE l l l l l l l In BM/TC separated and external PCU mode. and GOIUP can be configured to support the APS function. GOIUB. If a fault occurs on the working channel. you must modify the APS attributes. In BM/TC separated mode. If the configured APS attributes at the local and peer ends are inconsistent. In BM/TC combined and built-in PCU mode. and GOIUT.. 34-1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . In BM/TC combined and external PCU mode. APS can be configured on the GOIUB and GOIUP. the APS function is supported by default and cannot be deactivated after the GOIUB/GOIUP/GOIUT is added. APS can be configured on the GOIUA. and GOIUP.

SN=14. If Switch Request is set to Forced Switch or Exercise Switch. l l l l Preparation The following procedure takes the configuration of APS on the GOIUA in BM/TC separated and external PCU mode as an example. Then. set APS command to EXERS(Exercise switch).. For example. APS must be enabled at both ends. Otherwise. run the DSP APS command. NOTE 2. and Slot No. and APS Status is set to SWITCH. of the GOIUA whose APS needs to be verified. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The protection modes at both ends must be consistent. Postrequisite l Verifying APS 1. The BSC supports only the 1+1 protection mode. run the SET APSCMD command. The optical port in SDH mode cannot interconnect with that in SONET mode. The optical fiber must be connected properly. 34-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Set Subrack No. Slot No. of the GOUIA whose APS needs to be verified. run the ADD OIUAPS command to add the APS function. Table 34-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring APS Parameter ID SRN SN Parameter Name Subrack No. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . The protection channel at the local end must be properly connected to that at the peer end. An example script is as follows: /*Configure the APS function*/ ADD OIUAPS: SRN=5. ----End Example In BM/TC separated mode. Otherwise.34 Configuring APS l HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) The interconnected optical ports must be in the same mode. SWITCH_MODE and REVERT_MODE at both ends must be consistent. the protocol switching may be affected. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the GOIUA already exists. it indicates that the APS function is configured successfully. When verifying the APS. Set Subrack No. you are not advised to set APS Command to other switching modes. and Slot No. protocol switching cannot be performed. Ltd. The parameter settings at both ends must be consistent. Example 5 14 Source Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l 34 Configuring APS Deactivating APS – On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. run the RMV OIUAPS command to delete the APS function of the GOIUA. NOTE If you need to reconfigure the APS attributes. run the MOD OIUAPS command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 34-3 . Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

.

NEs Involved MSC. the speech signals on the Abis interface are looped back to the MS without traveling around the NSS. see Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points. l l l l l Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In BM/TC combined mode. DTMF. In addition. the following functions are unavailable after the BTS local switch is enabled: lawful interception. if the calling MS and called MS are under the same BSC. BSC local switching is not supported. In A over IP mode. BSC local switching is configured to save the transmission resources on the Ater interface. Therefore. MSC announcement. BSC local switching may decrease handover success rate or increase call drop rate. and BTS Prerequisite l l The BSC local switching is license-controlled. fax during voice. 35-1 . The BTS local switching function has enabled before the BSC local switching function is activated. Ltd. BSC. BSS local switching is not supported. In addition. If the CN equipment is not provided by Huawei. The SS7 signaling point of the BSC is already configured.. BSC local switching is not supported. and independent charging of the BTS local switch. The license is activated on the Local Maintenance Terminal. in the BSC local switch. For details.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 35 Configuring BSC Local Switching 35 Scenario Impact Configuring BSC Local Switching With this feature. see Activate BSC License. the TC resources involved in the BSC local switch can be released. For details. the speech coding schemes of the calling MS and called MS are the same and thus no coding conversion is required. and thus the speech quality is improved. In Abis over IP mode or Abis over HDLC mode.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l l If the BSC performs BSS local switching independently.35 Configuring BSC Local Switching HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation Table 35-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BSC local switching Data Type DPC attributes Parameter ID IDXTYPE Parameter Name Index Type Example BYDPC(By DPC Code) Source Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g Networ k plannin g DPC DPC Code h'cc BSSLSMSCCO OPSW BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate NOTSUPPORT (Not Support) BSS local switching parameters BssLsGenMode BSS General Strategy BSCONLY(BSC Only) BscLsStartMode Options for BSC Local Switch ATERCONGEST S(Start When Ater Congests) 50 ATERJAMTHR ESHOLD2STAR TLS BSSBSCCLOSE Start Ater Threshold for BSC BSC Close Based on Number NO(No) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the MSC cooperates with the BSC to perform BSS local switching. When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). set BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate to BASIC(Basic) or ENHANCED(Enhanced) and set the related parameters on the MSC side to support the BSS local switching. Ltd. the BSC independently performs BSC local switching. set BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). run the MOD N7DPC command to configure the way of finishing BSS local switching.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) l 35-2 .

In this case. DPC=h'cc. Postrequisite l Verifying BSC local switching – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the DSP CALLRES command to query the call resources of an MS. 2. l l l If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to ATERCONGESTS(Start When Ater Congests). the calls involved in the local switching are restored to normal calls so that the supplementary services can be processed normally. the MSC carries the indication information in the assignment request or incoming BSC handover request message and prohibits the BSC from enabling the local switching. run the MOD BSSLS command to set BSS General Strategy to NEITHERSTART(Neither Start). NOTE If BSC local switching is started successfully.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 35 Configuring BSC Local Switching l When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to BASIC(Basic). In this case. Verify that the information about the Ater interface and TC resources are included in the query result. the BSC cannot process the local switching. BssBscClose=NO. BscLsStartMode=ATERCONGESTS. Ltd. either of the following cases may occur: If the MSC does not allow the BSS local switching. If the MSC allows the BSS local switching. the BSC cannot process the local switching. run the MOD BSSLS command to set BSS General Strategy to BSCPRIORITY(BSC Priority) or BSCONLY(BSC Only) and set Options for BSC Local Switch] and BSC Close Based on Number. /*Configure the parameters related to BSC local switching on the BSC*/ MOD BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BSCONLY. you should set Start Ater Threshold for BSC. If the MSC allows the BSS local switching. If BSC Close Based on Number is set to Yes(Yes). ----End Example An example script for configuring BSC local switching is as follows: /*Set "BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate"*/ MOD N7DPC: IDXTYPE=BYDPC. If Options for BSC Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix Number). When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to ENHANCED(Enhanced). In this case. AterJamThreshold2StartLs=50. the BSC determines whether to enable the local switching. you should set Prefix Number for BSC. In this case. the ongoing supplementary services are interrupted. the MSC carries the indication information in the assignment request or incoming BSC handover request message and prohibits the BSC from enabling the local switching. Ater Interface Information and TC Resource Information is not shown in the result. l Deactivating BSC local switching 1. 35-3 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the BSC determines whether to enable the local switching. The operations for verifying deactivation of BSC local switching are the same as those for verifying BSC local switching. you should set the Avoid Number for BSC . either of the following cases may occur: If the MSC does not allow the BSS local switching. BSSLSMSCCOOPSW=CLOSE.. l Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

.

NEs Involved BTS Prerequisite l BTS local switching is not restricted by the license.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 36 Configuring BTS Local Switching 36 Scenario Impact Configuring BTS Local Switching With this feature. If the CN equipment is not provided by Huawei. if the calling MS and called MS are within the coverage of the same BTS or BTS group. the BTS local switching is not supported. fax during voice. For details. the BTS local switching can be enabled on the lower-level BTSs only. For details. and independent charging of the BTS local switch. In Abis over TDM. If IP transmission mode is adopted on the A interface.. MSC announcement. the license of the BSC local switching is required. The license is activated through the Local Maintenance Terminal. the BTS local switching can be enabled after Flex Abis is enabled (Flex Abis is license-controlled). The BTS local switching and BTS ring topology cannot be enabled at the same time for one BTS. the BSS local switching can be enabled only when both the BTS software and the TRX software support BSS local switching. In Abis over IP. The SS7 signaling point on the BSC is already configured. BTS local switching can save the transmission resources on the Abis and Ater interfaces and reduce the TC processing delay during the call. 36-1 . In Abis over HDLC. see Configuring Local Multiple Signaling Points. the BSC performs the loopback on the cabinet group of the convergent BTS. Ltd. At the sites with hybrid BTS cabinet groups. DTMF. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l l l l l l Preparation Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example. see Activate BSC License. the following functions are unavailable after the BTS local switch is enabled: lawful interception. in addition to the license of the BTS local switching. the BTS local switching is not supported. If the BTS local switching is enabled in the network.

Port No. BTS Description Multiplexing Mode Flex Abis Mode Abis By Pass Mode Service Type Cell Name Cell type Cell MCC Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI Separate Mode Example BTS3012 BTS3012 BSC 0 10 0 TDM BTS3012 MODE4_1 FLEX_ABIS (Flex Abis) FALSE(Not Support) TDM TDMCELL GSM900 460 34 62 98 UNSUPPORT (Not Support) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 36-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Slot No..36 Configuring BTS Local Switching HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Table 36-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS Data Type BTS basic attributes Parameter ID BTSNAME TYPE UPNODE SRN SN PN BTSDESC MPMODE FlexAbisMode AbisByPassMode ServiceMode DCELLNAME DCTYPE DCMCC DCMNC DCLAC DCCI CPLMode Parameter Name BTS Name BTS Type Up Node Type Subrack No. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRX Freq. run the ADD BTS command to set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis). run the MOD BTSLSW command to set Support BTS Local Switch to SUPPORT(Yes). Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Example 0 5 Source Network planning Network planning Table 36-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS local switching Data Type BTS local switching parameters Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX IsSupportBTSLSwitch BSSLSGENMOD E BTSLSSTARTM ODE BSSBTSCLOSE ABISJAMTHRE SHOLD2START LS Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Support BTS Local Switch BSS General Strategy Options for BTS Local Switch BTS Close Based on Number Start Abis Threshold for BTS Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 SUPPORT (Yes) BTSONLY (BTS Only) ABISCONGES TS(Start When Abis Congests) NO(No) 50 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. run the MOD N7DPC command to configure the way of finishing BSS local switching.. enter the MOD FLEXABIS command on the Local Maintenance Terminal and then set Flex Abis Mode to FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) to configure the Flex Abis for the BTS. For details. 36-3 . NOTE If a BTS is already configured. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 36 Configuring BTS Local Switching Data Type Parameter ID TRXBN FREQ Parameter Name TRX Board No. see Configuring Flex Abis.

it is impossible to set Options for BTS Local Switch. l Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the MSC allows the BSS local switching. DCLAC = 62. the BSC cannot process the local switching. ServiceMode = TDM. When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to BASIC(Basic). In this case. DCMCC = "460". In this case. BackType=OUTPEER. SN=1. the BSC independently performs BSC local switching. FlexAbisMode = FLEX_ABIS. BackType=OUTPEER. DPC=h'cc. FREQ = 5. NETSTRUCT=BIT14. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . /*Configure BTS local switching*/ MOD BTSLSW: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. the BSC cannot process the local switching. you should set the Avoid Number for BTS .. BT=GEIUB. When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to ENHANCED(Enhanced). the calls involved in the local switching are restored to normal calls so that the supplementary services can be processed normally. DCMNC = "34". DPCGIDX=1. OPC=h'aa. UPNODE = BSC. DCTYPE = GSM900. If the MSC allows the BSS local switching. CPLMode = UNSUPPORT. BSSLSMSCCOOPSW=CLOSE. the BSC determines whether to enable the local switching. the BSC determines whether to enable the local switching. SRN = 0. DCCI = 98. If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to PREFIXNUMBER(Start by Prefix Number). either of the following cases may occur: If the MSC does not allow the BSS local switching. WorkMode=E1. /*Add a GEIUB*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. BTSIDX=0. run the MOD BSSLS command to set BSS General Strategy to BTSPRIORITY(BTS Priority) or BTSONLY(BTS Only) and set Options for BTS Local Switchand BTS Close Based on Number. DCELLNAME = "TDMCELL". /*Add a GXPUM*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. 36-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. PN = 0. the ongoing supplementary services are interrupted. NI=NATB. you should set Start Abis Threshold for BTS. TYPE = BTS3012. IsSupportBTSLSwitch = SUPPORT. In this case. NOTE For BTSs in IP transmission mode. In this case. l l l If Options for BTS Local Switch is set to ABISCONGESTS(Start When Abis Congests). SN=10. /*Set "BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate"*/ MOD N7DPC: IDXTYPE=BYDPC. SN=10. either of the following cases may occur: If the MSC does not allow the BSS local switching. TRXBN = 0. the MSC carries the indication information in the assignment request or incoming BSC handover request message and prohibits the BSC from enabling the local switching. ----End Example An example script for configuring BTS local switching is as follows: /*Add an OPC*/ ADD OPC: NAME="1". AbisByPassMode = False. MPMODE = MODE4_1. you should set Prefix Number for BTS. /*Add a DPC*/ ADD N7DPC: NAME="2". BTSDESC = "TDM BTS3012". OPC=h'aa. DPC=h'cc. BT=GXPUM. /*Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME = "BTS3012". CNID=0.36 Configuring BTS Local Switching HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l l When BSS Loop Switch MSC Cooperate is set to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). /*Configure subrack-OPC mapping*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=0. Ltd. If BTS Close Based on Number is set to Yes(Yes). the MSC carries the indication information in the assignment request or incoming BSC handover request message and prohibits the BSC from enabling the local switching.

Ltd. 2. Verify that the information about the Ater interface and Abis interface are included in the query result. run the MOD BTSLSW command to set Support BTS Local Switch to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the DSP CALLRES command to query the call resources of an MS. AbisJamThreshold2StartLs=50. BssBtsClose=NO. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BtsLsStartMode=ABISCONGESTS. Postrequisite l Verifying BTS local switching 1. l Deactivating BTS local switching 1. 36-5 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 36 Configuring BTS Local Switching /*Configure the parameters related to BTS local switching on the BSC*/ MOD BSSLS: BssLsGenMode=BTSONLY. Set up a call between two MSs under the same BTS. NOTE If the information about the Ater interface and Abis interface is not contained in the query result.. The operations for verifying deactivation of BTS local switching are the same as those for Verifying BTS local switching. it indicates that the BTS local switching function is enabled successfully. 2.

.

With the dynamic MAIO.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO 37 About This Chapter Configuring Dynamic MAIO Under the BTSs with large capacity.. adjacent-channel or co-channel interference are likely to occur among channels because the frequency resources are insufficient and the tight frequency reuse is adopted. when an MAIO is assigned to a channel under activation.2 Configuring Dynamic MAIO This describes how to configure dynamic MAIO on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.reduces the adjacentchannel and co-channel interference in the GSM system. the requirements for the FH data configuration of the BTS are different. the MAIO value is dynamically adjusted according to the current interference and the MAIO value with the minimum interference is assigned to the channel. 37. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 37-1 . 37.1 Precautions for Configuring Dynamic MAIO This provides the precautions for configuring dynamic MAIO. In different scenarios.

None Impact NEs Involved BTS. Adjacent frequencies exist not in MAs but between the MAs. Adjacent frequencies exist not in MAs but between the MAs. The FH data used by other timeslots is the same. All the channels on timeslot 0 in the BTS use one set of FH data {MA0. HSN1}. Scenario Reduces the adjacent-channel and co-channel interference in the GSM system. HSN0}. the requirements for the FH data configuration of the BTS are different. For better performance of the dynamic MAIO algorithm. Dynamic MAIO cannot be configured for the double-timeslot extension cell. The channels in the same timeslot in a cell must use the same MA during FH. No cell in the BTS is configured with frame offset.1 Precautions for Configuring Dynamic MAIO This provides the precautions for configuring dynamic MAIO. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . The requirements for configuring dynamic MAIO are as follows: l l l l l l Each cell can be configured with up to two different MAs. l 1x1 frequency reuse with BCCH frequencies joining in FH – l 1x3 frequency reuse with BCCH frequencies not joining in FH – – – l 1x3 frequency reuse with BCCH frequencies joining in FH – – – 37. Ltd. All the other timeslots use another set of FH data {MA1. but the number of frequencies in all MAs and the HSN are the same. The FH data used by the cells in the BTS is different. BSC 37-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the FH data configuration of the BTS must meet the following requirements: l 1x1 frequency reuse with BCCH frequencies not joining in FH – All the FH channels in the BTS use the same MA and HSN. achieves the tight frequency reuse within the BTSs and thus improves the system capacity.. The FH data used by the cells in the BTS is different. The value of Flex MAIO Switch must be the same for the cells in the same BTS. but the number of frequencies in all MAs on the same timeslot and the HSN are the same. The MA used by timeslot 0 in the cell is different from the MA used by other timeslots.37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 37.2 Configuring Dynamic MAIO This describes how to configure dynamic MAIO on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In different scenarios. The length of MA used by the same timeslot in a BTS must be the same. The FH data used by all the FH channels in the cell is the same.

Only the CS services support dynamic MAIO assignment. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. configure the cell to be an FH cell. NOTE Dynamic MAIO cannot be configured for the PS services. FLEXMAIO=OPEN. Ltd. CELLIDX=0. run the DSP CALLRES command to query the call resources occupied by a specified MS. Postrequisite l Verifying dynamic MAIO 1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO Prerequisite l During baseband frequency hopping.. 37-3 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .. l Preparation Table 37-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring dynamic MAIO Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX FLEXMAIO HSNSW Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Flex MAIO Switch Flex HSN Switch Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 OPEN(Open) OPEN(Open) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The PS services do not support dynamic MAIO assignment. dynamic MAIO assignment is not supported. including the setting of the parameters TRX No. see 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping. HSNSW=OPEN. ----End Example An example script for configuring dynamic MAIO is as follows: /*Modify the channel management parameters related to Flex MAIO*/ MOD CELLFLEXMAIO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. and Channel No. run the MOD CELLFLEXMAIO command to set Flex MAIO Switch and Flex HSN Switch to OPEN(Open). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Only the function of selecting a channel with the least interference is supported.

3.. If Flex MAIO Switch is set to Close. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 37-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the LST CELLFLEXMAIO command. dynamic MAIO is not enabled.. If MAIO shown in the query result constantly changes. record the query result. run the MOD CELLFLEXMAIO command to set Flex MAIO Switch to CLOSE(Close). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Repeat Step 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Otherwise. Then. it indicates that dynamic MAIO is already enabled. 2. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . run the DSP BTSATTR command to query MAIO according to the obtained values of TRX No. and Channel No. l Deactivating dynamic MAIO 1. it indicates that dynamic MAIO is deactivated.37 Configuring Dynamic MAIO NOTE HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) The dynamic MAIO message of the MS can be traced only when the call is set up and the MS occupies the TCH on the non-BCCH TRX. 2.

Ltd. With antenna hopping. Antenna hopping is configured to optimize the data reception of the MS from the main BCCH TRX and the data transmission of the main BCCH TRX. When a TRX in an antenna hopping group is faulty. the downlink data on each TRX can be randomly transmitted on other TRXs.. Prerequisite l l l Antenna hopping is not restricted by the license. This optimizes the data reception of the MS from the main BCCH TRX and the data transmission of the main BCCH TRX. None NEs Involved BSC. thus improving network performance. One TRX must belong to the baseband MA group and the antenna hopping group with the same group number. When baseband frequency hopping and antenna hopping are applied at the same time. antenna hopping in the antenna hopping group is enabled again. There are at least two TRXs in an antenna hopping group. antenna hopping is disabled in the antenna hopping group upon the automatic notification from the BSC. The BTS must be a double-transceiver BTS. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the faulty TRX recovers. 38-1 . antenna hopping group must share the same TRX with baseband MA group. BTS NOTE l A cell can be configured with multiple antenna hopping groups.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 38 Configuring Antenna Hopping 38 Scenario Impact Configuring Antenna Hopping This describes how to configure antenna hopping. adhere to the following principles: l l l When baseband FH (or hybrid FH) is configured. thus improving network performance.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Ltd. specify the path number of the TRX board. If you use multi-transceiver TRX board..1 TRX Board No.2 TRX Board No. l Deactivating antenna hopping 38-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.1 TRX Board Pass No. TRX1PN=0. ----End Example An example script for configuring antenna hopping is as follows: ADD CELLHOPANTGRP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. TRX2PN=1.38 Configuring Antenna Hopping HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation Table 38-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring antenna hopping Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX HOPTRXHSN TRX1BN TRX1PN TRX2BN TRX2PN Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Hop Trx Group Hsn No. HOPTRXHSN=0. it indicates that antenna hopping is activated.2 TRX Board Pass No. run the LST CELLHOPANT command to view the setting of Cell Hop Ant. No. TRX1BN=0. Example BYIDX 0 0 0 0 0 1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. No. TRX2BN=0. Do not set HSN to 0 because this leads to low quality of interference source diversity. NOTE At least two TRXs should be configured in an antenna hopping group. run the ADD CELLHOPANTGRP command to configure antenna hopping. Postrequisite l Verifying antenna hopping – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. No. If the parameter is set to Yes. CELLIDX=0.

38-3 . Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. run the RMV CELLHOPANTGRP command to delete the antenna hopping group.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) – 38 Configuring Antenna Hopping On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

.

None NEs Involved BTS. VQI is configured to monitor the voice quality.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 39 Configuring Voice Quality Index 39 Scenario Impact Configuring Voice Quality Index The voice quality index (VQI) feature provides a direct method to measure the voice quality of the radio network. run the MOD CELLOTHBASIC command to set Cell Name or Cell Index. 39-1 . which provides a reference for future network optimization. The EMR feature should be supported by the MS. Ltd. ----End Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. By measuring the uplink VQI and downlink VQI. BSC Prerequisite l l The cell is already configured.. the voice quality of the network is quantified. and set Voice quality report switch. Preparation Table 39-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring VQI Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX RPTVOICE Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Voice quality report switch Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 YES(Report) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

A dialog box is displayed. Tracing Mode. CELLIDX=0. On the Trace&Monitor tab page of the BSC6000 Local Maintenance Terminal. 39-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. or Channel of the user to be traced.. Ltd. RPTVOICE=YES. Set the parameters under Interface Type. Then.39 Configuring Voice Quality Index HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Example An example script for configuring VQI is as follows: MOD CELLOTHBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. as shown in Figure 39-2. TMSI. Postrequisite l Verifying voice quality index 1. and Color. MSISDN. The result is displayed. choose Trace > Trace CS Message > Trace User Message. as shown in Figure 39-1. select and enter the IMSI. IMEI. Figure 39-1 Trace User Message dialog box 2. Click OK to start tracing. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.. A dialog box is displayed. Double-click Preprocessed Measurement Result (if the preprocessed measurement result function is not enabled.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 39 Configuring Voice Quality Index Figure 39-2 Result of the user message tracing 3. 39-3 . as shown in Figure 39-3. double-click Measurement Result).

. l Deactivating VQI 1. Verifying the deactivation of VQI: The operations are the same as those for verifying the VQI function.39 Configuring Voice Quality Index HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Figure 39-3 Message Browser window According to the result shown in Figure 39-3. if the tlv-type-vqi field exists. 39-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NOTE When the VQI function is enabled. Verify that the tlv-type-vqi field does not exist. the BTS reports the VQI information once every five measurement report periods. the tlv-type-vqi field exists in the Preprocessed Measurement Result or Measurement Result once every five measurement report periods. 2. Then. set Voice quality report switch to NO(Not report). you can infer that the BTS reports the VQI information. That is. Ltd. run the MOD CELLOTHBASIC command to set Cell Name or Cell Index of the target cell.

the speech signals are received clearly at the peer end. ANR can improve the voice quality when background noise exists. Thus. Preparation Table 40-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ANR Parameter ID SRN SN ANRSWITH Parameter Name Subrack No. the speech signals are received clearly at the peer end. Thus. ANR and TFO cannot be enabled at the same time. Slot No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 40 Configuring ANR 40 Scenario Impact NEs Involved BSC Configuring ANR Automatic noise restraint (ANR) reduces the background noise in the uplink speech signals and improves the signal noise ratio (SNR) and speech intelligibility. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ANR Switch to OPEN(Open). ANR Switch Example 5 0 OPEN(Open) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ANR is configured to reduce the background noise in the uplink speech signals and improve the SNR and speech intelligibility. Ltd. 40-1 .. Prerequisite l l The GDPUC or GDPUX is already configured.

. In the same cell.40 Configuring ANR NOTE HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l l l l If you do not set DSP No. all the DSP TC objects are configured. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST DSPTC command. 2. the greater the noise can be restrained. ANRSWITH=OPEN. Postrequisite l Verifying ANR 1. Use MS 1 to call MS 2 again with a normal voice. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ANR Switch to OPEN(Open).. If ANR Switch is set to Close. In this case. ----End Example An example script for configuring ANR is as follows: /*Configure ANR*/ MOD DSPTC: SRN=5. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . It indicates that ANR is activated. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ANR Switch to CLOSE(Close). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The volume of the background noise decreases. when you hear loud background noise. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it indicates that ANR is deactivated. 2. Other values are invalid and reserved. 5. hang up the phone. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Other values are invalid and reserved. Ltd. l Deactivating ANR 1. 4. run the MOD DSPTC command to set ANR Switch to CLOSE(Close). The greater the value is. use MS 1 to call MS 2 with a normal voice in a noisy environment. ANR Noise Reduction Level[dB] determines the extent to which the noise can be restrained. run the LST DSPTC command to verify that ANR Switch is set to OPEN(Open). ANR Noise Target Level [dB] can be set to only the default value -48dB. 3. SN=0. ANR Mode can be set to only MODE0(Mode 0) at present. 40-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

3 Configuring PSU Smart Control This describes how to configure the PSU smart control. which is also called dynamic voltage adjustment. thus reducing the power consumption and prolonging the operation time and lifetime of the PSU. the voltage of both channels is decreased to reduce the power consumption.1 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown When TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown is enabled.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease About This Chapter This describes how to decrease the power consumption of various BTS parts through the use of a technology to decrease the overall BTS power consumption. Timeslot-level Shutdown of the Power Amplifier. 41. different Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ICB is aimed at decreasing the BTS power consumption when the traffic load is light. That is. 41. the carrier of channel B is shut down in idle hours and the carrier of channel A is configured to work in PBT mode. Intelligent Combiner Bypass. only some TRXs carry the traffic in a cell. PSU Smart Control. Power Optimization Based on Channel Type. Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization. only the required PSUs are switched on and the redundant PSUs are shut down to improve the efficiency of power conversion. Active Backup Power Control. You can enable the TRX to work in ICB mode through configuration. Ltd. Thus. The technologies such as channel assignment algorithm. In the PSU smart control. DTX. The technologies used for intelligent power consumption decrease are as follows: TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown. 41.2 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass This describes how to configure the intelligent combiner bypass (ICB). and the power amplifiers of the TRXs not carrying traffic are shut down.. In ICB.4 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type This describes how to configure the power optimization based on channel type. the power amplifiers of the TRXs whose dynamic power consumption is zero are shut down. and power control also help to decrease the power consumption. 41. 41-1 . Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation and TRX Working Voltage Adjustment. the BTS power consumption is reduced. In the power optimization based on channel type. In addition. ICB is applicable to the dual-transceiver unit.

When the total output power of the power amplifier reduces after the measurement for a period. In actual application. thus reducing the OPEX of the operators. The enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization reduces the BTS power consumption in idle hours by reducing the power of non-BCCHs on the BCCH TRX. Ltd.6 Configuring Active Backup Power Control This describes how to configure the active backup power control.5 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization This describes how to configure the enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization. this feature adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier to a lower value according to the related algorithm. The battery provides a limited capacity. 41. Huawei developed the function of "TRX Working Voltage Adjustment" that enables the intelligent adjustment of the TRX working voltage according to the output power. 41. if the TRX still works under such a high voltage.7 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation This feature monitors the output power of all the carriers within the module. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 41.41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) working voltages are applied to the TRX power amplifier on the basis of the modulation modes of the channels to reduce the BTS power consumption. The BTS uses the configured battery for power supply when the mains failure occurs.. the maximum output power of the TRX is not always required. the BSC shuts down certain TRXs or reduces the maximum transmit power of the TRX to reduce the BTS power consumption. thus reducing the power consumption of the TRX. extra power is consumed because a lower working voltage can also provide the required output power. the power amplifier works with great efficiency after the output power reduces. In this way. This is called active backup power control. To prolong the power supply time of the battery. To reduce the power consumption of the TRX. In this case.8 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment The working voltage of the TRX is always set to a high level to ensure the maximum output power of the TRX. The time segment and degree of the power reduction are configurable. however. 41. 41-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd. NOTE l During a BTS deployment test. The PDCH does not exist. – Impact None NEs Involved BTS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease 41. Scenario – For the BTS main equipment that does not process services. That is. When basband FH is enabled but the main BCCH does not participate in baseband FH. BSC Prerequisite l l Intelligent shutdown of the TRX is restricted by the license. ensure that the TRX meets the following requirements: – – – l The TRX must be the TRX where the non-BCCH is located. the dormant mode is started to reduce the power consumption. the function of intelligent shutdown of TRXs is not supported. Before configuring Dynamic Close TRX Ampier Power switch on the TRX. and the power amplifiers of the TRXs not carrying traffic are shut down. Thus. If the BTS main equipment works normally and processes services. the power amplifiers of the TRXs whose dynamic power consumption is zero are shut down. 41-3 . you need to set the parameter Dynamic Open Trx AmpierPower Switch to NO(No) by running the MOD CELLBASICPARA command. see Activate BSC License. Antenna hopping is disabled. the BTS power consumption is reduced. When the BSC enables intelligent shutdown of the TRX. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the BTS checks only the CS services. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. only some TRXs carry the traffic in a cell. l When the main BCCH participates in baseband FH. For details..1 Configuring TRX Power Amplifier Intelligent Shutdown When TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown is enabled. the TRXs can be shut down only when all the TRXs in the cell (except the main BCCH TRXs) are idle. you can enable intelligent power consumption reduction without affecting the services.

run the SET CELLSOFT command to set Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed to YES(YES). Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRX Board Path No. Ltd. 3. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRX Priority Dynamic Close TRX Ampier Power switch Time Slot Turning Off PA Enable Example YES(Yes) Source Network planning IDXTYPE CELLIDX DYNOpenTrxPo wer BASEHOPCLOS ETRXALLOWE D TRXBN TRXPN OPTL CPS BYIDX(By Index) 0 YES(Yes) Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning YES(Yes) 0 0 L7(Level7) YES(Yes) TsTurningOffEna ble YES(Yes) Procedure l Configure intelligent shutdown of the TRX. run the MOD BSCDSTPA command to set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier by BSC to YES(Yes). 1. 2. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Dynamic Open Trx AmpierPower Switch to YES(Yes). On the Local Maintenance Terminal.41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation Table 41-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring intelligent power consumption reduction Data Type Intelligent shutdown of the TRX Parameter ID BSCDynSwitchTr xPAAllow Parameter Name Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier by BSC Index Type Cell Index Dynamic Open Trx AmpierPower Switch Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed TRX Board No.. 41-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

CPS=YES.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) NOTE 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease Before configuring Dynamic Close TRX Ampier Power switch. ----End Example An example script for configuring intelligent shutdown of the TRX is as follows: /*Modify the parameters related to intelligent shutdown of the TRX*/ MOD BSCDSTPA: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=YES. NOTE l Configure dynamic voltage adjustment. An example script for configuring dynamic voltage adjustment is as follows: /*Set "Adjust Voltage"*/ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. StartMonthDSTPA=JAN. and optimized DTRU. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Dynamic Close TRX Ampier Power switch to YES(YES). The TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown on timeslot level can be controlled by Time Slot Turning Off PA Enable. This function is license-controlled. BTSadjust=YES. StartTimeTACloseTrxPA=00&00. TRXBN=0. (Optional) On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ensure that Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed is set to YES(YES) if the baseband FH is allowed in the cell. 5. 6. EndDayDSTPA=28. (Optional) On some special days such as holidays. run the ADD BSCDSTPADATE command to set the period of prohibiting intelligent shutdown of the TRX. DateRangeIndex=1. In such a case. EndTimeTACloseTrxPA=08&00. TsTurningOffEnable=NO. /*Add the period of prohibiting intelligent shutdown of the TRX*/ ADD BSCDSTPADATE: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=YES. StartMonthDSTPA=FEB. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Adjust Voltage to YES(YES). StartDayDSTPA=1. run the RMV BSCDSTPADATE command to delete the period of prohibiting intelligent shutdown of the TRX. the traffic volume surges. CELLIDX=0. Do as follows: (1) On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DYNOpenTrxPower=YES. 1. EndMonthDSTPA=FEB. 41-5 . do not shut down the power amplifiers of the TRX modules. CELLIDX=0. EndDayDSTPA=28. /*Set "Dynamic Open Trx AmpierPower Switch"*/ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Set "Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed"*/ SET CELLSOFT: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the LST BSCDSTPA command. OPTL=L7. To query the parameter Prohibiting Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Date Range. (2) Run the MOD BSCDSTPA command to set the time when intelligent shutdown of the TRX is enabled and disabled.. TRXPN=0. /*Set "Dynamic Close TRX Ampier Power switch"*/ MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0. CELLIDX=0. StartDayDSTPA=1. 4. BTSadjust=YES. BASEHOPCLOSETRXALLOWED=YES. Ltd. /*Delete the period of prohibiting intelligent shutdown of the TRX*/ RMV BSCDSTPADATE: BSCDynSwitchTrxPAAllow=YES. You can set up to 12 periods. EndMonthDSTPA=JAN. The TRXs supporting the timeslot-level intelligent shutdown of the power amplifier function are DRFU. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. DRRU.

ICB is aimed at decreasing the BTS power consumption when the traffic load is light. the carrier of channel B is shut down in idle hours and the carrier of channel A is configured to work in PBT mode. the cabinet-top power of the TRX is the same as the cabinet-top power provided when the single power amplifier transmits at 60 W or 40 W. Ltd. If the parameter is set to Yes. If the parameter is set to No. run the LST BSCDSTPA command to query the setting of the parameter Time Slot Turning Off PA Enable. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. – Deactivating time slot turning off PA enable 1. the BCCH TRX and non-BCCH TRXs are configured for the same cell. l Time slot turning off PA enable – Verifying time slot turning off PA enable – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. All the non-BCCH TRXs on the double-transceiver unit where the BCCH TRX is located are idle. The cell attribute parameter Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment is set to Yes. run the MOD BSCDSTPA command to set Time Slot Turning Off PA Enable to NO(NO). the voltage of both channels is decreased to reduce the power consumption. the output power of the single power amplifier of the TRX is decreased to 15 W or 10 W. run the LST BSCDSTPA command to query the setting of the parameter Time Slot Turning Off PA Enable. run the MOD BSCDSTPA command to set Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier by BSC to NO(No). 41.41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Postrequisite l TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown – Deactivating TRX power amplifier intelligent shutdown 1. it indicates that the function of timeslot turning off PA is deactivated. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the minimum working voltage is applied to the TRX. You can enable the TRX to work in ICB mode through configuration. ICB is applicable to the dual-transceiver unit. 2. Scenario Impact The function of intelligent combiner bypass reduces the power consumption of the idle TRX that is on the same dual-transceiver unit as the BCCH TRX. the dual-transceiver unit that houses the BCCH TRX starts working in ICB mode and the capacity of the dualtransceiver unit decreases to one TRX.. In ICB.2 Configuring Intelligent Combiner Bypass This describes how to configure the intelligent combiner bypass (ICB). In addition. NEs Involved Prerequisite l l l The intelligent combiner bypass function is not license-controlled. In addition. After the power burst technology (PBT) is enabled on a TRX. it indicates that the function of timeslot turning off PA is activated. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. When the TRX other than the BCCH TRX is idle. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 41-6 .

. ICBALLOW=YES. TRX Priority should be used together with the channel management parameter of the cell Allocation TRX Priority Allowed. Ltd. Postrequisite l Verifying intelligent combiner bypass Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TRX Priority should be used together with the channel management parameter of the cell Allocation TRX Priority Allowed. and optimized DTRU. This is to ensure the preferred double-transceiver TRX board where the BCCH is located enter the ICB mode in the same alternative conditions in idle hours. l ----End Example An example script for configuring the Intelligent Combiner Bypass /*Configuring the Intelligent Combiner Bypass*/ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Power Level of the BCCH TRX is set to 0 or 1. CELLNAME="BTS3900_01". thus reducing the power consumption. The baseband FH and antenna hopping are not configured. l l l l Preparation Table 41-2 Example of Configuring the Intelligent Combiner Bypass Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME ICBALLOW Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name ICB Allowed Example BYNAME(By Name) BTS3900_01 YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The channels can be allocated according to the TRX priorities only when Allocation TRX Priority Allowed is set to Yes through the MOD CELLCHMGAD command. 41-7 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . The TRXs supporting ICB are DRRU. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set ICB Allowed to YES(Yes). The non-BCCH TRX is not configured with PDCHs. thus reducing the power consumption. This is to ensure that the preferred double-transceiver TRX board where the BCCH is located enters the ICB mode in the same alternative conditions in idle hours. To implement the intelligent combiner bypass. run the MOD TRXDEV command to set TRX Priority of the TRX that is on the same double-transceiver unit as the BCCH TRX to a low value. The channels can be allocated according to the TRX priorities only when Allocation TRX Priority Allowed is set to Yes. DRFU. NOTE l To implement the intelligent combiner bypass.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease The ICB is applicable to only the double-transceiver TRXs and must be configured as combining output. set TRX Priorityof the TRX that is on the same double-transceiver unit as the BCCH TRX to a small value.

only parts of the PSUs are used to supply power. 2. Impact NEs Involved BSC. In this manner. If the parameter is set to Yes. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it indicates that intelligent combiner bypass is activated. None. In the PSU smart control. BTS3900. BTS Prerequisite l l The configuration of PSU smart control is license-controlled. the efficiency of power conversion is improved and the lifetime of the PSU is prolonged. The BTS3012AE and BTS3006C/BTS3002E delivered with APM support this function. l Deactivating Intelligent Combiner Bypass 1. and DBS3900 delivered with APM30 support this function. thus reducing the power consumption and prolonging the operation time and lifetime of the PSU.41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease – HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Scenario The redundant PSUs are shut down if the power requirement of the BTS is met. run the LST CELLBASICPARA command to check the setting of the ICB Allowed parameter. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. only the required PSUs are switched on and the redundant PSUs are shut down to improve the efficiency of power conversion. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set ICB Allowed to NO(NO). the BTS3900A. The working mechanism of the PSU smart control is as follows: The main control unit of the BTS in cooperation with the PMU in the power supply system manages the PSU.. see Activate BSC License. Ltd. If the parameter is set to NO. it indicates that intelligent combiner bypass is deactivated. In addition. l Preparation Table 41-3 Example of configuring PSU Smart Control Parameter ID IDXTYPE STNAME PSUTURNINGO FFENABLE Parameter Name Index Type BTS Name PSU Turning Off Enable Example BYNAME(By Name) BTS3900 YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning 41-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 41. run the LST CELLBASICPARA command to check the setting of the ICB Allowed parameter.3 Configuring PSU Smart Control This describes how to configure the PSU smart control. For details. Thus.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to set PSU Turning Off Enable to YES(Yes). ----End

Example
An example script for configuring the PSU Smart Control
/*Configuring the PSU Smart Control*/ MOD BTSOTHPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="BTS3900", PSUTURNINGOFFENABLE=YES;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying PSU smart control

After the function of PSU smart control is enabled, part of the PSUs are automatically disabled at BTSs with low power consumption.

l

Deactivating PSU smart control 1. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to set PSU Turning Off Enable to NO(No). Verifying deactivation of PSU smart control: After the function of PSU smart control is disabled, all the PSUs at BTSs with low power consumption are working properly.

41.4 Configuring Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
This describes how to configure the power optimization based on channel type, which is also called dynamic voltage adjustment. In the power optimization based on channel type, different working voltages are applied to the TRX power amplifier on the basis of the modulation modes of the channels to reduce the BTS power consumption. Scenario In the power optimization based on channel type, different working voltages are applied to the TRX power amplifier on the basis of the modulation modes of the channels to reduce the BTS power consumption. None

Impact

NEs Involved BSC,BTS

Prerequisite
l l l

This function is not license-controlled. This function is supported by 3012 series and 3900 series base stations. This function is not supported by the non-optimized DTRU.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41-9

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Preparation
Table 41-4 Example of the configuring the Power Optimization Based on Channel Type Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME EDGE BTSADJUST PDCHPWRSAV EN Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name EDGE Adjust Voltage PDCH Power Saving Enable Example BYNAME(By Name) BTS3900_01 YES(YES) YES(YES) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLGPRS command to set EDGE to YES(Yes). Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes). Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLSOFT command to set PDCH Power Saving Enable to YES(Yes). ----End

Example
An example script for configuring the Power Optimization Based on Channel Type
/*Configuring the Power Optimization Based on Channel Type*/ SET CELLGPRS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="BTS3900_01", GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu, EDGE=YES; MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="BTS3900_01", BTSadjust=YES; SET CELLSOFT: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="BTS3900_01", DROPCTRLCONNFAILRLFAIL=1, PDCHPWRSAVEN=YES;

Postrequisite
l

Deactivating power optimization based on channel type 1. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Adjust Voltage to NO(No). On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLSOFT command to set PDCH Power Saving Enable to NO(No).

41.5 Configuring Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization
This describes how to configure the enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization. The enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization reduces the BTS power consumption in idle
41-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

hours by reducing the power of non-BCCHs on the BCCH TRX, thus reducing the OPEX of the operators. The time segment and degree of the power reduction are configurable. Scenario Impact Reduce the BTS power consumption in idle hours None

NEs Involved BSC,BTS

Prerequisite
l

The configuration of Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization is licensecontrolled. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details, see Activate BSC License. This function is supported by 3012 series and 3900 series base stations.

l

l

Preparation
Table 41-5 Example of the configuring the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSNAME MAINBCCHPW RDTEN MAINBCCHPWRDTS TIME MAINBCCHPW RDTETIME MAINBCCHPWRDTR ANGE MAINBCCHPWDTAC TCHEN Parameter Name Index Type BTS Name Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Enable BCCH TRX Non-BCCH Timeslot Power Derating Start Time[HH:MM] BCCH TRX Non-BCCH Timeslot Power Derating End Time[HH:MM] Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Range[0.2dB] BCCH TRX Non-BCCH Timeslot Power Derating Enabled Example BYNAME(By Name) BTS3900 YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning

00:00

Network planning

05:00

Network planning

2

Network planning

YES(YES)

Network planning

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to set Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Enable to YES(Yes).Then, configure the time segment and degree of the power reduction.
Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41-11

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease
NOTE

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

l

When the power of the non-BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX is reduced, the MS camping on a neighboring cell may not measure the downlink receive level of the serving cell accurately. This may affect the MS handover from the neighboring cell to the serving cell. Therefore, be careful when you enable the function of enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization. When Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Enable is set to YES(YES) and the current time is between Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Start Time and Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating End Time, the BTS decreases the transmit power of idle channels on the non-BCCH timeslots of the BCCH TRX. The power decrease degree is controlled by Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Range When Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Active Channel Enable is set to YES (YES), the BTS performs power decrease on the occupied channels on the BCCH TRX. If the power control is performed on the occupied channels and the decreased power is smaller than Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Range, adopt Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Range to transmit signals. Otherwise, adopt the power required for the channel power control to transmit signals.

l

l

----End

Result Example
An example script for configuring the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization
/*Configuring the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization*/ MOD CELLOTHEXT: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, CELLNAME="BTS3900_01", MAINBCCHPWRDTEN=YES, MAINBCCHPWRDTSTIME=00&00, MAINBCCHPWRDTETIME=05&00, MAINBCCHPWRDTRANGE=2, MAINBCCHPWDTACTCHEN=YES;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the LST CELLOTHEXT command to query the setting of Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Enable. If the parameter is set to YES(Yes), it indicates that the function of enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization is activated. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to set Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Enable to NO(No). On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the LST CELLOTHEXT command to query the setting of Main BCCH Trx Non-Bcch Time Slot Power Derating Enable. If the parameter is set to NO(No), it indicates that the function of enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization is deactivated.

l

Deactivating enhanced BCCH power consumption optimization 1. 2.

41.6 Configuring Active Backup Power Control
This describes how to configure the active backup power control. The BTS uses the configured battery for power supply when the mains failure occurs. The battery provides a limited capacity. To prolong the power supply time of the battery, the BSC shuts down certain TRXs or reduces the maximum transmit power of the TRX to reduce the BTS power consumption. This is called active backup power control.
41-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

Scenario

When the mains failure occurs, the BSC shuts down certain TRXs or reduces the maximum transmit power of the TRX to reduce the BTS power consumption, thus prolonging the power supply time of the battery. None

Impact

NEs Involved BSC, BTS

Prerequisite
l l

The configuration of Active Backup Power Control is license-controlled. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details, see Activate BSC License. The BTS is configured with the PMU. This function is supported by 3012, 3012II, 3012III and 3900 series base stations.

l l

Preparation
Table 41-6 Example of the configuring the Active Backup Power Control Parameter ID IDXTYPE STNAME BAKPWRSAVM ETHOD BAKPWRSAVP OLICY DROPPWRSTA RTTIME SHUTDOWNTR XSTARTTIME DROPPWRINTE RVAL DROPPWRSTEP MAXDROPPWR THRESHOLD Parameter Name Index Type BTS Name Backup Power Saving Method Backup Power Saving Policy Drop Power Start Time [T1][hour] Shutdown Trx Start Time [T2][hour] Drop Power Time Interval [T3][min] Drop Power Step [dB] Max Drop Power Threshold[dB] Example BYNAME(By Name) BTS3900 BYPWR(Reduce Power) BYSAVING(Backup Power Preferred) 2 3 5 2 10 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD BTSBAKPWR command to set Backup Power Saving Method to BYPWR(Reduce Power).Then, set the following parameters: Drop Power Start Time(T1)(H), Shutdown Trx Start Time(T2)(H), Drop Power Time Interval (T3)(M), Drop Power Step(db), and Max Drop Power Threshold(db).
Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41-13

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease
NOTE

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

When Backup Power Saving Method is set to BYTRX(Turn off Trx), the BSC shuts down the TRXs whose Shut Down Enabled is set to ENABLE(Enable) after the BTS is powered off. The Shut Down Enabled parameter can be set by running the MOD TRXDEVcommand.

----End

Example
An example script for configuring the Active Backup Power Control
/*Configuring the Active Backup Power Control*/ MOD BTSBAKPWR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, STNAME="BTS3900", BAKPWRSAVMETHOD=BYPWR, BAKPWRSAVPOLICY=BYSAVING, DROPPWRSTARTTIME=2, SHUTDOWNTRXSTARTTIME=3, DROPPWRINTERVAL=5, DROPPWRSTEP=2, MAXDROPPWRTHRESHOLD=10;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying active backup power control 1. Turn off the mains power supply switch of the BTS. Then, part of the TRXs are automatically shut down under the control of the timer. In addition, the transmit power of the TRXs is reduced in certain steps. Turn on the mains power supply switch of the BTS. Verify that the shut-down TRXs are automatically started up, and all the TRXs normally transmit power. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD TRXDEV command to set Shut Down Enabled to DISABLE(Disable). Verifying deactivation of active backup power control: Turn off the mains power supply switch of the BTS. Then, the BSC shuts down all the TRXs that can be shut down under the BTS. The power of the remaining TRXs does not change. Then, turn on the mains power supply switch of the BTS, and verify that the BTS automatically starts up all the shut-down TRXs.

2.
l

Deactivating active backup power control 1. 2.

41.7 Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation
This feature monitors the output power of all the carriers within the module. When the total output power of the power amplifier reduces after the measurement for a period, this feature adjusts the working voltage of the power amplifier to a lower value according to the related algorithm. In this way, the power amplifier works with great efficiency after the output power reduces, thus reducing the power consumption of the TRX. Scenario The working voltage of the power amplifier of the multi-carrier is adjusted on the basis of the output power of the power amplifier. Thus, the working efficiency of the power amplifier is improved and the power consumption of the BTS is reduced. None

Impact

NEs Involved BSC, BTS

41-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

Prerequisite
l l

The configuration of PSU smart control is license-controlled. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details, see Activate BSC License. The multi-carrier intelligent voltage adjustment is supported by 3900 series base stations. The TRXs supporting this function are GRRU and GRFU. The cell attribute parameter Adjust Voltage is set to YES(YES).

l

l

Preparation
Table 41-7 Example of the configuring the Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation Parameter ID IDXTYPE STNAME PAADJVOL Parameter Name Index Type BTS Name PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage Example BYNAME(By Name) BTS3900 YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to set PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes). ----End

Example
An example script for configuring the Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation
/*Configuring Multi-Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation*/ MOD BTSOTHPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME, BTSNAME="BTS3900", PAADJVOL=YES;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying multi-carrier intelligent voltage regulation

On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the LST BTSOTHPARA command. Check the setting of PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage. If the parameter is set to YES, it indicates that the function of multi-carrier intelligent voltage regulation is activated. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to set PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage to NO(No). On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the LST BTSOTHPARA command to check the setting of PA Intelligent Adjust Voltage. If the parameter is set to NO, it indicates that the function of multi-carrier intelligent voltage regulation is deactivated.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 41-15

l

Deactivating multi-carrier intelligent voltage regulation 1. 2.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

41.8 Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment
The working voltage of the TRX is always set to a high level to ensure the maximum output power of the TRX. In actual application, however, the maximum output power of the TRX is not always required. In this case, if the TRX still works under such a high voltage, extra power is consumed because a lower working voltage can also provide the required output power. To reduce the power consumption of the TRX, Huawei developed the function of "TRX Working Voltage Adjustment" that enables the intelligent adjustment of the TRX working voltage according to the output power. Scenario Adjustment of the TRX working voltage according to the output power. Hence, to lower the TRX power consumption, the TRX should work under a suitable voltage to ensure an efficient output power. None

Impact

NEs Involved BSC and BTS

Prerequisite
l

This function is supported by the optimized TRX modules of the BTS3012 series base stations. This function is supported by the TRX modules of all the BTS3900 series base stations.

l

Preparation
Table 41-8 Example of the TRX Working Voltage Adjustment Data Type Cell Attributes Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME BTSADJUST Device Attributes TRXBN POWL POWT Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Adjust Voltage TRX Board No. Power Level Power Type Example BYNAME(By Name) BTS3900_01 YES(YES) 0 1 45W(45W) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Adjust Voltage to YES(Yes). ----End
41-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

it indicates that the function of TRX working voltage adjustment is deactivated. 41-17 . On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l Verifying TRX working voltage adjustment – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. If the parameter is set to No. POWT=45W. CELLNAME="BTS3900_01".HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 41 Intelligent Power Consumption Decrease Example An example script for configuring the TRX Working Voltage Adjustment /*Configuring TRX Working Voltage Adjustment*/ /*Configuring Cell Attributes */ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. POWL=1. run the LST CELLBASICPARA command to check the setting of Adjust Voltage. Ltd. /*Configuring Device Attributes*/ MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. If the parameter is set to YES. l Deactivating TRX working voltage adjustment 1. it indicates that the function of TRX working voltage adjustment is activated.. BTSadjust=YES. TRXBN=0. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Adjust Voltage to NO(No). run the LST CELLBASICPARA command to check the setting of Adjust Voltage. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CELLNAME="BTS3900_01". On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

.

Therefore. It increases the reusability of BCCH frequencies and reduces the number of frequencies used by the BCCHs. an MS may be handed over from the non-BCCH TRX to the BCCH TRX if the load of a cell increases.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse 42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse The tight BCCH frequency reuse technology is applicable to the network with insufficient frequency resources. thus improving frequency reuse rate and increasing the system capacity. 42-1 . Preparation Take the configuration of BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode as an example. more frequencies can be used at the FH layer. thus improving the system capacity. The GXPUM and Abis interface board are configured on the GMPS or GEPS. When the function of tight BCCH frequency reuse is enabled. Table 42-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a BTS Data Type BTS basic attributes Parameter ID BTSNAME Parameter Name BTS Name Example BTS3012 Source Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Scenario Tight BCCH frequency reuse is configured in the network with insufficient frequency resources. This increases the number of handovers in the network. and there is idle port on the Abis interface board. Concentric cell and multiband networks do not support tight BCCH frequency reuse. Impact NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l l Tight BCCH frequency reuse is not restricted by the license..

Port No. BTS Description Multiplexing Mode Flex Abis Mode Abis By Pass Mode Service Type Cell Name Cell type Cell MCC Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI Separate Mode TRX Board No. Slot No. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID TYPE UPNODE SRN SN PN BTSDESC MPMODE FlexAbisMod e AbisByPass Mode ServiceMode DCELLNAM E DCTYPE DCMCC DCMNC DCLAC DCCI CPLMode TRXBN Parameter Name BTS Type Up Node Type Subrack No.. Ltd. Example BTS3012 BSC 0 26 0 TDM BTS3012 MODE4_1 FLEX_ABIS(Flex Abis) FALSE(Not Support) TDM TDMCELL GSM900 460 01 8240 1 UNSUPPORT(Not Support) 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 42-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

run the ADD BTS command to add a BTS. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH Quality Thresh. Example 988 Source Network planning Table 42-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring tight BCCH frequency reuse Data Type Channel management parameters of the cell Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX TIGHTBCCHSWI TCH Advanced channel management parameters of the cell TIGHTBCCHASSMAINBCCHLEV Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index TIGHT BCCH Switch Level Thresh.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse Data Type Parameter ID FREQ Parameter Name TRX Freq. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH HO Control Switch Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 YES(YES) 30 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning TIGHTBCCHASSMAINBCCHQUA L 1 Network planning Cell handover parameters HOCTRLSWITCH HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) 3 3 3 Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning TIGHTBCCHHOS TATTIME TIGHTBCCHHOL ASTTIME Cell handover advanced parameters TIGHTBCCHRXQUALTHRES TIGHTBCCHHOLOADTHRES TIGHT BCCH HO Watch Time[s] TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time[s] RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO 80 Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. 42-3 ..

run the SET CELLHOAD command to set TIGHT Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO to 100. DCMCC="460". BTSDESC = "TDM BTS3012". TIGHTBCCHASSMAINBCCHLEV=30. Ltd. 2. DCCI=1. MPMODE = MODE4_1. If TIGHT BCCH Switch is set to NO. CELLIDX=0. FREQ=988. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH to 0. DCMNC="01". run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command to set Level Thresh. CELLIDX=0. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set TIGHT BCCH Switch to YES(YES). DCTYPE=GSM900. UPNODE = BSC. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET CELLHOAD command to set RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and TIGHT Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. AbisByPassMode=False. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRXBN=0. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set HO Control Switch. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script for configuring tight BCCH frequency reuse for the BTS3012 in TDM transmission mode is as follows: /*Add a BTS3012*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME= "BTS3012". Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 42-4 . TIGHTBCCHHOLASTTIME=2. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH and Quality Thresh. CELLIDX=0. and TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time [s]. 3. /*Set advanced handover parameters of the cell*/ SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command to set Level Thresh. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. Use the MS to initiate a call in the cell.42 Configuring Tight BCCH Frequency Reuse HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST CELLCHMGBASIC command. TIGHTBCCHHOLOADTHRES=80. TIGHTBCCHASSMAINBCCHQUAL=1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Set basic handover parameters of the cell*/ SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. TYPE = BTS3012. /*Set basic channel management parameters of the cell*/ SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. it indicates that the function of tight BCCH frequency reuse is deactivated. SN=26. CELLIDX=0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. PN=0. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH to 63 and Quality Thresh. TIGHTBCCHSWITCH=YES. TIGHT BCCH HO Watch Time[s]. 2. Postrequisite l Verifying tight BCCH frequency reuse 1. FlexAbisMode=FLEX_ABIS. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set TIGHT BCCH Switch to NO(No). Verify that the call is successfully set up. SRN = 0. l Deactivating tight BCCH frequency reuse 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ServiceMode=TDM. DCLAC=8240. TIGHTBCCHRXQUALTHRES=3. /*Modify advanced channel management parameters of the cell*/ (MOD CELLCHMGAD)MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.. TIGHTBCCHHOSTATTIME=3. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DCELLNAME="TDMCELL". Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP 43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP This describes how to configuring Inter-BSC signaling links on the current BSC and external BSC on the Local Maintenance Terminal. By setting the parameters of the current BSC and external BSC. The configuration of the current BSC is the same as that of the external BSC. 43-1 . If Abis over IP or A over IP is not adopted. the IP interface boards of two BSCs can be connected through the switches. you can finish the configuration of the inter-BSC signaling links. Ltd. Take the configuration of the current BSC216 as an example negotiated and planned as follows: Table 43-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for Configuring Inter-BSC Signaling Links Data Type Board attributes Parameter ID SRN SN Parameter Subrack No. Preparation Assume that the name of the current BSC is BSC216 and that of the external BSC is BSC217. a pair of IP interface boards need to be added to each BSC. Slot No. Example 0 24 Source Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Scenario Impact the scenarios of inter-BSC information exchange None NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite If Abis over IP or A over IP is adopted.

255.. 255 2.10. 0 10.2. IP address index IP address Subnet mask IP address Subnet mask Gateway IP address Local Entity Name OPC Code Routing Context Destination Entity No. Ltd.2. 0 0 0 2.10.255.217 255.1 BSC216 h'a1 4294967290 98 BSC217 h'b1 4294967290 143 1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning MU3A attributes M3UA local entity NAME OPC RTCONTE XT M3UA destination entity DENO NAME DPC RTCONTE XT SSN CNID 43-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.255.2.10.2.2 255.10. Destination Entity Name DPC Code Routing Context Subsystem Number Network Element ID Example 10.255.43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type IP attributes Device IP address Parameter ID IPADDR MASK Port IP address PORT IPINDEX IPADDR MASK BSC route IPADDR MASK GATEWAY Parameter IP address Subnet mask Port No.255. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .216 255.255.

that is.216 10. Ltd. the IP address of the GFGUB port on the external BSC.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP Data Type M3UA link set Parameter ID SIGLKSID X NAME Parameter Signalling Link Set Index Signalling Link Set Name Adjacent Destination Entity No. run the command ADD DEVIP to add the device IP address.10.. The gateway address is the IP address of the peer board. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.10. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC.10. Local Port No. Destination Port No. run the command LST ITFIPTYPE to query the communication type of the Abis interface. run the command ADD PHYPORTIP to add the port IP address. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC. 43-3 . First Local IP Address First Destination IP Address Example 1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning T0217 DENO 98 M3UA route DENO SIGLKSID X 98 1 M3UA link SIGLKSID X SRN LOCPN PEERPN LOCIP1 PEERIP1 1 0 1 45 10.217 Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC. run the command ADD IPRT to add the IP address. Destination Entity No.10. Signalling Link Set Index Signalling link set index Subrack No.

MASK="255.10. NAME="BSC217". /*Add M3UA link*/ ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSIDX=1. /*Add device IP address of the current BSC*/ ADD DEVIP: SRN=0.. Step 10 Repeat Step 1 through Step 9 on the Local Maintenance Terminal of the external BSC to configure links of the external BSC.255".10. SN=24. ----End Example The example script for configuring the current BSC is as follows: /*Confirm the transmission mode on the Gb interface*/ LST ITFIPTYPE:.0".2. SIGLKSIDX=1. /*Add port IP address of the current BSC*/ ADD PHYPORTIP: SRN=0.10.10. run the command ADD M3LE to add the M3UA local entity.217".10.217". 43-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the command ADD M3DE to add the M3UA destination entity. IPADDR="2. SSN=143. MASK="255. PEERPN=45. RTCONTEXT=0. NAME="T0217". /*Add M3UA destination entity*/ ADD M3DE: DENO=98.255. GATEWAY="2. RTCONTEXT=0. PORT=1.10. DENO=98. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC.43 Configuring Connection Inter BSC over IP HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC.10. Step 9 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC.10.255. Step 7 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC.1". Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . LOCIP1="10. run the command ADD M3RT to add the M3UA router. /*Add M3UA route*/ ADD M3RT: DENO=98. Step 8 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the current BSC. NETSTRUCT=BIT14. /*Add IP route of the current BSC*/ ADD IPRT: SRN=0.255.255.0". run the command ADD M3LKS to add the M3UA link set.2". Ltd. run the command ADD M3LNK to add the M3UA link.216".2.255. PEERIP1="10. SN=24. SRN=0. IPADDR="10.2. OPC=h'a1. /*Add M3UA local entity*/ ADD M3LE: NAME="BSC216". /*Add M3UA link set*/ ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSIDX=1. CNID=1. MASK="255.255. IPADDR="10. SN=24.216".2. LOCPN=1. DPC=h'b1.

44-1 – – – Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . With this feature.. That is. Ltd. To obtain and activate the license. The BTSs operating at 900 MHz are grouped together for synchronization. Prerequisite The license is obtained and activated. For details. see Activate BSC License You can configure parameters related to Soft-Synchronized Network only by running MML commands on the local maintenance terminal. dynamic frequency allocation and dynamic channel assignment can be adopted to minimize inter-cell co-channel and adjacent-channel collision. do as follows: l l The license is required for the implementation of Soft-Synchronized Network. The distance between BTSs should be shorter than 900 m. A distance of shorter than 800 m is recommended. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The network using the Soft-Synchronized Network technology should be planned in an continuous coverage area.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task About This Chapter The Soft-Synchronized Network feature realizes the synchronization through software. under a BSC. timeslot number. To make best use of the Soft-Synchronized Network technology. and bit offset in the timeslot to be the same through software. In a synchronous network. This greatly improves the frequency usage and increases the network capacity. the continuous coverage area can be regarded as a to-be-synchronized area. and the BTSs operating at 1800 MHz are grouped together for synchronization. all the BTSs under one BSC synchronize with each other by adjusting the frame number. When the Soft-Synchronized Network technology is used in dual-band networks. comply with the following rules: – l l The Soft-Synchronized Network technology is applicable to the tight frequency reuse scenario. the networks operating at different bands should be separated for synchronization. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

lower-level BSC. If the drive test result shows that the offset between the synchronized BTSs is great.44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task – HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) If concentric cells exist in a network. The concepts consist of reference BSC. Ltd. If BTSs with GPS antennas exist in the network. it is recommended that you set these BTSs as reference BTSs to shorten the synchronization time of the entire network. collect synchronization information of underlaid subcells.7 Collecting the Offset Information Between BTSs This describes how to collect the offset information between BTSs on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 44. 44. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .9 Deleting a Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to delete a soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal.4 Verifying an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to verify an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal. The collected offset information provides a basis for adjusting the BTS clock. 44. 44. the BTS offset information is collected and the offset time is adjusted automatically to synchronize the BTSs. – 44. a pair of neighboring cells are automatically generated by the program according to the rules. 44. you can reconfigure the neighboring cells as required. 44-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. you can manually synchronize the BTSs on the Local Maintenance Terminal.2 Creating an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to create an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal.5 Creating an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to create an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC and collaborating BSC. 44.3 Configuring a Pair of Neighboring Cells of Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task In an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task. and collaborating BSC. Collecting the offset information between BTSs consists of collecting the intra-BSC and inter-BSC offset information between BTSs. If the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements. controlling BSC. 44.6 Verifying an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to verify the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal.1 Concepts Related to the Soft-Synchronized Network This describes the concepts related to the soft-synchronized network.8 Synchronizing BTSs After a soft-synchronized network task is created.. 44. This operation is optional as required.

44-3 l l Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Therefore. The soft-synchronized network must work with other technologies such as network planning or IBCA. 44. and antenna azimuth of each cell should be configured.2 Creating an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to create an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal. controlling BSC. the reference BSC is the controlling BSC whereas BSC A is the collaborating BSC. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The concepts consist of reference BSC. the conversion from an asynchronous network to a synchronous network can effectively reduce the interference on the entire network and expand the network capacity. NOTE l l l Controlling BSC and collaborating BSC are relative concepts. lower-level BSC. BTS. the BTSs should support the soft-synchronized network. it is referred to as the reference BSC.. Controlling BSC: The BSC that initiates the offset information collection between BSCs and plays a controlling role in the soft-synchronized network task is called a controlling BSC. Lower-level BSC: The inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task is implemented in hierarchical mode. then BSC A is a lowerlevel BSC relative to BSC B. latitude.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task 44. Scenario The soft-synchronized network is applicable to the scenario of tight frequency reuse. If BSC A is located in a lower level than BSC B. Each BTS should be configured with at least two cells. In addition. If the soft-synchronized network task is implemented between BSC A and reference BSC. the longitude. Collaborating BSC: The BSC that collaborates with the controlling BSC during the softsynchronized network task is referred to as a collaborating BSC. Impact NEs Involved MS. In addition. Ltd. If the soft-synchronized network task is implemented between BSC A and a lower-level BSC B. In addition. and collaborating BSC. and BSC Prerequisite l Each BSC should be configured with at least two BTSs.1 Concepts Related to the Soft-Synchronized Network This describes the concepts related to the soft-synchronized network. then BSC A is the controlling BSC whereas BSC B is the collaborating BSC. l Reference BSC: The inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task is implemented in hierarchical mode. The BTSs must be configured with the same SiteSyncZone. The gain of the radio-related KPIs can be greatly improved. The BSC located in the center of the coverage area of the BSCs is taken as the starting point of the hierarchical synchronization.

Ltd. 2 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 44-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an intra-BSC softsynchronized network task Parameter ID TASKIDX GATHON Parameter Name Aiss Task Index Offset Information Collection Switch Offset Time Adjustment Switch Reference BTS Index Reinitialize Neighboring Cell List Support BSC AISS Example 0 ON(ON) Source Network planning Network planning ADTON ON(ON) Network planning BASEBTSIDX REINITTBL 1. Table 44-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS synchronization zone Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX SYMOFFSET SITESYNCZONE Parameter Name Index Type BTS index SymOffset SiteSyncZone Example BYIDX(By Index) 1.44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation The following operation creates the soft-synchronized network task (Aiss Task Index = 0). Assume that this soft-synchronized network task is implemented between two BTSs.. Set the same SiteSyncZone for the BTSs that participate in the soft-synchronized network task. 2 YES(YES) Network planning Network planning ISSPTBSCAISS NO(NO) Network planning Procedure Step 1 Run the SET BTSAISS command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 44-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

This parameter determines the value of Frame Offset [frame No. a pair of neighboring cells are automatically generated by the program according to the rules. REINITTBL=YES. BASEBTSIDX=1. and should be set as required. NOTE After the Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch are turned on. REINITTBL=YES. SYMOFFSET=0.8 Synchronizing BTSs. SITESYNCZONE=0. you must add the pair of neighboring cells starting from the reference BTS. and set Support BSC AISS to NO(NO) to create an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task.3 Configuring a Pair of Neighboring Cells of Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task In an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task. see 44. You can run the DSP NCELLTBL command to query the neighboring cell list composed of the cells and BTSs that serve the cells. Choose the BTSs that support the soft-synchronized network. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In general. If the neighboring cells do not meet the measurement requirements. BTSIDX=2. If the cell is a concentric cell.]. /*Create an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task*/ ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0. the overlaid cell and underlaid cell must be in the same frequency band. ISSPTBSCAISS=NO. the default value is retained. ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0. SITESYNCZONE=0. SET BTSAISS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. ADTON=ON. 44-5 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . NOTE The BTSs that serve the configured cells should support soft-synchronized network. Prerequisite l l l The intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task is created successfully. To manually collect the offset information and adjust the offset time.. The two added cells must be in the same frequency band.7 Collecting the Offset Information Between BTSs and 44. GATHON=ON. GATHON=ON. the BTS offset information are collected and the offset time are adjusted automatically to finish the softsynchronized network task. SYMOFFSET=0. set Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch to ON(ON). If the neighboring cell list is empty. The BTS that serves the first cell in the pair of neighboring cells should be in the neighboring cell list of the softsynchronized network task. BASEBTSIDX=2. BTSIDX=1. ----End Example An example script of creating the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task is as follows: /*Set the BTS synchronization zone*/ SET BTSAISS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ADTON=ON. run the ADD AISSCFG command. ISSPTBSCAISS=NO. 44. The neighboring cell relations between the pair of neighboring cells are configured. Then. Ltd. SymOffset is an optional parameter.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) NOTE 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task Set the same SiteSyncZone for the BTSs numbered 1 and 2. you can reconfigure the neighboring cells as required.

SCELLIDX=10. reconfigure the neighboring cell list as follows: Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. you need to set Delete BTS In the Neighboring Cell List to Yes.44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation Table 44-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an intra-BSC softsynchronized network task Parameter ID TASKIDX BYCELLTYPE SCELLIDX MCELLIDX Parameter Name Aiss Task Index Cell Index Type First Cell Index Second Cell Index Example 0 BYIDX(By Index) 10 15 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script of configuring the neighboring cells for an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task is as follows: /*Check whether the neighboring cell list meets the requirements of the actual measurement*/ DSP NCELLTBL: TASKIDX=0. NOTE If the BTS is also deleted. Ltd. 44-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BYCELLTYPE=BYIDX. the BTS cannot be deleted even if Delete BTS In the Neighboring Cell List is set to YES(YES). l l The BTS can be deleted only when there are no neighboring cells in the BTS. MCELLIDX=15. SCELLIDX=10. An example script is as follows: TASKIDX=0.. MCELLIDX=15. Postrequisite Run the DEL NCELL command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to delete the optimal pair of neighboring cells. If there are neighboring cells in the BTS. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . /*Add the optimal pair of neighboring cells*/ ADD NCELL: TASKIDX=0. DELSITE=YES. run the DSP NCELLTBL command to check whether the neighboring cell list meets the actual measurement requirements. If the neighboring cell list does not meet the requirements of the actual measurement. run the ADD NCELL command to add an optimal pair of neighboring cells. BYCELLTYPE=BYIDX.

the BTSs should support the soft-synchronized network. Check whether Aiss Task Index added in the procedure of 44. the conversion from an asynchronous network to a synchronous network can effectively reduce the interference on the entire network and expand the network capacity. the longitude. latitude. For details. The BTSs must be configured with the same SiteSyncZone.4 Verifying an Intra-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to verify an intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal.2 Creating an Intra-BSC SoftSynchronized Network Task exists. In addition. see Connection Inter BSC over IP.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task 44. In addition. Scenario The soft-synchronized network is applicable to the scenario of tight frequency reuse. BTS. The gain of the radio-related KPIs can be greatly improved.. The communication links between the BSCs are configured and work normally. ----End 44. Each BSC should be configured with at least two BTSs. NOTE If you do not set Aiss Task Index. the detailed information about all the soft-synchronized network tasks are queried. the task of creating the soft-synchronized network task is successful. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 44-7 . and antenna azimuth of each cell should be configured.5 Creating an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to create an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC and collaborating BSC. If it exists. Impact NEs Involved MS. In addition. run the LST AISSCFG command to query the information about the soft-synchronized network task. l l l Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Each BTS should be configured with at least two cells. The soft-synchronized network must work with other technologies such as network planning or IBCA. Ltd. and BSC Prerequisite l l The inter-BSC link is configured and the communication is normal.

Ltd.2 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Assume that BTS 1 under the controlling BSC216 and BTS 2 under the collaborating BSC217 support soft-synchronized network. Assume that this soft-synchronized network task is implemented between two BTSs. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Table 44-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS synchronization zone Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX SYMOFFSET SITESYNCZONE Parameter Name Index type BTS index SymOffset SiteSyncZone Example BYIDX(By Index) 1..44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation The following operation creates the soft-synchronized network task (Aiss Task Index = 0). Table 44-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for creating an inter-BSC softsynchronized network Data Type Controlli ng BSC216 paramet ers Parameter ID TASKIDX GATHON Parameter Name Aiss Task Index Offset Information Collection Switch Offset Time Adjustment Switch Reference BTS Index Reinitialize Neighboring Cell List Support BSC AISS Base BSC Example 0 ON(ON) Source Network planning Network planning ADTON ON(ON) Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning BASEBTSIDX REINITTBL 1 YES(YES) ISSPTBSCAISS ISBASICBSC YES(YES) YES(YES) 44-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Ltd.. 44-9 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task Data Type Collabor ating BSC217 paramet ers Parameter ID TASKIDX GATHON Parameter Name Aiss Task Index Offset Information Collection Switch Offset Time Adjustment Switch Reference BTS Index Reinitialize Neighboring Cell List Support BSC AISS Base BSC Controlling BSC DPC Example 0 ON(ON) Source Network planning Network planning ADTON ON(ON) Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning BASEBTSIDX REINITTBL 2 YES(YES) ISSPTBSCAISS ISBASICBSC CTRBSCDPC YES(YES) NO h'a1 Table 44-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that creates the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task Data Type 2G external cell configur ation Parameter ID CELLIDX CELLNAME MCC MNC LAC CI Parameter Name Cell Index Cell Name Cell MCC Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI Example 2048 D 460 01 8240 1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

run the ADD AISSCFG command to create a soft-synchronized network task.]. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .. and should be set as required. In general. NOTE Set the same SiteSyncZone for the BTSs numbered as 1 and 2. Set Support BSC AISS and Base BSC to Yes. Set Base BSC to No. and specify Controlling BSC DPC. SymOffset is an optional parameter. 44-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the ADD AISSCFG command to create a soft-synchronized network task. This parameter determines the value of Frame Offset [frame No. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC216. Ltd. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the collaborating BSC217. Set the same SiteSyncZone for the BTSs that participate in the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task.44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID BCCH NCC BCC Parameter Name BCCH FD NCC BCC Index type Source Cell Index Neighbor Cell Index Current HO Control Algorithm in Source Cell Index type BSC inner Cell index Adjacent BSC DPC BSC adjacent Cell index Example 988 1 1 BYIDX(By Index) 0 2048 HOALGORIT HM1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 2G unidirect ional neighbor ing cell configur ation IDXTYPE SRCCELLIDX NBRCELLIDX HOCTRLSWITCH Neighbo ring cell pair configur ation IDXTYPE INNCELLIDX ADJBSCDPC EXTADJCELLIDX BYIDX(By Index) 0 h'a3 2048 Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 Run the SET BTSAISS command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the default value is selected.

run the ADD CELL2GEXTC command to add a 2G external cell. EXTADJCELLIDX=2055. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. GATHON=ON. LAC=8240. REINITTBL=YES. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. MCC="460". NOTE Configure cell D under the BSC217 as an external cell under the BSC216.. BCCH=988. run the ADD CELL2GNC command to add a 2G unidirectional neighboring cell and configure cell D as the neighboring cell of cell C. ADTON=ON. BTSIDX=1. To manually collect the offset information and adjust the offset time. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC216.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) NOTE 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task After the Offset Information Collection Switch and Offset Time Adjustment Switch are set to ON (ON). /*Add a pair of neighboring cells*/ ADD EXTNCELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Ltd. BASEBTSIDX=1. 44. SET BTSAISS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.8 Synchronizing BTSs. BASEBTSIDX=2. REINITTBL=YES. /*Add a 2G external cell*/ ADD CELL2GEXTC: CELLIDX=2048. MNC="01". INNCELLIDX=0. CTRBSCDPC=h'a1. NBRCELLIDX=2048. SRCCELLIDX=0. ISSPTBSCAISS=YES. Set Cell Index according to the configured cells. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC216. SITESYNCZONE=0. ISBASICBSC=YES. SYMOFFSET=0. see 44. that is. ADTON=ON. SITESYNCZONE=0. /*Create a soft-synchronized network task on the collaborating BSC217*/ ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0. NCC=1. 44-11 .7 Collecting the Offset Information Between BTSs and 44. the task of creating the soft-synchronized network is complete. BTSIDX=2. ADJBSCDPC=h'a3. CI=1. Then. ISBASICBSC=NO. SYMOFFSET=0. Prerequisite A soft-synchronized network task is created through the ADD AISSCFG command and the task supports inter-BSC soft-synchronized network. ISSPTBSCAISS=YES. /*Create a soft-synchronized network task on the controlling BSC216*/ ADD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0. CELLNAME="D". /*Add a 2G unidirectional neighboring cell*/ ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. ----End Example An example script of creating an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task is as follows: /*Set the BTS synchronization zone*/ SET BTSAISS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. BCC=3. the BTS offset information are collected and the offset time are adjusted automatically to finish the soft-synchronized network task. GATHON=ON. run the ADD EXTNCELL command to add a pair of neighboring cells.6 Verifying an Inter-BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to verify the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal. to make cell C and cell D into a pair. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal of the controlling BSC216.

run the DSP BTSSYNCINFO command to query the offset information about the BTS. the BSC Sync State should be Waiting for Initial Collection. Ensure that Support BSC AISS is set to Yes on the controlling BSC and that the Controlling BSC DPC on the collaborating BSC is the DPC of the controlling BSC. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. The status of the collaborating BSC is queried if the entered Adjacent BSC DPC is the DPC of the collaborating BSC of this BSC. run the LST AISSCFG command to query the information about the soft-synchronized network task. /*Query the offset information about the synchronization of the BSC*/ DSP BSCSYNCINFO: TASKIDX=1. run the DSP AISSRUNSTATE command to query the information about the intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task and check whether the status of synchronization between the BTSs is normal. Enter the Adjacent BSC DPC of the collaborating BSC to query the status of the collaborating BSC. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. At the initial stage of the task of creating the soft-synchronized network. /*Query the offset information about the synchronization of the BTS*/ DSP BTSSYNCINFO: TASKIDX=1. 44. run the DSP BSCSYNCINFO command to query the offset information about the synchronization between two BSCs. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The collected offset information provides a basis for adjusting the BTS clock. BSCDPC=h'a17. ----End Example An example script of verifying an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task is as follows: /*Query the information about the soft-synchronized network task*/ LST AISSCFG. Prerequisite The inter-BSC or intra-BSC soft-synchronized network task is created successfully. Collecting the offset information between BTSs consists of collecting the intra-BSC and inter-BSC offset information between BTSs. IDXTYPE=BYIDX. NOTE l l The status of this BSC is queried if the entered Adjacent BSC DPC is the DPC of the controlling BSC of this BSC.7 Collecting the Offset Information Between BTSs This describes how to collect the offset information between BTSs on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 44-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. /*Query the information about the inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task*/ DSP AISSRUNSTATE: TASKIDX=1. BTS Status should be Waiting for Initial Collection. At the initial stage of the task of creating the soft-synchronized network. BTSIDX=0.

. 44-13 . Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task Preparation Table 44-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for collecting the intra-BSC offset information between BTSs Data Type Offset informat ion collectio n Parameter ID TASKIDX GATHON Parameter Name Aiss Task Index Offset Information Collection Switch Offset Time Adjustment Switch Reference BTS Index Reinitialize Neighboring Cell List Support BSC AISS Reserve State Aiss Task Index Collection Type Cell Index Type First BTS Index Second BTS Index Example 0 ON(ON) Source Network planning Network planning ADTON ON(ON) Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning BASEBTSIDX REINITTBL 1 NO(NO) ISSPTBSCAISS RESERVESTATE Frame offset and inframe bit offset collectio n TASKIDX COLTYPE CELLIDXTYPE SCELLIDX MCELLIDX NO(NO) YES(YES) 0 BYSITE(By Site) BYIDX(By Index) 0 1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

run the MOD AISSCFG command. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTSIDXTYPE=BYIDX. ISBASICBSC=NO. RESERVESTATE=YES. Ltd. COLTYPE=BYSITE. REINITTBL=NO. Then. Set Offset Time Adjustment Switch and Offset Information Collection Switch to ON(ON). Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . and the second BTS or cell must be the BTS to be collected or the cell under the BTS. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. run the COL BSCSYNCINFO command and enter the DPC of the specified collaborating BSC to recollect Frame Offset [frame No. Then. An example script of collecting the inter-BSC offset information between BTSs is as follows: /*Start the tasks of collecting the BTS offset information and adjusting the BTS offset time*/ 44-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ADTON=ON. MBTSIDX=1. the BSC automatically starts to adjust the BTS time and collect the offset information. 1.44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Table 44-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for collecting the inter-BSC offset information between BTSs Data Type Offset informat ion collectio n Parameter ID TASKIDX DPC Parameter Name Aiss Task Index BSC DPC Example 0 h'a3 Source Network planning Network planning Procedure l Collect the offset information about the BTSs in the BSC. 1. GATHON=ON. The two BTSs or cells used in the command should be listed in the neighboring cell list. ----End Example An example script of collecting the intra-BSC offset information between BTSs is as follows: /*Start the tasks of collecting the BTS offset information and adjusting the BTS offset time*/ MOD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0.] and In Frame Bit Offset [1/8 bit] of the control BSC and collaborating BSC. /*Recollect the frame offset and in frame bit offset in the intra-BSC softsynchronized network*/ COL SYNCINFO: TASKIDX=0. ISSPTBSCAISS=NO. the BSC automatically starts to adjust the BTS time and collect the offset information. run the COL SYNCINFO command to recollect Frame Offset [frame No. BASEBTSIDX=1..] and In Frame Bit Offset [1/8 bit] of two BTSs or cells under the BSC. Optional: If the information collected in step 1 differs greatly from the drive test result. Set Offset Time Adjustment Switch and Offset Information Collection Switch to ON(ON). Optional: If the information collected in step 1 differs greatly from the drive test result. l Collect the inter-BSC offset information. NOTE 2. The status of the first BTS or cell must be collected or synchronized. run the MOD AISSCFG command. SBTSIDX=0.

NOTE Take BTS1 as the reference BTS and keep the frame number and offset of BTS1 unchanged. you are advised to synchronize the BTSs when the traffic volume is low. call drops may occur. /*Recollect the frame offset and in frame bit offset in the inter-BSC softsynchronized network*/ COL BSCSYNCINFO: TASKIDX=0. If the drive test result shows that the offset between the synchronized BTSs is great. the BTS offset information is collected and the offset time is adjusted automatically to synchronize the BTSs. ----End Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..8 Synchronizing BTSs After a soft-synchronized network task is created.] and In Frame Bit Offset [1/8 bit] should correspond to the drive test result. Preparation Table 44-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for synchronizing the BTSs Parameter ID TASKIDX IDXTYPE BTSIDX ADJMODE FRAMEOFFSET BITOFFSET Parameter Name Aiss Task Index Index type BTS index Adjustment Mode Frame Offset [frame No. run the MOD BTSEXCURSION command to manually synchronize the BTSs. DPC=h'a3. Therefore. 44-15 . BASEBTSIDX=1.] In Frame Bit Offset [1/8 bit] Example 0 BYIDX(By Index) 1 BYMANUAL(By Manual) 100 10 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Then. Ltd. 44. Frame Offset [frame No. you can manually synchronize the BTSs on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task MOD AISSCFG: TASKIDX=0. adjust the frame number and offset of BTS2 according to the frame offset and in-frame bit offset of BTS2 relative to BTS1 to synchronize BTS2 with BTS1. Impact During the BTS synchronization. ISSPTBSCAISS=YES. This operation is optional as required. GATHON=ON. ISBASICBSC=YES. ADTON=ON. RESERVESTATE=YES. REINITTBL=NO.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . you should also delete the pair of interBSC neighboring cells through the RMV EXTNCELL command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Preparation Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script of deleting a soft-synchronized network task is as follows: RMV AISSCFG: TASKIDX=1. FRAMEOFFSET=100. IDXTYPE=BYIDX. 44-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. /*Delete the pair of inter-BSC neighboring cells and the inter-BSC softsynchronized network task*/ RMV EXTNCELL: INDEX=0. Step 2 To delete an inter-BSC soft-synchronized network task. run the RMV AISSCFG command to delete a softsynchronized network task. Prerequisite A soft-synchronized network task is created through the ADD AISSCFG command.44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Example An example script of adjusting the frame offset and in-frame bit offset is as follows: MOD BTSEXCURSION: TASKIDX=0. BTSIDX=1. 44..9 Deleting a Soft-Synchronized Network Task This describes how to delete a soft-synchronized network task on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BITOFFSET=10. Ltd. ADJMODE=BYMANUAL.

. NEs Involved MS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 45 Configuring Entire Network Synchronization 45 Scenario Impact Configuring Entire Network Synchronization This describes how to configure the DGPS in the BTS3012 or configure the USCU in the 3900 series base station or 3036 series base station to support the GPS function so that the entire network is synchronized. Example BYIDX(By Index) 5 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning 45-1 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Preparation Configure the DGPS in the BTS3012 or configure the USCU in the 3900 series base station or 3036 series base station to support the GPS entire network synchronization. and improve the gain of the radio-related KPIs. Table 45-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the USCU Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX SRN Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Subrack No.The BTS3900/BTS3900A/DBS3900 should be configured with the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU). Prerequisite l l The configuration of entire network is not restricted by the license. and BSC. expand the network capacity. The communication between the BSC and the BTS is normal. . Take configuration of the USCU in the BTS3900 GSM as an example. BTS. The BTS3012 should be configured with the DGPS. Ltd. To synchronize the entire network through hardware configuration The conversion from an asynchronous network to a synchronous network can effectively reduce the interference on the entire network.

run the MOD USCUBP command to set GPS or Glonass to GPS(GPS). ANTENNALONG=800. GPS Antenna Delay to 800. /*Configure the USCU to support the GPS function*/ MOD USCUBP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. NOTE GPS or Glonass is set according to the type of the GPS satellite card. run the MOD BTSCLK command to set Clock Type to TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock). Antenna Power Supply Switch is set to NOPOWER(No Power) only in the co-antenna scenario. GPSORGLONASS=GPS. Ltd. BTSIDX=5. SRN=0. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and Antenna Power Supply Switch to NOPOWER(No Power). BTSIDX=5.45 Configuring Entire Network Synchronization HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID SN CNT BT GPSORGLONASS ANTENNALONG ANTENNAPOWER SWITCH Parameter Name Slot No. ClkType=TRCGPS_CLK. BTSIDX=5. 45-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SRN=0. BT=USCU.. GPS Antenna Delay is set according to the feeder length. Cabinet Type Board Type GPS or Glonass GPS Antenna Delay Antenna Power Supply Switch Example 0 BTS3900_GSM USCU(USCU) GPS(GPS) 800 NOPOWER(No Power) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 45-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the system clock source Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX CLKTYPE Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Clock Type Example BYIDX(By Index) 5 TRCGPS_CLK (Trace GPS Clock) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Add a USCU*/ ADD BTSBRD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. SN=0. /*Configure the system clock source*/ MOD BTSCLK: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. ANTENNAPOWERSWITCH=NOPOWER. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . CNT=BTS3900_GSM. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD BTSBRD command to add the USCU. SN=0.

2. l Deactivating entire network synchronization 1. run the LST BTSCLK command to check the setting of Clock Type of the BTS. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST BTSCLK command. run the MOD BTSCLK command to set Clock Type to a value other than TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock). it indicates that the function of entire network synchronization is activated.. If the parameter is set to a value other than TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock). If the parameter is set to TRCGPS_CLK(Trace GPS Clock). Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 45-3 . it indicates that the function of entire network synchronization is deactivated. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 45 Configuring Entire Network Synchronization Postrequisite l Verifying entire network synchronization – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Check the setting of Clock Type of the BTS.

.

5 Configuring Abis over IP This describes how to configure Abis over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Abis over IP. According to the network planning. load sharing.3 Gb over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the Gb interface. the quality of IP transmission can be guaranteed by various QoS mechanisms.2 Abis over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the Abis interface.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission 46 Context Configuring BSS IP Transmission About This Chapter This describes three types of IP transmission in the BSS: A over IP. 46. The networking reliability can be guaranteed by the active/standby mode. 46. Ltd. 46-1 . Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.6 Configuring Gb over IP This describes how to configure Gb over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 46. 46.4 Configuring A over IP This describes how to configure A over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 46. different networking modes can be used on each interface in the BSS as required. and Gb over IP. and link detection. 46.. Meanwhile.1 A over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the A interface.

1 A over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the A interface.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46. Ltd. Table 46-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring system clock Parameter ID SRCTYPE Parameter Name Clock Reference Source Type Example 2M_ExternalClk0 (2M_ExternalClk0) 2M_ExternalClk1 (2M_ExternalClk1) SRCSUBTYPE Clock Reference Source Sub-type Clock Reference Source Priority 2M_HZ 2M_Bps 1 2 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning PRIORITY Table 46-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 8K reference clock for the GMPS and GEPS Parameter ID SRN Parameter Name Subrack No. Example 0 1 REFCLK clock type GGCU_BACK (GGCU Backplane) GGCU_BACK (GGCU Face) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 46-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the M3AU entity Data Type M3UA local entity M3UA destination entity Parameter ID OPC DPC Parameter Name OPC Code DPC Code Example h'a1 h'cc Source Network planning Network planning 46-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) ..

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Table 46-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the signaling point for the GMPS Parameter Subrack No. OPC Code Example 0 h'a1 Source BSC internal planning Network planning Table 46-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUA Data Type BSC attributes Board attributes Parameter ID ServiceMod e SRN SN BT PORTTYPE BACKTYP E Parameter Name Service Mode Subrack No.255. Slot No. 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning PN AN MTU IP attributes Communicat ion type Device IP address AIPTYPE Port No.255. Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning IPADDR MASK Port IP address PORT Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Auto Neg MTU A-interface Communicat ion IP type IP Address Subnet Mask Port No..2. 46-3 . Ltd. Board Type Port Type Back Type Example AIP(AIP) 0 14 GFGUA FE OUTPEER (Active/ Standby Mode) 0 ENABLE (ENABLE) 1000 DEVIP (Device IP address) 2.2 255.2.

3.3.3.2.3 255.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID IPINDEX IPADDR MASK IPADDR2 BSC route IPADDR MASK GATEWAY Parameter Name IP address index IP Address Subnet Mask Standby IP address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Example 0 3. 0 3. Peer Port No.5.5.5.3.3. 0 3.2 5.3. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Local Port No.1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 46-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the A interface link Parameter ID SIGLKSIDX DENO Parameter Name Signalling Link Set Index Adjacent Destination Entity No..2.0 255. Ltd.255.3.3.1 Source Network planning Network planning 46-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.255.4 5.255.5. First Local IP Address Peer Address 1 Example 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning LOCPN PEERPN LOCIP1 PEERIP1 4096 4096 2.255.5 Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 46-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD detection over the A interface Parameter ID IPINDEX PEERIP Parameter Name Local IP Index Peer IP Example 0 3.

Example 0 14 A(A Interface) IP(IP) CSVOICE(CS Voice) ENABLE (Enable) 2 EF 0 7 0 14 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Slot No.. Ltd. Port No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Parameter ID MINTXINTERVA L MINRXINTERVA L DETECTMULT Parameter Name Minimum TX Interval[ms] Minimum RX Interval[ms] DetectMult Example 30 30 3 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 46-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the QoS mechanism over the A interface Data Type Priority mapping Parameter ID SRN SN ITFTYPE TRMTYPE SRVTYPE VLANFLAG VLANID PHB DSCP VLANPRI Traffic shaping and congestion management SRN SN PN Parameter Name Subrack No. Slot No. 46-5 . InterfaceType TRM Type Service Type VLAN Flag VLAN ID PHB DSCP PRI Subrack No.

Slot No.. . Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 46-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Board Type Port Type Back Type Example 0 17 GFGUB FE OUTPEER (Active/ Standby Mode) 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning PN Port No. Ltd.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID WQDT DRPTYPE UPTHP Parameter Name Queue Display Type Discarding Type Upper Discarding Threshold Congestion Threshold Restore Threshold Shaping Enable Shaping Bandwidth [32K] Example PQ REJECT (REJECT) 3 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning CGTHP RSTHP SPENABLE SPBW 4 4 YES(Yes) 3200 46.2 Abis over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the Abis interface. Table 46-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUB Data Type Board attributes Parameter ID SRN SN BT PORTTYPE BACKTYP E Parameter Name Subrack No.

.255.0 255.6. 0 8. IP address index IP address Subnet mask Standby IP address IP address Subnet mask Gateway IP address Example ENABLE (ENABLE) 1000 DEVIP (Device IP address) 6.255.5.8.8.5..8. 0 0 0 8.6 255.8.8.8.255.8.255. Ltd.255.6.4 5.3 255. 0 8.8.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Data Type Parameter ID AN MTU Parameter Name Auto Neg MTU Abisinterface Communicat ion IP type IP address Subnet mask Port No.1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning IP attributes Communicat ion type ABISIPTYP E Device IP address IPADDR MASK Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Port IP address PORT IPINDEX IPADDR MASK IPADDR2 BSC route IPADDR MASK GATEWAY Table 46-10 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD link detection over the Abis interface Data Type BSC Parameter ID IPINDEX PEERIP Parameter Name Local IP Index Peer IP Example 0 8.255.3 Source Network planning Network planning 46-7 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

9.1 3 3 3 CONSYN (Consecutive Synchronizing) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 46-12 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring QoS for the Abis interface Data Type Priority mapping on the BSC side Parameter ID SRN Parameter Name Subrack No.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID MINTXINTER VAL MINRXINTE RVAL DETECTMUL T Parameter Name Minimum TX Interval[ms] Minimum RX Interval[ms] Detect Multiple BTSWTR Minimum TX Interval[ms] Minimum RX Interval[ms] Detect Multiple Example 30 30 3 0 30 30 3 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning BTS BTSWTR MINTXINTER VAL MINRXINTE RVAL DETECTMUL T Table 46-11 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Clock over IP Parameter ID IPINDEX SHPA SHPB SHPC SYNMODE Parameter Name Clock server IP ShakeHand period A[s] ShakeHand period B[s] ShakeHand period C[s] Clock Synchronization Mode Example 9.9.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Ltd. Example 0 Source Network planning 46-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

46-9 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Data Type Parameter ID SN ITFTYPE TRMTYPE SRVTYPE VLANFLAG VLANID PHB DSCP VLANPRI Parameter Name Slot No. Example 17 Abis(Abis Interface) IP(IP) CSVOICE(CS Voice) ENABLE (Enable) 2 EF 0 7 BYIDX(By Index) 0 CSVOICE 0 YES ENABLE (Enable) 7 0 17 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Priority mapping on the BTS side IDXTYPE BTSIDX SERVICETYP E DSCP VLANSWITC H VLANID VLANPRI Traffic shaping and congestion management SRN SN Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Slot No.. Ltd. Interface Type TRM Type Service Type VLAN Flag VLAN ID PHB DSCP PRI Index Type BTS Index Service Type DSCP VLANSwitch VLAN ID PRI Subrack No.

. Is First Class Transport Resource Group Example 0 0 10 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Resource group SRN GRPID 0 0 Network planning Network planning ISFIRSTCLAS S YES(Yes) Network planning 46-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Queue Display Type Drop Type Upper Limit Congestion Threshold Restore Threshold Shaping Enable Shaping Bandwidth [32K] Example 0 PQ REJECT (REJECT) 3 4 4 YES(Yes) 3200 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 46-13 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring IP PATH for the Abis interface Data Type Logical port Parameter ID PN LPN BANDWIDTH Parameter Name Logical Port No. Bandwidth of the Logical Port [32kbps] Subrack No. Logical Port No.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID PN WQDT DRPTYPE UPTHP CGTHP RSTHP SPENABLE SPBW Parameter Name Port No. Transport Resource Group No.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Data Type Parameter ID LOCTRMBAN D Parameter Name Local Class Transport Resource Bandwidth [kbps] IP Path ID Interface Type BTS Index IP Path Type Transport Resource Bandwidth [kbps] Carry Flag Logical Port No. 46-11 . LDR First Example 10 Source Network planning IP PATH PATHID INTTYPE BTSID PATHT TRMBAND 1 ABISINT(Abis Interface) 0 CS(CS) 10 Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning CARRYFLAG LPN LDR attributes LDRFST LOGPORT (Logical Port) 0 PSDOWN(PS Downspeeding) Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 46-14 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring ABIS MUX Data Type BSC/BTS Parameter ID ABISMUXF LAG SRVTYPE Parameter Name ABIS-MUX Global Enable Flag Service Type Example ENABLE(Enable) Source Network planning CSVOICE(CS Voice) Network planning Table 46-15 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring LAPD Parameter ID WINADJSWIT CH Parameter Name LAPD window adjust switch Example ALLOW(Allow) Source Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd.

3 Gb over IP Configuration Data This provides the configuration data of the IP transmission over the Gb interface.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Board Type Back Type Example INNER(Inner PCU) 0 8 GDPUP NONE(Independent Mode) Source BSC internal planning BSC internal planning BSC internal planning BSC internal planning BSC internal planning 46-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Slot No.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Table 46-16 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring IP PM Parameter ID BTSID DIRECTION Parameter Name BTS Index Direction Example 0 DOWN (DOWN)/UP (UP) CSVOICE (CS Voice) 1 Source BSC internal planning BSC internal planning BSC internal planning BSC internal planning SERVICETYPE PMPRD Service Type IPPM Packet Send Period[100ms] Table 46-17 Example of the data negotiated and planned for setting the BTS Ping Switch to Off Parameter ID BTSPINGSWIT CH Parameter Name BTS Ping Switch Example OFF(Off) Source Network planning 46. Ltd. Table 46-18 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GDPUP Parameter PCU Type Subrack No.

13.13 255.255.0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning PN AN MTU IP attributes GBIPTYPE GBIPTYPE Port No. 46-13 .255.255.12. Slot No. Ltd.15.12 255. Auto Neg MTU Gb-interface Communicat ion IP type IP address Subnet mask Port No.13. IP address index IP address Subnet mask Standby IP address IP address Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Device IP address IPADDR MASK Port IP address PORT IPINDEX IPADDR MASK IPADDR2 BSC route IPADDR Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.12.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Table 46-19 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUG Data Type Board attributes Parameter ID SRN SN BT PORTTYPE BACKTYP E Parameter Name Subrack No. Board Type Port Type Back Type Example 0 18 GFGUG FE OUTPEER (Active/ Standby Mode) 0 ENABLE (ENABLE) 1000 DEVIP (Device IP address) 12. 0 0 0 13.13.. 0 13.255.13.4 15.15.

Signaling Load Weight Example 46000 1 1 0 GB_OVER_IP (Gb over IP) 0 12.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID MASK GATEWAY Parameter Name Subnet mask Gateway IP address Example 255.1 Source Network planning Network planning Table 46-20 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the SGSN Data Type SGSN node Parameter ID CNOPNAME CNID NSE NSEI SRN PT Local NSVL NSVLI IP UDPPN SIGLW SRVLW Remote NSVL NSVLI IP UDPPN SIGLW Parameter Name Operator Name SGSN Node ID NSE Identifier Agent Subrack No.15. 0 13. Ltd..255.12.15 5555 100 Source BSC internal planning Negotiating with the peer end Negotiating with the peer end BSC internal planning Negotiating with the peer end Negotiating with the peer end Negotiating with the peer end Negotiating with the peer end Negotiating with the peer end Negotiating with the peer end Negotiating with the peer end Negotiating with the peer end Negotiating with the peer end Negotiating with the peer end 46-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.15.12. Subnetwork Protocol Type Local NSVL Identifier IP Address UDP Port No.255.13. Signaling Load Weight Traffic Load Weight Remote NSVL Identifier IP Address UDP Port No.13. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .12 5000 100 100 1 15.

1 30 30 3 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 46-22 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring traffic shaping over the Gb interface and congestion management Parameter ID SRN SN PN WQDT DRPTYPE UPTHP CGTHP Parameter Name Subrack No. Port No.13.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission Data Type Parameter ID Traffic Load Weight Parameter Name Traffic Load Weight PTPBVC Identifier Index Type Cell Name Example 100 2 BYCELLNAME (By Cell Name) CELL_1 Source Negotiating with the peer end BSC internal planning BSC internal planning BSC internal planning PTPBVC BVCI IDXTYPE CELLNAME Table 46-21 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BFD link detection over the Gb interface Parameter ID IPINDEX PEERIP MINTXINTERVA L MINRXINTERVA L DETECTMULT Parameter Name Local IP Index Peer IP Minimum TX Interval[ms] Minimum RX Interval[ms] DetectMult Example 0 13. Queue Display Type Discarding Type Upper Discarding Threshold Congestion Threshold Example 0 18 0 PQ REJECT(REJECT) 3 4 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Slot No.. Ltd. 46-15 .13.

The following procedure is an example 46-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The Abis over IP supports only IPv4. The BSC supports communication through the device IP address or port IP address. the BSC should be configured with the route to the peer device even if the IP address of the MSC or MGW is on the same network segment with the port IP address of the BSC. the speech quality is enhanced and the resources are saved. MGW When the IP transmission is used over the A interface. the procedures for configuring the GFGUA and GOGUA are the same. Ltd. When the A interface is directly connected to the BSC. BSC. see Activate BSC License. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .4 Configuring A over IP This describes how to configure A over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. When the device IP address is used for communication. secondary speech coding/decoding can be avoided if the calling party and called party use the same speech coding scheme. When the port IP address is used for communication. the BSC must be configured with the route to the MGW. The compressed speech coding scheme is still used. When the BSC is directly connected to the MSC or MGW or the network is in Layer 2 topology. Prerequisite l l Configure the A over IP that is restricted by the license.. Scenario Impact The A over IP is used for signaling and CS signals transmission in the BSS system. None. the peer device should be configured with the static route to the IP address of the BSC even if the BSC is directly connected to the peer device. NEs Involved BTS. the functions of the GTCS are implemented by the MGW and the BSC does not perform transcoding. and thus the transmission bandwidth is reduced on the A interface. l l l l l Preparation Except for different configuration parameters between the GFGUA and GOGUA. the static route is not required. The Gb interface board can be configured with up to five device IP addresses.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID RSTHP SPENABLE SPBW Parameter Name Restore Threshold Shaping Enable Shaping Bandwidth [32K] Example 4 YES(Yes) 3200 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning 46. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. Thus. MSC. When an MS calls another MS in the network. The A/Abis interface board can be configured with only one device IP address.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 3. Step 2 Configure the BSC clock. If the GE transmission is used.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission of configuring the GFGUAs in active/standby mode in the GMPS subrack. 1. Run the MOD SCUCLK command and configure the 8 kHz reference clock for the GEPS. the transfer entity must be configured. one GFGUA can be configured with two ports numbered zero and four. When configuring the destination entity. run the ADD CLKSRC command to configure the system clock. 1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The BSC obtains the BITS clock from the input port of synchronous clock signals on the GGCU to provide the reference clock for the GMPS/GEPS. It has two input modes: BITS0 and BITS1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. For the configuration data. see 46. one GFGUA can be configured with eight ports numbered from zero to seven. Set Back Type to OUTSHARE(LoadShare Mode) or OUTPEER(Active/Standby Mode) to enhance the networking reliability. Step 5 Configure the GFGUA/GOGUA. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Procedure Step 1 Configure BSC attributes. run the ADD SROPCMAP command to configure the subrack-OPC mapping. NOTE In A over IP mode. It is classified into the 2 MHz clock and 2 Mbit/s clock. Step 4 Configure subrack-OPC mapping. 3. 46-17 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Run the SET ETHPORTPROP command and set Port Type to configure the port attribute of the GFGUA. go to Step 5.1 A over IP Configuration Data. Run the SET ITFIPTYPE command and set A-interface Communication IP type.. If the GE transmission is used. The BITS clock is obtained from the BITS device. one GOGUA can be configured with two ports numbered zero and one. Run the ADD M3DE to configure the destination entity. l l l If the FE transmission is used. NOTE Step 3 Configure the M3UA entities. NOTE 2. run the ADD M3LE command to configure the local entity. you need to set Using STP to YES (Yes). Run the ADD M3STE command to configure the transfer entity. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD BSCBASIC command and set Service mode to AIP(AIP). 1. Ltd. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Run the MOD SCUCLK command and configure the 8 kHz reference clock for the GMPS.5. the clock source of the BSC can be only a BITS clock. 3. 2. If the communication type is PORTIP(PORT IP). If there is no direct physical link between the local entity and the destination entity. run the ADD BRD command to add the GFGUA.

port IP addresses must be on different network segments. Run the ADD M3RT command to configure the M3UA route. 5. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. that is. NOTE The following two methods implement the separation between signaling and traffic data over the A interface on the bearer network. run the ADD M3LKS command to configure the M3UA link set. 1.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 4. thus implementing the separation between signaling and traffic data on the bearer network. add a BSC route after their port IP addresses are configured. Ltd. The IP address of the port and that of the device must be on different network segments. In load sharing mode.. Step 6 Configure a link over the A interface. 3. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . NOTE The device IP address is the logical IP address used for communication. The principles of configuring the port IP address are as follows: l l l 6. 2.. if the BSC performs communication through device IP addresses. several IP addresses are configured to each port. 46-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Regardless of whether device IP addresses or port IP addresses are used for communication. the IP addresses of related ports must be configured on the same network segment. then the two boards for load sharing must use the same device IP address. l l The signaling and traffic data are mapped to different VPNs through different ports to implement their separation on the bearer network. Run the ADD M3LNK command and configure the M3UA link to achieve the configuration of the IP transmission over the A interface. The active and standby interface boards must be configured with the same IP address. In active/standby mode. If the active and standby GFGUAs are configured. Configure several IP address index. NOTE The principles of configuring the BSC route are as follows: l l l Destination IP Address should be set as the destination network address but not a single IP address. Run the ADD IPRT command and configure the BSC route. Different IP addresses are mapped to different VPNs. Run the ADD DEVIP command to configure the device IP address. The address is valid for all the ports on the board. Run the ADD PHYPORTIP command to configure the port IP address. Each port can be configured with six IP addresses and all IP addresses of each port must be configured on different network segments. Gateway IP Address should be on the same network segment as the port IP address of the GFGUA.

NOTE The BSC maps the data onto different Differentiated Services Code Points (DSCPs) or different VLAN priorities and VLAN IDs. and First Local IP Address and Second Local IP Address must be on different network segments. 1. Second Local IP Address must be set to the device IP address. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. must be the number of the port that is configured with an IP address. The BFD (Bidirectional Forwarding Detection) and ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) are used for link detection. the system must detect the fault when the link or the board is faulty to prevent the services from disruption. the M3UA link can be configured only when the device IP address is configured. Set Shaping Enable to YES(Yes) and set Shaping BandWidth[32K] to specify the data rate. 2. In addition. Configure the BFD or ARP according to the capability of the equipment at both ends and the requirement of networking reliability. l Step 7 Configure the reliability mechanism of the A interface. The network device of layer three maps different DSCPs to different Per-Hop Behaviors (PHBs). One physical port supports only one type of link detection. the BFD session is setup only when two ends of the link support the BFD and the parameters at two ends are consistent. NOTE If Back Type of the BSC is set to OUTPEER(Active/Standby Mode) and the standby board enables the BFD or ARP detection. The principles of configuring the BFD detection are as follows: l l Port No. 46-19 . the network device of layer two performs QoS scheduling based on the VLAN priority. and Second Local IP Address is optional. the BFD and ARP function are not enabled because the board itself can automatically detect faults to guarantee the networking reliability. Run the ADD BFD command to configure the BFD detection on the BSC side. NOTE The networking reliability can be guaranteed by configuring the back type over the A interface. and Second Local IP Address is optional. Configure the priority mapping. For the configuration of the BFD detection over the A interface. Besides. Step 8 Configure the QoS mechanism of the A interface.. 1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) NOTE 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission l When the device IP mode is used over the A interface. Run the SET QOSPROP command. Configure the ARP detection on the BSC side. When one GFGUA or GOGUA board is configured in the BSC (independent mode). When the port IP mode is used over the A interface. First Local IP Address can be selected from the list of port IP addresses of the interface boards. the M3UA link can be configured only when the device IP address is configured. But if the SCTP multihoming function is required. Peer IP must be different from the device IP address and the port IP address. 2. Run the ADD ARPDETECT command and configure the attributes of the ARP detection. First Local IP Address is the device IP address of the interface board. and First Local IP Address and Second Local IP Address must be on different network segments. Peer Standby Board IP need to be configured. Ltd. But if the SCTP multi-homing function is required. Second Local IP Address must be set to the port IP address. In addition. Configure the traffic shaping for the physical port to restrict the burst flow in the network.

5.255. Run the SET SRVVLANMAP command and set VLAN ID. /*Set the system clock*/ ADD CLKSRC: SRCTYPE=2M_ExternalClk0. SSN=254. BackType=OUTPEER.4". CNID=0. /*Add the M3UA link set*/ ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSIDX=0. IPADDR="2. / *Set the 8 kHz reference clock for the GMPS*/ MOD SCUCLK: SRN=0. /*Add the M3UA link*/ ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSIDX=0. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .255..46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission l HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Run the SET DSCPMAP command to configure the mapping between the DSCP and the VLAN priority. /*Add a BSC route*/ ADD IPRT: SRN=0. PHB.255. MASK="255. AN=ENABLE. LOCIP1="2.2. Otherwise. PORT=0. /*Set the IP communication over the A interface*/ SET ITFIPTYPE: AIPTYPE=DEVIP.3. PN=0. ----End Example Configure the IP transmission over the A interface. BT=GFGUA.5".3. Run the SET QOSPROP command and set Queue Display Type to REJECT or Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) to manage the congestion. Congestion occurs when the data arrive at the port at a higher rate than the data sending rate of the port. The example script of configuring the GFGUA in active/standby mode and configuring the device communication type and the BFD detection. Congestion management. SN=14. RefClk=GGCU_BACK. SIGLKSIDX=0. SRCSUBTYPE=2M_Bps. /*Add the M3UA route*/ ADD M3RT: DENO=0. IPADDR="3. DENO=0. The Priority Queue (PQ) and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) techniques of queue scheduling can be used to solve the congestion problem. MTU=1000.3. the QoS scheduling is performed according to the DSCP. MASK="255.2.5.255. the QoS scheduling is performed according to the VLAN priority.2. LOCPN=4096. If VLAN Flag is set to ENABLE(Enable). The Destination IP Address and the port IP address must be on the same network segment. PRIORITY=2.3. MINTXINTERVAL=30. NAME="m3linkset_1".2". ADD CLKSRC: SRCTYPE=2M_ExternalClk1. IPADDR2="3.2. l l 3. IPINDEX=0.3.0". RTCONTEXT=1. /*Add the M3UA local entity*/ ADD M3LE: NAME="m3le_1".255. SN=14.255.5. DPC=h'cc. SN=14.0". PT=FE.1".3. Ltd.1". SN=14. RefClk=GGCU_FACE. PEERIP="3. GATEWAY="3.5.0". SRN=0. DETECTMULT=3. / *Set the attribute of an Ethernet port*/ SET ETHPORTPROP: SRN=0. Run the ADD IPVLANMAP command to configure the mapping between the IP and the VLAN.2".3. /*Add the BFD*/ ADD BFD: SRN=0. / *Add the device IP address*/ ADD DEVIP: SRN=0. PN=0. OPC=h'a1. /*Add the GFGUA*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0.3". You should configure the mapping between DSCP and VLAN priority to implement the mapping between the service priorities at the network layer and the service priorities at the data link layer. SN=14. SRCSUBTYPE=2M_HZ. IPADDR="5. and DSCP related to the service type over the A interface to achieve their mapping. /*Add subrack-OPC mapping*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=0. MINRXINTERVAL=30. /*Add the Ethernet port IP address*/ ADD PHYPORTIP: SRN=0. /*Configure the QoS attributes of a port*/ /*Configure the traffic Shaping for a 46-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. PEERIP1="5. /*Set the service mode*/ MOD BSCBASIC: ServiceMode=AIP. OPC=h'a1.3. / *Set the 8 kHz reference clock for the GEPS*/ MOD SCUCLK: SRN=1. MASK="255. PortType=FE. RTCONTEXT=1. NAME="m3de_1". PEERPN=4096. SN=14. IPINDEX=0.0". BT=GFGUA. /*Add the M3UA destination entity*/ ADD M3DE: DENO=0. PRIORITY=1.

NEs Involved BTS. and VLAN ID*/ SET SRVVLANMAP: ITFTYPE=A. Verify that the physical links on the A interface is normal.3. /*Configure the mapping of the service type. In this scenario. MGW. None. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. The Abis over IP supports only IPv4. CGTHP=4. SPBW=3200. The BFD is supported by only 3012 series base stations. SN=14. the BSC and BTS directly start BFD to perform link detection. RSTHP=4. SRVTYPE=CSVOICE.3. The A/Abis interface board can be configured with only one device IP address. 46. VLANFLAG=ENABLE. PN=0. /*Perform the congestion management with priority queue (PQ)*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0. It is not supported by 3900 series base stations. SN=14. For a layer 2 topology in Abis over IP. see Activate BSC License. DSCP=0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. WQDT=PQ. MSC. For details.5 Configuring Abis over IP This describes how to configure Abis over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. DSTIPADDR="3. The BSC supports communication through the device IP address or port IP address. UPTHP=3. DSCP. SN=14. the peer device should be configured with the static route to the IP address of the BSC even if the BSC is directly connected to the peer device. VLANID=2. see Verifying the Physical Links on the A Interface (A over IP) in the BSC Commissioning Guide. For details. When the port IP address is used for communication. the BTS cannot use the device IP address for communication. PHB=EF. VLANPRI=7. and SGSN Prerequisite l l Configure the Abis over IP that is restricted by the license. The Abis over IP supports only the built-in PCU and BTS star topology. PN=0. DSCP=0. Verify that the control plane on the A interface is normal. /*Configure the mapping between the IP address and the VLAN priority*/ ADD IPVLANMAP: SRN=0. 2. Postrequisite l Verifying A over IP 1. Scenario Impact The Abis over IP is used for signaling and CS signals transmission in the BSS system. SPENABLE=YES. Ltd.5". The Gb interface board can be configured with up to five device IP addresses. For details. VLANID=2. 46-21 l l l l l l l Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . /*Priority mapping*/ /*Configure the mapping between the DSCP and the VLAN priority*/ SET DSCPMAP: SRN=0. the static route is not required. It does not support the HubBTS and TDM/IP hybrid transport.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission physical port*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0. TRMTYPE=IP. SN=14.. When the device IP address is used for communication. DRPTYPE=REJECT. BSC. see Verifying the Control Plane on the A Interface (A over IP) in the BSC Commissioning Guide.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . if the BSC performs communication through device IP addresses. Each port can be configured with six IP addresses and all IP addresses of each port must be configured on different network segments. run the ADD BRD command to add the GFGUB. go to Step 2. see 46. Regardless of whether device IP addresses or port IP addresses are used for communication. the IP addresses of related ports must be configured on the same network segment. The following procedure is an example of configuring two GFGUBs in the GMPS subrack. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 4. Run the SET ITFIPTYPE command and set Abis-interface Communication IP type. Run the ADD PHYPORTIP command to configure the port IP address. one GFGUB can be configured with eight ports numbered from zero to seven. NOTE The principles of configuring the port IP address are as follows: l l l The IP address of the port and that of the device must be on different network segments. the procedures for configuring the GFGUB and GOGUB are the same. run the SET ITFIPTYPE command to set Abisinterface Communication IP type. In load sharing mode. Run the ADD IPRT command and configure the BSC route. Ltd. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Procedure Step 1 Configure BSC attributes. port IP addresses must be on different network segments. then the two boards for load sharing must use the same device IP address. one GOGUB can be configured with two ports numbered zero and one.. The address is valid for all the ports on the board. In active/standby mode. Run the SET ETHPORTPROP command and set Port Type to configure the port attribute of the GFGUB. Run the ADD DEVIP command to configure the device IP address. NOTE The device IP address is the logical IP address used for communication. 6. If the GE transmission is used. NOTE 2. If the GE transmission is used. The active and standby interface boards must be configured with the same IP address. 1.2 Abis over IP Configuration Data. 5.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation Except for different configuration parameters between the GFGUB and GOGUB. For the configuration data. l l l If the FE transmission is used.5. one GFGUB can be configured with two ports numbered zero and four. Step 2 Configure the GFGUB/GOGUB. Set Back Type to OUTSHARE(LoadShare Mode) or OUTPEER(Active/Standby Mode) to enhance the networking reliability. 3. If the communication type is PORTIP(PORT IP). 46-22 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Configure the ARP detection on the BSC side. Run the SET QOSPROP command. When the parameters of both sides are consistent. Run the ADD ARPDETECT command and configure the attributes of the ARP link detection. must be the number of the port that is configured with an IP address. Configure the traffic shaping for the physical port to restrict the burst flow in the network. Gateway IP Address should be on the same network segment as the port IP address of the GFGUB. Step 3 Configure the reliability mechanism for the Abis interface. see the Configure the reliability mechanism for the A interface. in the 46. l Step 5 Configure the QoS mechanism of the Abis interface. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details. l In consecutive synchronizing mode.. Run the ADD BTSBFD command and configure the BFD link detection on the BTS side. Interval Synchronization Start Time[Hour]. Set Shaping Enable to YES(Yes) and set Shaping BandWidth[32K] to specify the data rate. set parameters corresponding to the BSC. Set Clock Synchronization Mode to CONSYN (Consecutive Synchronizing) or INTERSYN(Intermittent Synchronizing) to configure the synchronization mode between IP Clock Server and IP Clock Client. a. Peer IP must be different from the device IP address and the port IP address. the BTS works as the Client of Clock over IP and keep the clock synchronization with the Server according to Interim Synchronization Period [Day]. The IP Clock Server obtains the clock source from other devices and sends the clock synchronization messages to the BTS (IP Clock Client) through the IP network. 1. The BFD detection over the Abis interface requires the support of the BTS and BSC.4 Configuring A over IP. In the case of active and standby boards. b. the BFD session can be established.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) NOTE 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission The principles of configuring the BSC route are as follows: l l l Destination IP Address should be set as the destination the network address but not a single IP address. set Peer Standby Board IP. Step 4 Configure the Clock Over IP and configure the clock synchronization information of the IP transmission network. NOTE When the BSC enables the OUTPEER(Active/Standby Mode) networking mode and the BFD or ARP link detection is enabled on the standby board. 2. and Interval Synchronization Start Time[Minute]. Ltd. On the BTS side. NOTE The reliability of the Abis over IP networking is the same as that of the A over IP. Run the ADD BFD command and configure the BFD link detection on the BSC side. add a BSC route after their port IP addresses are configured. Run the MOD IPCLKSRV command. 46-23 . The principles of configuring the BFD link detection are as follows: l l Port No. the BTS works as the Client of Clock over IP to send datagram continuously for clock synchronization. In intermittent synchronizing mode. 1.

The admission control for the MS is based on the following parameters: Local Class Transport Resource Bandwidth[kbps]. the network device of layer two performs QoS scheduling based on the VLAN priority. Otherwise. is configured for one BSC board and Physical Port No. Run the MOD BTSVLAN command and perform the service schedule in the transmission network according to different DSCP. l l l 3. Set Reserved Bandwidth Threshold[%] > Congestion Bandwidth Threshold[%] > Congestion Clear Bandwidth Threshold[%] to implement two-level admission control. If VLAN Flag is set to ENABLE(Enable).. NOTE The IP PATH is a logical link with virtual bandwidth. Configure the logical port or resource group. Reserved Bandwidth Threshold[%]. Ltd. the QoS scheduling depends on the DSCP. which is carried on the physical port. Congestion occurs when the data arrive at the port at a higher rate than the data sending rate of the port. The services and signaling can be logically separated according to VLANID. Configure the priority mapping. logical port. and Congestion Clear Bandwidth Threshold [%]. Congestion Bandwidth Threshold[%]. VLANPRI of different Service Type. Several BTSs can share the port bandwidth on the physical port to guarantee proper bandwidth for each BTS. Run the ADD IPVLANMAP command to configure the mapping between the IP and the VLAN. Step 6 Configure the IP PATH over the Abis interface. You should configure the mapping between DSCP and VLAN priority to implement the mapping between the service priorities at the network layer and the service priorities at the data link layer. Configure the congestion management. run the ADD LOGICALPORT command to implement several logical ports with logical bandwidth on one physical port. l Run the SET DSCPMAP command to configure the mapping between the DSCP and the VLAN priority. VLANID. That is. NOTE l l One Logical Port No. 46-24 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the services must be controlled when the services access through the IP PATH and logical port. The Priority Queue (PQ) and Weighted Round Robin (WRR) techniques of queue scheduling can be used to solve the congestion problem. The parameters must be consistent with those on the BSC side. The network device of layer three maps different DSCPs to different Per-Hop Behaviors (PHBs). and DSCP related to the service type over the A interface to achieve their mapping. PHB. l When the IP PATH is carried on the logical port. Run the SET SRVVLANMAP command and set VLAN ID. thus enhancing the security of the network.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . the QoS scheduling depends on the VLAN priority. The Destination IP Address and the port IP address must be on the same network segment. NOTE The BSC maps the data onto different Differentiated Services Code Points (DSCPs) or different VLAN priorities and VLAN IDs. specifies the physical port carried by the logical port. or resource groups to achieve multi-level admission control. 1. Run the SET QOSPROP command and set Queue Display Type to REJECT or Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) to manage the congestion.

Run the ADD IPPATH command to configure the IP PATH. Set Transport Resource Bandwidth[kbps] to allocate the bandwidth. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. IP PATH Type consists of CS. Step 7 Configure the Abis MUX on the BSC and BTS. A maximum of five levels can be configured for the transport resource group. but one logical port can correspond to multiple IP paths. If IP Path Type is set to CS or PS. That is. That is. If IP Path Type is set to QoS.. Run the ADD BSCABISMUXFLOW command and set Service Type for the BTS. and one IP path can correspond to only one logical port. Ltd. Upper Class Transport Resource Group No. PS. When multi-level resource group is configured. Set MUX Sub Frame Threshold. Run the SET BSCABISMUXPARA command and set ABIS-MUX Global Enable Flag to ENABLE(Enable). The packets with the same attributes can be multiplexed. must be identified to perform multi-level admission control. The group number of the upper class transport resource must be different from that of the lower class transport resource. the efficiency of the IP transmission over the Abis interface is improved. and DSCP value can be multiplexed into one packet. l l l 2. two-level admission control can be implemented. If Carry Flag is set to LOGPORT(Logical Port). you are advised to set the IP PATH to be carried on the resource groups. destination IP address. Configure the congestion management. MUX Packet Length Threshold. Each BTS can be configured with multiple IP paths for carrying various services. 46-25 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . In addition. each BTS can be configured with one CS IP path or one PS IP path. NOTE l l The IP path ID must be unique in one BSC. l l l 3. Run the ADD RSCGRP command to configure the resource groups. Reserved Bandwidth Threshold[%]>Congestion Bandwidth Threshold[%]>Congestion Clear Bandwidth Threshold[%]. Then. Run the SET LDR command and set from LDR First to LDR Fourth to achieve the dynamic TCHF-TCHH conversion of the CS services and the downspeeding of the PS services. Then the packets with the same source IP addresses. and QoS (carries both CS and PS). 1. To reduce the speed of the accessed services during the congestion control and bandwidth reserve can improve the system capacity. only the packets that have the same source IP addresses. NOTE l If Is First Class Transport Resource Group is set to NO(No). destination IP address. 2. the upper-level transport resource bandwidth cannot be higher than the local-level transport resource bandwidth. Set Local Class Transport Resource Bandwidth[kbps] and set Reserved Bandwidth Threshold[%]>Congestion Bandwidth Threshold[%]>Congestion Clear Bandwidth Threshold[%] to configure the bandwidth and threshold of resource groups. The entered BTS Index must exist.1ms] to configure the multiplexing mode. Then.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) l 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission If the bandwidth of the intermediate transmission network restricts the access of services. and service type can be multiplexed and the peer end can correctly demultiplex. the services must be controlled when the services access through the IP PATH and logical port. the IP BTS must connect the GFGUB/GOGUB in the BSC. the physical port that corresponds to the logical port must be the port on the board on the BSC side. each BTS can be configured with one QoS IP path. and Time Out[0. NOTE The Abis MUX technology is used to multiplex several packets into one packet.

AN=ENABLE. Ltd. PortType=FE. MASK="255.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 3. /*Add the Port IP address*/ ADD PHYPORTIP: SRN=0.8. This is called ping attack. MTU=1000. PT=FE. IPINDEX=0. perform the IP PM function from the BTS to the BSC. Run the MOD PTUPARA command. /*Set the IP communication type over the Abis interface*/ SET ITFIPTYPE: AIPTYPE=DEVIP.0". /*Add the GFGUB*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0.8.255.0".8. NOTE If the external device frequently pings the BTS.8. Step 8 Configure the LAPD optimization.0". IPADDR="8. Run the ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW command and configure the parameters corresponding to those on the BSC side. BT=GFGUB. 46-26 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. /*Add the BFD*/ ADD BFD: SRN=0. SN=17. Step 10 Set BTS Ping Switch to Off. the network KPIs are improved. IPADDR2="8.255. If BTS Ping Switch is set to ON(On).8. Then. /*Add the BSC route*/ ADD IPRT: SRN=0. The flow retransmission is decreased and the utilization of the bandwidth is improved. Set BTS Index to specify a BTS detected by the IP PM. PEERIP="8..3". Then. /*Add the device IP address*/ ADD DEVIP: SRN=0. SN=17.0".255. the BTS discards all ping packets.5. BackType=OUTPEER. 4.255. The example script of configuring the GFGUB in active/standby mode and configuring the device communication type and the BFD detection. PN=0.1". IPINDEX=0. BT=GFGUB. MASK="255. NOTE The IP PM monitors the transmission network by rapidly detecting the QoS of the intermediate network. which belongs to DOS attack. Run the ADD IPPM command and set Direction to UP. l l Run the ADD IPPM command and set Direction to DOWN. ----End Example Configure the IP transmission over the Abis interface.5.8. Run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command and set LAPD window adjust switch to ALLOW (Allow) to start the LAPD optimization. NOTE The impacts of configuring the LAPD optimization are as follows: l l The QoS tolerance of the LAPD link is enhanced and the call drop rate due to poor quality of the link is reduced.6. This function requires the support of the BTS and BSC. SN=17.4". PN=0. SN=17. The BTS may break down if it is pinged a lot.3". Run the MOD PTUPARA command and set ABIS-MUX Global Enable Flag to ENABLE(Enable). perform the IP PM function from the BSC to the BTS.6. SN=17. MASK="255. Step 9 Configure the IP Performance Monitor (IP PM). The length of the period is determined by IPPM Packet Send Period[100ms]. When an IP PM session is activated. IPADDR="5.8. the BTS receives all ping packets. / *Set the attribute of an Ethernet port*/ SET ETHPORTPROP: SRN=0.255.255. Thus. if the parameter is set to OFF(Off). GATEWAY="8. PORT=0. SN=17. the sending end sends the FM message periodically and then determines the packet loss based on the BR message received from the receiving end. IPADDR="6. the BTS responds to the ping requests. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .8.6".

Ltd. DSCP=0. CARRYFLAG=LOGPORT. DRPTYPE=REJECT. VLANFLAG=ENABLE. Scenario The Gb over IP is used for signaling and PS signals transmission in the BSS system. ADD IPPM: BTSID=0. see Verifying the Control Plane on the Abis Interface (Abis over IP) in the BSC Commissioning Guide. VLANPRI=7. PATHT=CS. SERVICETYPE=CSVOICE. /*Configure the Abis MUX*/ /*Set ABIS-MUX Global Enable Flag of the interface board on the BSC side to Enable*/ SET BSCABISMUXPARA: SRN=0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. VLANID=2. BTSNAME="BTS3012". BTSNAME="BTS3012". BTSWTR=0. DIRECTION=UP. WQDT=PQ. and VLANID*/ MOD BTSVLAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. /*Configure the mapping of the service type on the BTS side. INTTYPE=ABISINT. /*Configure the congestion management*/ SET LDR: LDRFST=PSDOWN. UPTHP=3. /*Configure BTS Ping Switch to Off*/ MOD PTUPARA: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. 46-27 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . MINRXINTERVAL=30. VLANSWITCH=YES.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission MINTXINTERVAL=30.6 Configuring Gb over IP This describes how to configure Gb over IP on the Local Maintenance Terminal. VLANID=2. BTSPINGSWITCH=OFF. and VLANID*/ SET SRVVLANMAP: ITFTYPE=Abis. SHPC=3. SHPA=3. DSCP=0. SLOTNO=17. LPN=0. Verify that the physical links on the Abis interface is normal. ABISMUXFLAG=ENABLE. SPENABLE=YES. /*Set ABIS-MUX Global Enable Flag of the interface board on the BTS side to Enable*/ MOD PTUPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. /*Configure the IP PM*/ ADD IPPM: BTSID=0. SRVTYPE=CSVOICE. SHPB=3.9. /*Add the data record of the Abis MUX on the BTS side and set the service type to CS Voice*/ ADD BTSABISMUXFLOW: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. /*Perform the congestion management with priority queue (PQ)*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0. DIRECTION=DOWN. PMPRD=1. BTSIDX=0. ABISMUXFLAG=ENABLE. /*Configure the mapping of the service type. SN=17. SN=17. DSCP. DSCP. RSTHP=4. TRMBAND=10. PHB=EF. VLANID=2. For details. DSCP=0. Verify that the control plane on the A interface is normal. Postrequisite l Verifying Abis over IP 1. SERVICETYPE=CSVOICE. SN=17. BTSID=0. GRPID=0.1". /*Priority mapping*/ /*Configure the mapping between the DSCP and the VLAN priority*/ SET DSCPMAP: SRN=0. SPBW=3200. SN=17. SN=17.8. MINRXINTERVAL=30. BTSNAME="BTS3012". TRMTYPE=IP. /*Configure the QoS attribute of a port*/ /*Configure the traffic shaping for a physical port*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0.5". For details. ISFIRSTCLASS=YES. 46. /*Configure the IP PATH over the Abis interface*/ /*Configure the logical port*/ ADD LOGICALPORT: SRN=0. see Verifying the Physical Links on the Abis Interface (Abis over IP) in the BSC Commissioning Guide. DSTIPADDR="8. LPN=0. LOCTRMBAND=10. SYNMODE=CONSYN. /*Configure the Clock Over IP*/ MOD IPCLKSRV: CLOSERIP="9. SRVTYPE=CSVOICE. /*Configure the LAPD optimization*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: WINADJSWITCH=ALLOW. SERVICETYPE=CSVOICE. SRVTYPE=CSVOICE. PN=0. BTSIDX=0. DETECTMULT=3. / *Configure the IP PATH*/ ADD IPPATH: PATHID=1. BANDWIDTH=10. / *Add the data record of the Abis MUX on the BSC side and set the service type to CS Voice*/ ADD BSCABISMUXFLOW: SRN=0. /*Configure the mapping between the IP address and the VLAN priority*/ ADD IPVLANMAP: SRN=0. IDXTYPE=BYNAME. DETECTMULT=3. PMPRD=1. SN=17. ADD BTSBFD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. PN=0. PN=0. MINTXINTERVAL=30. /*Configure the resource group*/ ADD RSCGRP: SRN=0. 2. VLANPRI=7.9.8. BTSIDX=0. CGTHP=4.

one GFGUG can be configured with eight ports numbered from zero to seven.3 Gb over IP Configuration Data. For details. Ltd. go to Step 2. Run the ADD BRD command to add a GDPUP. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. When the port IP address is used for communication. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Procedure Step 1 Configure the GDPUP. The A/Abis interface board can be configured with only one device IP address. The Gb interface board can be configured with up to five device IP addresses. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Run the SET ETHPORTPROP command and set Port Type to configure the port attributes of the GFGUG. An empty slot for configuring the GFGUG is in the subrack. see Activate BSC License. 3.5. l l If the FE transmission is used. NOTE 2. Set Back Type to OUTPEER(Active/Standby Mode) to enhance the networking reliability. run the SET PCUTYPE command to set PCU Type to INNER(Inner PCU). Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the peer device should be configured with the static route to the IP address of the BSC even if the BSC is directly connected to the peer device. see 46. The BSC supports communication through the device IP address or port IP address. l l l l Preparation For the GFGUG configuration data. BSC and SGSN Prerequisite l l l l The built-in PCU is configured. the static route is not required. 4.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Impact None. The BFD is supported by only 3012 series base stations. Run the ADD DEVIP to configure the device IP address. If the communication type is PORTIP(PORT IP). 1. It is not supported by 3900 series base stations. Step 2 Configure the GFGUG. 46-28 Run the SET ITFIPTYPE command and set Gb-interface Communication IP type. NEs Involved BTS. If the GE transmission is used. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . When the device IP address is used for communication. one GFGUG can be configured with two ports numbered zero and four. 2.. Configure the Gb over IP that is restricted by the license. run the ADD BRD command to add a GFGUG. 1.

4 Configuring A over IP. 5. SN=8. in the 46.4 Configuring A over IP. In active/standby mode.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) NOTE 46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission The device IP address is the logical IP address used for communication. Run the ADD IPRT command and configure the BSC route. For details. 6. /*Configure the built-in PCU*/ SET PCUTYPE: TYPE=INNER. Each port can be configured with six IP addresses and all IP addresses of each port must be configured on different network segments. add a BSC route after their port IP addresses are configured. 46-29 . Gateway IP Address must be on the same network segment as the port IP address of the GFGUG... /*Configure the built-in PCU and the GDPUP*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. The example script of configuring the GFGUG in active/standby mode and configuring the device communication type and the BFD detection. the IP addresses of related ports must be configured on the same network segment. Run the ADD NSVLLOCAL command to configure local NSVL. In the case of active and standby boards. NOTE The Gb interface does not support the VLAN priority mapping. 5. 2. 4. Step 4 The networking reliability configuration of Gb over IP is the same as that of A over IP. Step 5 The QoS mechanism configuration of the Gb interface is the same as that of the A interface. run the ADD SGSNNODE command to configure the SGSN. Run the ADD PTPBVC command to configure the PTPBVC. BT=GDPUP. Run the ADD NSE command to configure the NSE. For details. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Run the ADD NSVLREMOTE command to configure remote NSVL. 3. Ltd. in the 46. see the Configure the QoS mechanism of the A interface. The address is valid for all the ports on the board. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 3 Configure Gb over IP. 1. NOTE The principles of configuring the port IP address are as follows: l l l The IP address of the port and that of the device must be on different network segments. Run the ADD PHYPORTIP command to configure the port IP address. see the Configure the reliability mechanism of the A interface. ----End Example Configure the IP transmission over the Gb interface. NOTE The principles of configuring the BSC route are as follows: l l l Destination IP Address should be set as the destination the network address but not a single IP address.

15.13". Verify that the NSVLs are available. IPADDR="13. Ltd. SN=18. SN=18. BackType=OUTPEER. /*Add the Port IP address*/ ADD PHYPORTIP: SRN=0. MASK="255.13.255. see Verifying the SIGBVC in the BSC Commissioning Guide.13. PN=0. MASK="255. IP="12. SRN=0. BT=GFGUG. 3. PN=0. see Verifying the IP Routes on the Gb Interface in the BSC Commissioning Guide. SN=18. /*Configure Gb over IP*/ ADD SGSNNODE: CnOpName="46000".1". Verify that the IP routes on the Gb interface are normal. MASK="255. BT=GFGUG.255.13. SN=18. HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) /*Add the GFGUG*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. MTU=1000.0". DRPTYPE=REJECT.12". CGTHP=4. see Verifying the NSVL in the BSC Commissioning Guide. SN=18.12. CnOpName="46000".0".255. AN=ENABLE.0". IPINDEX=0. BVCI=2. ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=1. 2. /*Set the Ethernet port attribute*/ SET ETHPORTPROP: SRN=0. IP="15. CNId=1. IPINDEX=0. ADD NSVLLOCAL: NSVLI=0. /*Add the device IP address*/ ADD DEVIP: SRN=0.15. IDXTYPE=BYCELLNAME. NSEI=1. For details. PT=FE. /*Perform congestion management with priority queue (PQ)*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0. /*Add the BFD*/ ADD BFD: SRN=0. SIGLW=100. RSTHP=4. SIGLW=100. PortType=FE.0". SN=18.12. Postrequisite l Verifying Gb over IP 1. ISNCMODE=STATIC. MINRXINTERVAL=30. CELLNAME="CELL_1". 4. For details.1". /*Configure the QoS attribute of a port*/ /*Configure traffic shaping for a physical port*/ SET QOSPROP: SRN=0. IPADDR2="13. Verify that the PTP BVCs are available. For details. UPTHP=3. NSEI=1.46 Configuring BSS IP Transmission BackType=NONE. IPADDR="15. MINTXINTERVAL=30. SRVLW=100. SRVLW=100. SN=18. ADD NSE: NSEI=1. IPADDR="12. PN=0. For details. see Verifying the PTPBVC in the BSC Commissioning Guide.13.13. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .255. PN=0.12..15".15.13. SRN=0.13. PT=GB_OVER_IP. SN=18.13. /*Set the IP communication type over the Gb interface*/ SET ITFIPTYPE: GBIPTYPE=DEVIP.255. SN=18. 46-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SPBW=3200.4". CNId=1.12". ADD NSVLREMOTE: NSVLI=1.15. /*Add the BSC route*/ ADD IPRT: SRN=0. UDPPN=5555. SPENABLE=YES. DETECTMULT=3. PEERIP="13.255. Verify that the SIG BVCs are available. WQDT=PQ. PORT=0.12. GATEWAY="13. UDPPN=5000.

signaling data. The Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS function cannot be enabled at the same time as the Flex Abis or BTS local switching function. This feature should be supported by the BTS. The transmission mode of the HubBTS is HDLC_HubBTS. 47-1 . The BSC supports the Abis transmission optimization or HubBTS in E1/T1 or STM-1 transmission mode. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the HubBTS function can be implemented by installing a DPTU in the BTS. For details. The GEHUB is configured. the DPTU must be configured in the BTS. None. Prerequisite l l The Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS function is license-controlled.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. It statistically multiplexes the traffic data.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS 47 Scenario Impact Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS The Abis Transmission Optimization feature introduces the HDLC frame and HDLC channel without changing the physical transmission mode. and OM data on the HDLC channel to obtain a higher transmission gain through voice frame compression and multiplexing. l l l l l l Preparation The difference between the HubBTS and the Abis transmission optimization lies in the transmission mode. whereas the transmission mode of the Abis transmission optimization is HDLC. The GMPS/GEPS holding the GEHUB is configured with the GDPUX. NEs Involved BTS. see Activate BSC License. The HubBTS converges and forwards data. The utilization of the transmission resources are improved. BSC NOTE Based on the Abis transmission optimization. Ltd. In HubBTS mode.

Table 47-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring HDLC_HubBTS service mode for BTS3012 Parameter ID BTSNAME TYPE UPNODE SRN SN PN BTSDESC MPMODE FlexAbisMode AbisByPassMode ServiceMode DCELLNAME DCTYPE DCMCC DCMNC DCLAC DCCI Parameter Name BTS name BTS Type Up Node Type Subrack No. BTS Description Multiplexing Mode Flex Abis Mode Abis By Pass Mode Service Type Cell Name Cell Type Cell MCC Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI Example BTS3012 BTS3012 BSC 0 26 0 BTS3012_Hub MODE4_1 Fix Abis(Fix Abis) FALSE(Not Support) HDLC_HubBTS HDLC_HubBTS_CE LL GSM900 460 01 8240 1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 47-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) The following is an example of configuring HDLC_HubBTS service mode on the GEHUB of the GEPS subrack for BTS3012. Slot No.. Port No. Ltd. .

NOTE The HDLC_HubBTS does not support the ring topology. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. OPC=h'aa. DCTYPE = GSM900. /*Add a GXPUM. run the ADD BTS command and set the Service Type to HDLC_HubBTS. Ltd. /*Add a BTS3012 in HDLC_HubBTS service mode*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME = "BTS3012". GXPUT and a GDPUX*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. ----End Result Example An example script of configuring Abis transmission optimization or HubBTS is as follows: /*Add an OPC*/ ADD OPC: NAME="BSC001". BT=GXPUT. NI=NATB. /*Add Subrack-OPC Mapping*/ ADD SROPCMAP: SRN=0. UPNODE = BSC. ADD BRD: SRN=0. and FLEX_ABIS. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. BT=GXPUM. SN=2. CNID=0. OPC=h'aa. TRXBN=0. BackType = OUTPEER. SN=26. MPMODE=MODE4_1. CPLMode=UNSUPPORT. DPC=h'cc. SRN=0. bypass. DCMNC="01". BT=GDPUX. TRX Freq. while the HDLC does not support bypass and FLEX_ABIS. SN=0.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS Parameter ID CPLMode TRXBN FREQ Parameter Name Separate Mode TRX Board No. BackType=NONE. FlexAbisMode = FIX_ABIS. BackType=NONE. TYPE = BTS3012. BackType=NONE. ADD BRD: SRN=0. BT=GEHUB. /*Add a GEHUB*/ ADD BRD: SRN=0. BTSDESC = "BTS3012_Hub". FREQ=988. DCLAC=8240. SN=26. The service mode of the HubBTS is HDLC_HubBTS.. DPCGIDX=1. PN=0. NETSTRUCT=BIT14. WorkMode=E1. DCELLNAME = "HDLC_HubBTS_CELL". and that of Abis transmission optimization is HDLC. AbisByPassMode = False. /*Add a DPC*/ ADD N7DPC: NAME="MSC001". 47-3 . Example UNSUPPORT(Not Support) 0 988 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning NOTE The HubBTS and the Abis transmission optimization are different in the configuration of the service mode. SN=8. ServiceMode = HDLC_HubBTS. DCMCC="460". DCCI=1.

run the LST BTS command. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . run the MOD BTSSRVMODE command to set Service Type to TDM or IP. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the parameter is set to HDLC_HubBTS.. Check the setting of Service Type. it indicates that the function of Abis transmission optimization or HubBTS is deactivated. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Check the setting of Service Type. 2. run the LST BTS command.47 Configuring Abis Transmission Optimization or HubBTS HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Postrequisite l Verifying Abis transmission optimization or HubBTS – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 47-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. l Deactivating Abis Transmission optimization or HubBTS 1. it indicates that the function of Abis transmission optimization or HubBTS is activated. If the parameter is set to TDM or IP.

Prerequisite l l The communication between the BSC and the SGSN is normal. Ltd. A cell named CELL_1 is served by two SGSNs and the telecom operator is named 46000. With this feature.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 48 Configuring SGSN Pool 48 Scenario Impact None. Preparation This operation takes the minimum configuration of an SGSN pool as an example. PS services are evenly distributed among SGSNs in the SGSN pool. SGSN pool should be supported by the SGSN. Table 48-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring SGSN pool Data Type SGSN pool switch Parameter ID CnOpName POOLALLOW NRILEN Parameter Name Operator Name Allow SGSN Pool NRI length Example 46000 ALLOW(Allow) 3 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the traffic on the BSC is evenly distributed to the SGSNs in the pool according to the network resource identifier (NRI) or load balancing principle. 48-1 . NEs Involved BSC and SGSN Configuring SGSN Pool This feature enables a maximum of 32 SGSNs to form a resource pool to provide services for the subscribers belonging to one group of BSCs. In addition.. one BSC can be connected to multiple SGSNs at the same time.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .48 Configuring SGSN Pool HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID NULLNRI Parameter Name NullNRI Value Example 4 Source Network planning Table 48-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the first SGSN Data Type Attributes of SGSN 0 Parameter ID CnOpName CNId Mapping between the NRI and SGSN 0 NRI CnOpName CNId Mapping between the NSE and SGSN 0 NSEI SRN PT CnOpName CNId Mapping between CELL_1 and SGSN 0 NSEI BVCI IDXTYPE CELLNAME Parameter Name Operator Name SGSN Node ID NRI Value Operator Name SGSN Node ID NSE Identifier Agent Subrack No.. Ltd. Subnetwork Protocol Type Operator Name SGSN Node ID NSE Identifier PTPBVC Identifier Index Type Cell Name Example 46000 0 3 46000 0 10 0 GB_OVER_FR (Gb over FR) 46000 0 10 2 BYCELLNAME CELL_1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 48-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Set Allow SGSN Pool to ALLOW(Allow).HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 48 Configuring SGSN Pool Table 48-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the second SGSN Data Type Attributes of SGSN 1 Parameter ID CnOpName CNId Mapping between the NRI and SGSN 1 NRI CnOpName CNId Mapping between the NSE and SGSN 1 NSEI SRN PT CnOpName CNId Mapping between CELL_1 and SGSN 1 NSEI BVCI IDXTYPE CELLNAME Parameter Name Operator Name SGSN Node ID NRI Value Operator Name SGSN Node ID NSE Identifier Agent Subrack No. 48-3 . The values of NRI length and NullNRI Value should be the same as that on the SGSN through negotiation. Subnetwork Protocol Type Operator Name SGSN Node ID NSE Identifier PTPBVC Identifier Index Type Cell Name Example 46000 1 4 46000 1 23 0 GB_OVER_FR (Gb over FR) 46000 1 23 3 BYCELLNAME CELL_1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Set Operator Name and the SGSN node ID to add an SGSN. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the ADD SGSNNODE. Ltd.. run the SET SGSNPOOL command. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

run the ADD NSE command. CELLNAME="CELL_1". /*Add the NSE with the NSE identifier as 10 to SGSN 0*/ ADD NSE: NSEI=10. 2.The settings of other parameters should be consistent with the settings on the SGSN. NOTE The value of NRI Value should be the same as that on the SGSN through negotiation. CNId=1. Set the corresponding NSE identifier. The configuration of the first SGSN that serves CELL_1 is complete. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If so. /*Configure the mapping between the NRI and SGSN 0*/ ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=3. CnOpName="46000". Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NRILEN=3. run the SET SGSNPOOL command to set Allow SGSN Pool to DENY(deny). Ltd. Step 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add the second SGSN to complete the configuration of the second SGSN that serves CELL_1. it indicates that the SGSN pool function is normally enabled. BVCI=3. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. PT=GB_OVER_FR. The values of Operator Name and SGSN Node ID should be the same as those set for the SGSN added in step 2. run the DSP PTPBVC command to view and record the PTP BVCs in the normal state. Postrequisite l Verifying SGSN pool 1. CNId=1. /*Add a PTPBVC to configure the mapping between CELL_1 and SGSN 0*/ ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=10. IDXTYPE=BYCELLNAME. /*Add a PTPBVC to configure the mapping between CELL_1 and SGSN 1*/ ADD PTPBVC: NSEI=23. CNId=0. CNId=1. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example Example scripts of configuring SGSN pool are as follows: /*Enable the SGSN pool function*/ SET SGSNPOOL: CnOpName="46000". /*Add the NSE with the NSE identifier as 23 to SGSN 1*/ ADD NSE: NSEI=23. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Configure the mapping between the NRI and SGSN 1*/ ADD NRISGSNMAP: NRI=4. /*Add an SGSN with the SGSN node ID as 1*/ ADD SGSNNODE: CnOpName="46000". POOLALLOW=ALLOW. CnOpName="46000". SRN=0. l Deactivating SGSN pool 1. CNId=0. CNId=0. run the ADD PTPBVC command. NULLNRI=4. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 48-4 .48 Configuring SGSN Pool HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Check whether the FLOW CONTROL messages on all the PTP BVCs in the normal state are sent from the BSC to the SGSN by referring to Tracing PTP Messages on the Gb Interface. SRN=0. /*Add an SGSN with the SGSN node ID as 0*/ ADD SGSNNODE: CnOpName="46000". Set NSE Identifier to add the NSE to the new SGSN. NOTE Set SGSN Node ID to the value of that set for the SGSN added in step 2.. CnOpName="46000". IDXTYPE=BYCELLNAME. PT=GB_OVER_FR. BVCI=2. CELLNAME="CELL_1". run the ADD NRISGSNMAP command to configure the mapping between the NRI and the SGSN. CnOpName="46000".

run the LST SGSNPOOL command. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. Check the setting of Allow SGSN Pool.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 48 Configuring SGSN Pool 2. 48-5 . it indicates that the transmit diversity is deactivated.. If the parameter is set to DENY(deny).

.

49. 49-1 . a maximum of four operators (including a primary operator) are supported. For details. In RAN sharing mode. In addition.. The MSCs of different operators must use the same SS7 signaling link rate type. antenna system. transmission. 49. In RAN sharing mode. which implements comprehensive management of all the resources in the GBSS. Ltd. The shared GBSS uses a uniform network management system.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing 49 About This Chapter Prerequisite l l Configuring RAN Sharing On the condition that independency of CNs of multiple operators is maintained.3 Binding the Cell and the Operator This describes how to bind the cell and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BM/TC combined. they must use the same transmission mode (TDM or IP) over the A interface. Each operator has an independent CN (MSC and SGSN). and so on) in the GBSS network simultaneously. RAN Sharing supports a maximum of four operators.1 Configuring Operator Information This describes how to configure the operator information on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTS. RAN Sharing enables multiple operators to share one GBSS network so that they can use the resources (including the BSC. l l l l 49. a maximum of four CBCs are supported. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.5 Binding the SGSN and Operator Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The RAN sharing function is license-controlled. The operators must use the same networking mode (BM/TC separated.4 Binding the MSC and Operator This describes how to bind the MSC and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. see Activate BSC License. 49. 49. or A over IP).2 Configuring BTS Sharing This describes how to configure BTS sharing on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

49. 49. 49.8 Configuring the Distributed BTS TRX to Support RAN Sharing This describes how to configure the distributed BTS TRX to support the RAN sharing function on the Local Maintenance Terminal..49 Configuring RAN Sharing HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) This describes how to bind the SGSN and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal.9 Verifying and Deactivating RAN Sharing This describes how to verify and deactivate RAN sharing on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 49. Ltd. 49-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.7 Configuring RAN Sharing to Support Multiple CBCs This describes how to configure multiple CBCs on the Local Maintenance Terminal.6 Binding the PCU and Operator This describes how to bind the PCU and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

The GDPUC or GDPUX is already configured.. 49-3 . the operators are classified into the following types: Primary operator and Secondary operator. l Preparation Table 49-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the primary operator information Parameter ID OPNAME SPTRANSHARING HOBTWNOTHOP ALLOW Parameter Name Master Operator Name Support Sharing Handover Between Operators Allow Example Master YES(YES) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 49-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the secondary operator information Parameter ID OPNAME MCC MNC SPPRTCB Parameter Name Accessorial Operator Name MCC MNC Support Cell Broadcast Handover Between Operators Allow Example coop1 460 14 SPPRTSTANDARD (SupportStandard CB) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning HOBTWNOTHOP ALLOW Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. a maximum of four operators (including a primary operator) are supported.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing 49. Prerequisite l l l The BSC supports the RAN sharing function. Ltd.1 Configuring Operator Information This describes how to configure the operator information on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In RAN sharing mode. There is only one primary operator. In RAN sharing mode. Others are secondary operators.

49. /*Add the secondary operator*/ ADD COOPBASIC: OPNAME="coop1".2 Configuring BTS Sharing This describes how to configure BTS sharing on the Local Maintenance Terminal. MCC="460". Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. HoBtwnOthOpAllow=YES. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Preparation Table 49-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring BTS sharing Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX SHARINGALLOW Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Sharing Allow Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning 49-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. go to step 2. HOBTWNOTHOPALLOW=YES.. and Handover Between Operators Allow as required. Support Sharing.49 Configuring RAN Sharing HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Prerequisite l l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). run the ADD COOPBASIC command to configure the secondary operator information as required. ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Configure primary operator information*/ MOD BSCBASIC: OPNAME="Master". Set Master Operator Name. SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD. SptRanSharing=YES. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST BSCBASIC command to check whether Support Sharing and Handover Between Operators Allow are set to YES(YES). NOTE l l The secondary operator can be added only when Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). If they are set to No. Ltd. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to configure the primary operator information. The configured 3012 series base stations or 3900 series base stations support the RAN sharing function. Handover Between Operators Allow can be changed from YES(YES) to NO(NO) only when no neighboring cell relations in this BSC are affected by this parameter. MNC="14".

go to the next step. /*Configure the BTS sharing parameters*/ MOD BTSSHARING: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. 49. Sharing Allow is set to YES(YES). Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If they are not. run the LST BTSSHARING command to check whether Sharing Allow is set to YES(YES).. BTSIDX=0. The script for configuring the BTS sharing is as follows: /*Query the BTS sharing configuration*/ LST BTSSHARING: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. BTSIDX=0. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. go to the next step. run the MOD BTSSHARING command to set Sharing Allow to YES(YES). run the SET OPCELL command to bind the cell and operator. NOTE Sharing Allow can be changed from YES(YES) to NO(NO) only when the cells under the BTS belong to the primary operator. If the value is NO(NO).3 Binding the Cell and the Operator This describes how to bind the cell and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 49-5 . ----End Example Take DBS3900 GSM as an example. Prerequisite l l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). Ltd. Preparation Table 49-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the cell and operator Parameter ID IDXTYPE IDXTYPE CELLIDX OPNAME Parameter Name Cell Index Type Cell Index Type Cell Index Operator Name Example BYALL(By All) BYIDX(By Index) 1 coop1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST OPCELL command to check whether the operator and cell are already bound. SHARINGALLOW=YES.

Ltd.4 Binding the MSC and Operator This describes how to bind the MSC and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET OPMSC command to bind the DPC and operator. OPNAME="coop1". Preparation Table 49-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the MSC and operator Parameter ID IDXTYPE DPC OPNAME Parameter Name Index Type DPC Code Operator Name Example BYDPC(By DPC) h'cc coop1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The parameter Handover Between Operators Allow is set to Yes for the secondary operator. /*Bind the cell and operator*/ SET OPCELL:IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . If neighboring cell relations exist in the configured cell. The cells configured with enhanced dual-band network must belong to the same operator. l l l ----End Example An example script for binding the cell and operator is as follows: /*Query the relation between the operator and cell*/ LST OPCELL: IDXTYPE=BYALL. 49.49 Configuring RAN Sharing HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) CAUTION l l l Handover Between Operators Allow is set to YES(YES). The SS7 signaling point or M3UA destination entity are correctly configured. Prerequisite l l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). If the PTPBVC is already configured. the NSE must correspond to the operator when you change the operator of a cell. The operator is the primary operator by default when a new cell is added. 49-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. CELLIDX=1. verify that the new operator allows neighboring cell relations. The BSC is shared by at least two operators.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CNId=0.6 Binding the PCU and Operator This describes how to bind the PCU and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD SGSNNODE command to bind the SGSN and operator. l ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Bind the MSC and operator*/ SET OPMSC: IDXTYPE=BYDPC. 49. the DPC and M3UA are configured for the primary operator by default. Preparation Parameter ID CNOPNAME CNID Parameter Name Operator Name SGSN Node ID Example coop1 0 Source Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. you must run the SET OPMSC command.5 Binding the SGSN and Operator This describes how to bind the SGSN and operator on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) NOTE 49 Configuring RAN Sharing l When you run the ADD N7DPC command to add the DPC or run the ADD M3DE command to add the M3UA entity. 49. 49-7 . ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Bind the SGSN and operator*/ ADD SGSNNODE: CnOpName="coop1". Ltd. The SET OPMSC command can bind only the destination entity with the subsystem numbered 254 rather than 143. OPNAME="coop1". If you bind the MSC and secondary operator.. DPC=h'cc. PCU Type is set to Inner. Prerequisite l l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES).

An example script is as follows: /*Bind the PCU and operator*/ SET OPMSC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . OPNAME="coop1". Prerequisite l l l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES).49 Configuring RAN Sharing HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Prerequisite l l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). PCU Type is set to Outer. The operator supports the standard cell broadcast. ----End Example Suppose the name of the secondary operator is "coop 1" and that of the external PCU is "pcu1". NAME="pcu1".7 Configuring RAN Sharing to Support Multiple CBCs This describes how to configure multiple CBCs on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Preparation Table 49-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for binding the PCU and operator Parameter ID IDXTYPE NAME OPNAME Parameter Name Index Type PCU Name Operator Name Example BYNAME (By PCU Name) pcu1 coop1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 49-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 49.. The BSC supports the standard cell broadcast. run the ADD SGSNNODE command to bind the PCU and operator.

CBCPRT=0.5.5. OPNAME="coop1".5. /*Add CBC*/ ADD CBC: CBCNAME="cbc1". An example script is as follows: /*Make the secondary operator support the standard cell broadcast*/ MOD COOPBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Ltd. NOTE The BSC supports up to four standard CBCs. l Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the operator is the primary operator.5".5 0 coop1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 Set Support Cell Broadcast so that the operator supports the standard cell broadcast. 49-9 . SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD. One operator can use only one CBC whereas a CBC can belong to multiple operators. CBCIP="5.5. OPNAME="coop1". /*Make the primary operator support the standard cell broadcast*/ MOD COOPBASIC: SpprtCB=SPPRTSTANDARD. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing Preparation Table 49-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring RAN sharing to support multiple CBCs Parameter ID IDXTYPE OPNAME SPPRTCB CBCNAME CBCIP CBCPRT OPNAME Parameter Name Index Type Accessorial Operator Name Support Cell Broadcast CBC Name CBC IP CBC port Owned Operator Example BYNAME (By Name) coop1 SPPRTSTANDARD (SupportStandard CB) cbc1 5. run the MOD COOPBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD (SupportStandard CB). run the MOD BSCBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to set Support Cell Broadcast to SPPRTSTANDARD (SupportStandard CB). ----End Example Suppose the name of the secondary operator is "coop1". run the ADD CBC command to add CBC.. l If the operator is the secondary operator.

Preparation Table 49-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the distributed BTS TRX to support RAN sharing Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX RXUIDXTYPE SRN SN RXUTYPE SPTSHARING Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index RXU Index Type Subrack No. only the MRRU/DRRU/DRFU/MBTU supports the RAN sharing function. The BTS is a distributed BTS. Slot No. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . run the MOD BTSSHARING command to set RanSharing Support to YES(YES). Ltd. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. If the value is NO(NO).. The BTS configured with the DRRU/DRFU/MRRU/GRRU/MRFU/GRFU/MBTU supports the RAN sharing function. The script is as follows: 49-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.49 Configuring RAN Sharing HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49. NOTE In the distributed BTS. go to the next step. Prerequisite l l l l Support Sharing is set to YES(YES). Sharing Allow is set to YES(YES). RXU Board Type RanSharing Support Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 SRNSN(SRNSN) 3 3 MRRU YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST RXUBP command to check whether RanSharing Support is set to YES(YES). ----End Example Take the MRRU as an example.8 Configuring the Distributed BTS TRX to Support RAN Sharing This describes how to configure the distributed BTS TRX to support the RAN sharing function on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 5. 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Deactivating RAN sharing 1. assume that two operators share the GBSS network. run the SET OPCELL command to set the primary operator as the operator serving the cell.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 49 Configuring RAN Sharing /*Query the parameters related to the RXU*/ LST RXUBP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the RMV CBC command to delete the settings of the CBC of the secondary operator. 2. run the SET RXUBP command to set RanSharing Support of the TRX board of the BTS to NO(NO). SRN=3.9 Verifying and Deactivating RAN Sharing This describes how to verify and deactivate RAN sharing on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 49-11 . RXUTYPE=MRRU. BTSIDX=0. 49. Ltd. Then. In the coverage area enabled with the RAN sharing function. BTSIDX=0. Procedure l Verifying RAN sharing NOTE In this section. RXUIDXTYPE=SRNSN. Verify that the call is initiated successfully. Verify that the call is initiated successfully. 7. run the RMV SGSNNODE command to delete the settings of the SGSN of the secondary operator. In the coverage area enabled with the RAN sharing function. Prerequisite The RAN sharing function is configured. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 6. /*Modify the basic data of the BSC to support RAN sharing*/ SET RXUBP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.. SPTSHARING=YES. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 8. run the SET OPPCU command to delete the settings of the PCU of the secondary operator. run the MOD BTSSHARING command to set Sharing Allow of the BTS to NO(NO). use MS 2 to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell belonging to the secondary operator. use MS 1 to make a call to a fixed-line phone in the cell belonging to the primary operator. SRN=3. RXUIDXTYPE=SRNSN. 2. MS 1 belongs to the primary operator and MS 2 belongs to the secondary operator. run the SET OPMSC command to delete the settings of the MSC of the secondary operator. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 3. SN=3. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to change the value of Support Sharing to NO(NO). run the RMV COOPBASIC command to delete the information about the secondary operator. 4. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. SN=3. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

use MS 2 to call a fixed-line phone in the original cell belonging to the secondary operator. Verifying deactivation of RAN sharing: In the original coverage area enabled with the RAN sharing function. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .. Verify that the call fails to be initiated. ----End 49-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.49 Configuring RAN Sharing HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 9. Ltd.

4 Deleting a Location Group This describes how to delete a location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 50.1 Adding a Location Group This describes how to add a location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal. or indoor coverage. tunnel. A subsite refers to a certain area physically covered by multiple RRU/RFUs that belong to the same BBU. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 50.5 Setting Binding Relations of Location Groups This describes how to set binding relations of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal. which is also called a cascading cell. 50.6 Deleting Binding Relations of Location Groups This describes how to delete binding relations of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell 50 About This Chapter Configuring Multi-site Cell This feature enables the subsites in different physical sites to be set to a logical cell. Ltd.2 Configuring Parameters of Location Groups This describes how to configure parameters of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal. a cascading cell can reduce handovers. 50. 50-1 . improve the coverage efficiency. In the scenarios such as railway..3 Verifying Configuration Information About Location Group This describes how to verify the configuration information about the location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal. and enhance the user experience. 50. 50.

Location Group No. Preparation Table 50-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding a location group Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSNAME CELLNO LOCGRPNO RXUNO Parameter Name Index Type BTS name Cell No. None.1 Adding a Location Group This describes how to add a location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal. The radio TRX number of number of radio TRXs between the primary location group and secondary location group. a base station supports a maximum of six location groups. A maximum of 24 logical TRXs can be configured in one location group. however. only DBS3036 and DBS3900 GSM support multi-site cells. Example BYNAME (BY NAME) DBS3036 0 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 50-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.50 Configuring Multi-site Cell HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50. must be consistent. A maximum of 18 location groups can be configured in one multi-site cell. only a main location group can be configured. RXU No. Scenario Impact Signal coverage under the high-speed railway and indoor coverage can be achieved. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . The board types between the primary location group and secondary location group need not be consistent. In a co-cell. In V300R008. Currently. Prerequisite The BTS is configured. and a location group supports a maximum of six TRXs. NEs Involved BSC and BTS NOTE l l l l l l l A maximum of 36 location groups can be configured under one base station. One location group belongs to only one Multi-site Cell..

----End Example An example script of adding the board numbered 0 to the location group (BTS name: DBS3036. If the entered location group number exists. NEs Involved BSC and BTS Prerequisite Location groups are added to the BTS. enter the information about of the target BTS. create a new location group with this location group number. LOCGRPNO=0. If the entered location group number does not exist. . The TRX board that is not bound to the TRX can be only added to the location group.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD LOCGRP command. cell number: 0. RXUNO=0. 50. Scenario Impact Signal coverage under the high-speed railway and indoor coverage can be achieved. and Location Group No. Cell No. Preparation Table 50-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring parameters of the BTS Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSNAME Parameter Name Index Type BTS Name Example BYNAME (BY NAME) DBS3036 Source Network planning Network planning 50-3 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.2 Configuring Parameters of Location Groups This describes how to configure parameters of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal. this position is called main location group. None. Ltd. and the RXU No. The TRX board that is bound to the TRX can be added to the main location group. of the co-cell. in the location group. BTSNAME="DBS3036". CELLNO=0. Then. the board can be added to the location group. NOTE l l l l l If the TRX board added in the first TRX board is bound to the TRX.. and location group number: 0) is as follows: ADD LOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.

RACH Min.50 Configuring Multi-site Cell HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID LOCGRPNO RACJACCLEV OUTPUTPOWERUNI T OUTPUTPOWER Parameter Name Location Group No.1W) 1210 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NOTE The default power of the location group is as follows: l l The default power of the MRRU or GRRU in the location group is 15 W. OUTPUTPOWERUNIT=0_1W. RACJACCLEV=-88. run the MOD LOCGRP command to configure parameters of the location groups. BTSNAME="DBS3036". 50. and the default power of the DRRU over 1800 MHz or 1900 MHz is 15 W. The default power of the DRRU over 850 MHz or 900 MHz in the location group is 18 W. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . LOCGRPNO=0. OUTPUTPOWER=1210. Ltd.. NEs Involved BSC and BTS 50-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script of configuring parameters of location groups is as follows: MOD LOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Scenario Impact Verify the configuration information about the location group None.Access Level Output Power Unit Output Power Example 0 -88 0_1W (Output Power Unit is 0.3 Verifying Configuration Information About Location Group This describes how to verify the configuration information about the location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

4 Deleting a Location Group This describes how to delete a location group on the Local Maintenance Terminal. see 50. run the RMV LOCGRP command to enter Location Group No. cell number is 0. ----End Example An example script of the information about all the location groups in the cell (BTS index: 0.. Scenario Impact Network planning None. RXUNO=2. CELLNO=0. 50-5 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the whole location group can be deleted. cell number: 0) is as follows: LST LOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. If the deletion is required. a board in the location group can be deleted. to be deleted. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the LST LOCGRP command to query whether parameters of Configuring Parameters of Location Groups are set successfully according to Index Type.. NEs Involved BSC and BTS Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. LOCGRPNO=0. cell number is 0.5 Setting Binding Relations of Location Groups This describes how to set binding relations of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLNO=0. and the RXU number is 2*/ RMV LOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. If you enters only RXU No. ----End Example Example scripts of deleting the configuration information about location groups are as follows: /*Delete the location group that the BTS name is DBS3036. and the location group number is 1*/ RMV LOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Ltd. /*Delete the board that the BTS name is DBS3036.6 Deleting Binding Relations of Location Groups. BTSIDX=0. Location groups with binding relations are not allowed to be deleted. CELLNO=0. NOTE l l l If you enters only location group number. and RXU No. 50. BTSNAME="DBS3036". the binding relation should be lifted first. For details. and the location group number is 0. LOCGRPNO=1. BTSNAME="DBS3036". 50.

None. Ltd. Sub-Location Group TRX Board No. The binding relation can be set only between the board of the main location group and that of the sublocation group. Sub-Location Group TRX Board Channel No. the antenna channel number is required. run the SET BINDLOCGRP command to set the logical TRX number of the TRX board in the main location group. ----End 50-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the TRX board number and channel number of the TRX board in the sub-location group that is bound to the TRX in the main location group. The main location group and sub-location groups with binding relations can be configured in only a co-cell. Preparation Table 50-3 Example of data negotiated and planned for setting binding relations of location groups Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX TRXNO TRXBN TRXPN Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Main Location Group Logical TRX No.50 Configuring Multi-site Cell HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Scenario Impact Signal coverage under the high-speed railway and indoor coverage can be achieved. The TRX of each main location group must be bound to the sub-location group. Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 0 4 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and can be also bound to multiple sub-location groups. NEs Involved BSC and BTS Prerequisite l l The co-cell is configured in the BTS. Main location group and sub-location group are configured in the co-cell.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . For the MRRU or GRRU. NOTE l l l l l The TRX on the TRX board in the main location group can be bound to all the channels in a sublocation group only once.

NEs Involved BSC and BTS Prerequisite l l The co-cell is configured in the BTS. In the co-cell. and then enter BTS Index or BTS Name. Ltd. TRXPN=0.. 50. the information about location groups in the cell and binding relations of location groups can be deleted.6 Deleting Binding Relations of Location Groups This describes how to delete binding relations of location groups on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the antenna channel number of the MRRU or DRRU is not required. there is binding relation between the TRX in the main location group and the channel of the board in the sub-location group. logical TRX number of the main location group. logical TRX number of the main location group: 0) and the sub-location group (TRX number: 4. Scenario Impact Network planning None. run the SET UNBINDLOCGRP command. TRXBN=4.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 50 Configuring Multi-site Cell Example An example script of binding the TRX that the BTS index is 0 and the TRX number of the main location group is 0 with the idle board and channel that the TRX board number of the sub-location group is 4 and the channel number of the TRX board in the sub-location group is 0 is as follows: SET BINDLOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. BTSIDX=0. TRXNO=0. TRXPN=0. ----End Example An example script of deleting binding relations between the main location group (BTS index: 0. TRXBN=4. and the TRX board number of the sub-location group to delete binding relations of location groups. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. When you run the RMV CELL command to delete the co-cell. TRXNO=0. channel number of the TRX board of the sub-location group: 0) is as follows: SET UNBINDLOCGRP: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. BTSIDX=0. 50-7 . NOTE l l When you delete binding relations between the main location group and the sub-location group.

.

The channels that the C/I ratios meet the requirements of calls are assigned to the calls. IBCA algorithm has a remarkable effect on improving the utilization of frequency resources and expanding the network capacity. To use the IBCA algorithm.. which has a remarkable effect on improving the utilization of frequency resources and expanding the network capacity. the bottleneck that restricts the network capacity is not the interference (link quality) but the channel number. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In addition. This channel assignment algorithm is called interference based channel assignment (IBCA). the C/I ratios of idle channels need to be estimated. In this case. In addition. The GXPUI is used to estimate the interference experienced by each idle channel in every channel assignment procedure and the interference of a new call to established calls on the same timeslot in the IBCA neighboring cells.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA 51 About This Chapter Prerequisite l l l Configuring IBCA IBCA algorithm is a channel assignment algorithm. l Context Purpose IBCA is applied to the network in which frequency resources are insufficient and thus the same frequency is repeatedly used in neighboring cells. the GXPUI should be added to the BSC. there is no unfavorable influence on the established call after a new call is established. see Activate BSC License. In this network. For details. 51-1 . Ltd. the severe inter-cell interference cannot be solved even if the frequency hopping is used. the GPS synchronization requires the support from the hardware configuration. To enable the inter-BSC IBCA algorithm. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. In this situation. the GFGUB or GOGUB should be added to the BSC. The GFGUB or GOGUB is used to establish a communication link to transfer the related information about the IBCA algorithm between BSCs. To enable the IBCA algorithm. the inter-site Um interface software synchronization or GPS synchronization should be enabled. IBCA is restricted by the license.

the IBCA algorithm needs to calculate the intra-cell and inter-cell interference between channels in the same timeslot. the optimal channel is selected on the basis of channel priorities. Therefore. 51. and configuring the cell that supports the IBCA algorithm. either of synchronization modes can be adopted.1 Configuration Principles of IBCA This describes the configuration principles of the IBCA.51 Configuring IBCA HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Working Principle Considering the inter-channel interference. the interference of the calls in the same timeslot on the assigned channel should also be minimized. Configuring IBCA involves configuring the GXPUI.6 Configuring an IBCA Neighboring Cell This describes how to configure an IBCA neighboring cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal. HWIII power control algorithm must be enabled in the IBCA cell. That is. On this basis. For cells that enable the IBCA algorithm. Thus. which perform most calculations of the IBCA module. The Um interface synchronization is required to use the IBCA algorithm. the MAIO and the idle channel that meets the requirements of the new call and has the least impact on the established call can be selected. 51.7 Configuring the BTS Synchronization Mode This describes how to configure the BTS synchronization mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal. The Um interface synchronization involves the Um interface software synchronization and GPS synchronization. the load of CPU0 increases greatly and thus affects normal working of the BSC if this module is placed in CPU0. Ltd. In the synchronization and cyclic frequency hopping network. 51. 51. Hardware Configuration As the IBCA module involves many calculations.5 Configuring the Cell that Enables the IBCA Algorithm Switch This describes how to configure the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm switch on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the C/I ratio of the new call established on the idle channel can be predicted.4 Configuring the IBCA Cell that Supports HWIII Power Control Algorithm This describes how to configure the IBCA cell that supports HWIII power control algorithm on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In addition. configuring the TRX that supports the IBCA algorithm. If the two cells that exist the interference relations are distributed in two BSCs. the influence of the new call on the established call can be estimated. 51. the inter-site interference relations can be predicted. the IBCA requests that the interference of the assigned channel on the calls in the same timeslot should be minimized.3 Configuring IBCA This describes how to configure IBCA on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 51. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .. two GXPUIs are added in the BSC. 51.2 Data Negotiated and Planned for Configuring IBCA The following data involves the configuration of a 2G internal IBCA neighboring cell relation and a 2G external IBCA neighboring cell relation. the inter-BSC communication interface is required to send the information about the interference calculation of related cells to the corresponding BSC. 51-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The IBCA algorithm is compatible with the existing channel assignment mechanism. The IBCA algorithm switch is a cell-level parameter. In addition.

51. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA 51. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 51.8 Configuring External Attributes of the BSC This describes how to add external attributes of the BSC on the Local Maintenance Terminal..9 Binding the external BSC and the External Cell This describes how to configure the binding relation between the external BSC and the external cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal. 51-3 .10 Deactivating IBCA This describes how to deactivate IBCA on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

The number of neighboring BSCs of a BSC on which the inter-BSC IBCA algorithm is enabled must not exceed 16. The IBCA algorithm only applies to the assignment of channels on the TRXs involved in FH. the EMR function cannot be enabled in the cell simultaneously. If the cell with the IBCA enabled is already configured with the IBCA neighboring cell. if IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Allowed is set to YES(Yes). In IBCA cell. The number of IBCA neighboring cells of a cell must not exceed 12. and number of different frequency bands to which the frequencies in the MA group belong should be planned for the cell. the number of MA tables used in an IBCA cell group must not exceed three. l Network planning should be performed in the cell where IBCA is to be implemented before the implementation of IBCA.2 Data Negotiated and Planned for Configuring IBCA The following data involves the configuration of a 2G internal IBCA neighboring cell relation and a 2G external IBCA neighboring cell relation. use the MAIOs dynamically allocated by the IBCA. – – The number of IBCA neighboring cells should be planned for the cell. l In a cell where the IBCA algorithm is enabled. In RF FH mode. In the Co-BCCH cell. and if the parameter IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Allowed is set to YES (Yes). MA group. IBCA Waiting Measurement Report Time must be smaller than Min Interval for Consecutive Hos and Min Interval for Emerg. preferentially use the fixed MAIOs in the frequency planning for the configured SDCCHs. In IBCA cell. l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 51. 51-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. two MA groups can be configured (each frequency band for one MA group). In the IBCA cell. The active power control algorithm is not allowed to be enabled in the IBCA cell. The IBCA algorithm does not support the external PCU. For the SDCCHs dynamically converted from the TCHs. Neither Flex MAIO nor Flex TSC can be enabled in the IBCA cell. The MAIO. The Huawei III power control algorithm must be enabled in the cell where the IBCA algorithm is to be enabled. the static PDTCHs that are on the same TRX and use the same MA group must be configured with the same MAIO.Hos. IBCA uses its own power prediction algorithm to perform the initial power prediction. The number of frequencies in the MA table for the cell where the IBCA algorithm is enabled must not exceed 12.51 Configuring IBCA HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51. the PDTCH and SDCCH that are on the same TRX and use the same MA group must be configured with the same MAIO. For the BSC enabled with the IBCA algorithm.1 Configuration Principles of IBCA This describes the configuration principles of the IBCA. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . These MAIOs cannot be dynamically allocated to other MSs that use the same timeslots in the cell. only one MA group can be configured in each timeslot and each frequency..

Ltd. Multiplexing Mode Activity State Service Type Cell Name Cell MCC Example BTS_IBCA BTS3012 BSC 1 2 0 MODE4_1 ACTIVATED (Activated) TDM IBCA_01 460 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Board Type Back Type Example 1 13 GXPUI NONE(Independent Mode) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 51-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GFGUB Parameter ID SRN SN BT BackType PORTTYPE Parameter Name Subrack No. Slot No.. Board Type Back Type Port Type Example 1 15 GXPUI NONE(Independent Mode) GE Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 51-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an FH cell Parameter ID BTSNAME TYPE UPNODE SRN SN PN MPMODE AST SERVICEMODE CELLNAME MCC Parameter Name BTS Name BTS Type Up Node Type Subrack No. 51-5 . Slot No. Port No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Table 51-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the GXPUI Parameter ID SRN SN BT BackType Parameter Name Subrack No. Slot No.

. Ltd. 70. 60. 2. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 90 0.51 Configuring IBCA HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID MNC LAC CI CTYPE CPLMODE TRXBN TRXTP TRXPN TRXFREQ FREQ FHMODE HOPINDEX FREQ1-FREQ5 MAIO1-MAIO5 Parameter Name Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI Freq. 70. 80. 60. 80. 1. 4 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 51-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for enabling Huawei III power control algorithm in a cell Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME PWRCTRLSW PWRBCDALLOW D Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Power Control Switch Power Forecast Allowed Example BYNAME(By Name) IBCA_01 HW3(HW3 Power Control) NO(NO) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 51-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. TRX Board Type TRX Board Pass No. Band Separate Mode TRX Board No. 90 RF_FH(RF FH) 0 50. 3. Frequency hopping mode Hop Index frequency 1frequency 5 MAIO1-MAIO5 Example 11 10 1 GSM900_DCS1800 SUPPORT(Support) 0 QTRU 0 40 50. TRX Freq Freq.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Table 51-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for enabling the IBCA algorithm in a cell Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME IBCAALLOWED IBCASOFTBLKSWITCH IBCAICDMSWITCH IBCADYNCMEASUR ENCELLALLOWED IBCAMAIOUSMTD Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name IBCA Allowed IBCA Soft Block Switch IBCA ICDM Switch IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Allowed IBCA MAIO Using Method Example BYNAME(By Name) IBCA_01 YES(Yes) YES(Yes) YES(YES) NO(NO) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 0(Max. 51-7 .. Optimized MAIO) Network planning Table 51-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an internal IBCA neighboring cell Parameter ID IDXTYPE SRCCELLNAME NBRCELLNAME IBCANCELLFLAG IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED Parameter Name Index Type Source Cell Name Neighbor Cell Name IBCA Neighbor Cell Flag IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Flag Example BYNAME(By Name) IBCA_01 IBCA_02 YES(YES) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 51-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BTS synchronization method Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Example BYIDX(By Index) 1 Source Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd.

For details. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. and configure this cell as an FH cell. 1.3 Configuring IBCA This describes how to configure IBCA on the Local Maintenance Terminal.51 Configuring IBCA HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID SYNCMETHOD Parameter Name Site Synchronization Method Example AISS(Air Interface Software Sync) Source Network planning Table 51-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an external IBCA neighboring cell Parameter ID IBSCNAME BSCDPC CELLNAME MCC MNC LAC CI BCCH NCC BCC BSCIDX Parameter Name External BSC Name External BSC DPC Cell Name Cell MCC Cell MNC Cell LAC Cell CI BCCH FD NCC BCC External BSC Index Example EXTBSC 170 EXTCELL_01 460 11 10 10 15 0 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 51.. Preparation The following procedure takes how to configure a 2G internal IBCA neighboring cell relation and a 2G external IBCA neighboring cell relation as examples. run the ADD TRX command to add a TRX. run the ADD BRD command to add a GXPUI and a GFGUB. Ltd. run the ADD BTS command to add a cell. 51-8 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. see 51. Step 2 Add a BTS and a cell.2 Data Negotiated and Planned for Configuring IBCA. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

the IBCA algorithm must be enabled in the neighboring cells of the IBCA cell. and set the attribute parameters of the neighboring cell IBCA Neighbor Cell Flag and IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Flag to YES(YES). Ltd. run the ADD CELL2GNC command to configure 2G internal neighboring cell relations. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. SN=13. Step 8 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DCCI=0. DCELLNAME="IBCA_01". ----End Example /*Add a GXPUI*/ ADD BRD: SRN=1. Thus. /*Add a GFGUB*/ ADD BRD: SRN=1. Huawei III power control algorithm is enabled in the configured cell. run the ADD EXTBSC command to configure the data of the signaling points in the external BSC. BackType=NONE. TRXTP=QTRU. 3.a according to the external BSC index obtained from Step 7. MPMODE=MODE4_1. The BTS synchronization method is configured as soft-synchronized network. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DCTYPE=GSM900_DCS1800. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. FREQ=40. Thus. CPLMode=SUPPORT. /*Add a BTS and a cell*/ ADD BTS: BTSNAME="BTS_IBCA". run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to set Site Synchronization Method to AISS(Air Interface Software Sync). 51-9 . TYPE=BTS3012. PN=0. SRN=1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA 3.b. Step 7 Repeat Step 2 through Step 6 to add another IBCA cell. run the command LST EXTBSC to query the external BSC index. NOTE For internal cells of the BSC. For details. AST=ACTIVATED.run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set IBCA Information Report Period Within BSC to 200 and IBCA Information Report Period Between BSC to 8. DCLAC=10. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. TRXPN=0. BackType=NONE. run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command to set IBCA Allowed to YES(YES). run the MOD CELLHOPTP command to set the FH mode of the cell to RF FH. run the ADD CELL2GEXTC command to add a 2G external cell. Step 12 Repeat Step 8 to configure 2G external neighboring cell relations. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. DCMNC="11". UPNODE=BSC. the IBCA algorithm is enabled in the configured cell. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BT=GFGUB. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 10 Add an external cell and configure it as a 2G external neighboring cell.. SN=15. SN=2. run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command to set Power Control Switch to HW3(HW3 Power Control). TRXBN=0. and then bind this cell and the added external BSC specified in Step 7. Step 9 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BT=GXPUI. run the MOD MAIOPLAN to configure the MAIO data. DCMCC="460". On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 11 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. PortType=GE. 1. ServiceMode=TDM. see 8 Configuring Frequency Hopping. run the MOD CELLMAGRP to configure the FH group. 2.

FREQ=70. TRXBN=0. MCC="460". NBRCELLNAME="IBCA_02". CELLNAME="IBCA_01". ADD TRX: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.4 Configuring the IBCA Cell that Supports HWIII Power Control Algorithm This describes how to configure the IBCA cell that supports HWIII power control algorithm on the Local Maintenance Terminal. FHMODE=RF_FH. /*Enable the IBCA algorithm in a cell*/ MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. FREQ=60. MAIO5=4. BCC=0. BSCIDX=0. /*Configure the synchronization method of the BTS*/ MOD BTSOTHPARA: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". FREQ3=70. HOPINDEX=0.51 Configuring IBCA HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) /*Add a TRX*/ ADD TRX: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. /*Add an external BSC*/ ADD EXTBSC: BSCNAME="EXTBSC". MAIO3=2. BSCDPC=170. /*Configure 2G external neighboring cell relations*/ ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. FREQ=50. FREQ4=80. ADD TRX: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. NCC=0. IBCAICDMSWITCH=YES. TRXPN2=1. TRXPN2=2. FREQ5=90. PWRCTRLSW=HW3. FREQ2=60. MAIO2=1. /*Configure BSC parameters*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: IBCAINBSCINFORPTPRD=200. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". TRXBN=0. TRXTP=QTRU. FREQ1=50. SRCCELLNAME="IBCA_01". CELLNAME="IBCA_01". Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . MAIO4=3. /*Configure an FH cell*/ MOD CELLHOPTP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. TRXTP=QTRU. MAIO1=0. HOPINDEX=0. /*Configure an FH group*/ MOD CELLMAGRP: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. SRCCELLNAME="IBCA_01". IBCANCELLFLAG=YES. Ltd. TRXTP=QTRU. 51. TRXTP=QTRU. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". CELLNAME="IBCA_01". HWIII power control algorithm must be enabled in the IBCA cell. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". IBCAOUTBSCINFORPTPRD=8. /*Configure 2G internal neighboring cell relations*/ ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. FREQ=80. IBCAALLOWED=YES. TRXPN2=3. IBCASOFTBLKSWITCH=YES. 51-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CI=10. IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED=NO. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED=YES. TRXTP=QTRU. TRXBN=0. BTSNAME="BTS_IBCA". LAC=10. IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED=YES. FREQ=90. CELLNAME="IBCA_01". BCCH=15. /*Add a cell to the external BSC*/ ADD CELL2GEXTC: CELLNAME="EXTCELL_01". NBRCELLNAME="EXTCELL_01". /*Configure the MAIO data*/ MOD MAIOPLAN: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. ADD TRX: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. TRXPN2=5. TRXPN2=4. IBCANCELLFLAG=YES. /*Enable Huawei III power control algorithm in a cell*/ MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. ADD TRX: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. PWRBCDALLOWD=NO. TRXBN=0. SYNCMETHOD=AISS. MNC="11". TRXBN=0.. IBCAMAIOUSMTD=0. CELLNAME="IBCA_01".

51-11 . CELLNAME="IBCA1_1". If parameters do not meet requirements. NOTE Run commands LST CELLCHMGAD and LST CELLHOCTRL to query whether above parameters meet requirements. run the LST CELLPWRBASIC command to query whether the parameter of the target IBCA cell Power Control Algorithm Switch is set to HW3 (HW3 Power Control). 51. run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command to set Power Control Algorithm Switch to HW3 (HW3 Power Control). That is. check whether HWIII power control algorithm of the target cell is enabled.. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Preparation Table 51-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that supports HWIII power control algorithm Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME PWRCTRLSW Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name Power Control Algorithm Switch Example BYNAME (BY NAME) IBCA1_1 HW3 (HW3 Power Control) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run commands MOD CELLCHMGAD and MOD CELLHOCTRL to modify parameters. IBCA Waiting Measurement Report Time must be less than Min Interval for Consecutive HOs and Min Interval for Emerg. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 If HWIII power control algorithm is not enabled for the target cell. ----End Example An example script of configuring the IBCA cell that supports HWIII power control algorithm is as follows: MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME.HOs. PWRCTRLSW=HW3. Prerequisite l If IBCA algorithm is enabled and IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Allowed is set to Yes in the cell.5 Configuring the Cell that Enables the IBCA Algorithm Switch This describes how to configure the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm switch on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

run the LST CELLCHMGAD command to query whether the parameter IBCA Allowed of the target IBCA cell is set to Yes. run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command to set IBCA Allowed to Yes.. Step 2 If this parameter is set to No. l Preparation Table 51-10 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm switch Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME IBCAALLOWED Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name IBCA Allowed Example BYNAME (BY NAME) IBCA1_1 YES(Yes) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Prerequisite At least two cells enable the IBCA algorithm switch. 51-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 51. IBCAALLOWED=YES. ----End Example An example script of configuring the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm switch is as follows: MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. The active power control algorithm is not allowed to be enabled in the cell where enables the IBCA algorithm. CELLNAME="IBCA1_1".6 Configuring an IBCA Neighboring Cell This describes how to configure an IBCA neighboring cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal. cell A must enable the IBCA algorithm if cell A is an IBCA neighboring cell of cell B. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .51 Configuring IBCA l HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) For internal cells of the BSC. IBCA algorithm has power prediction algorithm to perform the initial power prediction.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Preparation Table 51-11 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring an IBCA neighboring cell Parameter ID IDXTYPE SRCCELLIDX NBRCELLIDX HOCTRLSWITCH Parameter Name Index Type Source Cell Index Neighbor Cell Index Current HO Control Algorithm in Source Cell IBCA Neighbor Cell Flag IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Flag Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 2 HOALGORITH M2(HO Algorithm II) YES(Yes) YES(Yes) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning IBCANCELLFLAG IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the ADD CELL2GNC command to add neighboring relations of 2G neighboring cells. Ltd. 51.7 Configuring the BTS Synchronization Mode This describes how to configure the BTS synchronization mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 51-13 . NBRCELLIDX=2. SRCCELLIDX=0. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2. configure the cell that enables the IBCA algorithm switch as an IBCA neighboring cell according to the network planning. Then. Set IBCA Neighbor Cell Flag and IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell Flag to Yes. ----End Example An example script of configuring an IBCA neighboring cell is as follows: ADD CELL2GNC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. IBCADYNCMEASURENCELLALLOWED=YES. IBCANCELLFLAG=YES..

Then. 51.51 Configuring IBCA HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation The BTS synchronization involves GPS synchronization and Um interface software synchronization.8 Configuring External Attributes of the BSC This describes how to add external attributes of the BSC on the Local Maintenance Terminal. BTSIDX=1. SYNCMETHOD=AISS. the BTS configuration mode is configured as the Um interface software synchronization.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . synchronization mode*/ IDXTYPE=BYNAME. For details. BTSNAME="IBCA1". Table 51-12 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the BTS synchronization mode Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX SYNCMETHOD Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Site Synchronization Method Example BYIDX(By Index) 1 AISS (Air Interface Software Sync) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Example Example scripts of configuring the Um interface software synchronization as BTS synchronization mode are as follows: /*Configure the mode*/ MOD BTSOTHPARA: /*Query the BTS LST BTSOTHPARA: Um interface software synchronization as BTS synchronization IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the LST BTSOTHPARA command to query whether the parameter Site Synchronization Method is set to AISS (Air Interface Software Sync). Ltd. see 44 Managing a BSC Soft-Synchronized Network Task. 51-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The following takes how to configure the Um interface software synchronization as BTS synchronization mode as an example. run the MOD BTSOTHPARA command to set Site Synchronization Method to AISS (Air Interface Software Sync). ----End Result On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

/*Query configurations of external signaling points of the BSC*/ LST EXTBSC:.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 51 Configuring IBCA Preparation Table 51-13 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding external attributes of the BSC Parameter ID IBSCNAME BSCDPC Parameter Name External BSC Name External BSC DPC Example 201 170 Source Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Result On the Local Maintenance Terminal. BSCDPC=170. Ltd. do as follows: run the ADD CELL2GEXTC command to set BSC Index to the index number queried in step 1. 51. run the LST EXTBSC command to query 51.. Step 2 Configure the binding relation between the external BSC and the external cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 51-15 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .9 Binding the external BSC and the External Cell This describes how to configure the binding relation between the external BSC and the external cell on the Local Maintenance Terminal.8 Configuring External Attributes of the BSC configured External BSC Index. l To bind the added external cell and the external BSC. run the ADD EXTBSC command to configure external signaling points of the BSC. run the LST EXTBSC command to query whether external signaling points of the BSC are configured. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite External signaling points of the BSC are configured. Example Example scripts of adding external attributes of the BSC are as follows: /*Configure external signaling points of the BSC*/ ADD EXTBSC: BSCNAME="201".

/*Modify attributes of the original external cell and bind the original external cell and the external BSC*/ MOD CELL2GEXTC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. BCCH=988. 51. BCC=0. BSCIDX=0. BSCIDX=0. Ltd. CELLNAME="IBCA2_2". Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Prerequisite The IBCA function is configured.51 Configuring IBCA l HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) To bind the original external cell and the external BSC. CI=1. do as follows: run the ADD CELL2GEXTC command to set BSC Index to the index number queried in step 1. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . LAC=10. NCC=0. ----End Example Example scripts of configuring the binding relation between the external BSC and the external cell are as follows: /*Query configurations of external signaling points of the BSC*/ LST EXTBSC:. ----End 51-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MNC="00". ". MCC="460". /*Bind the added external cell and the external BSC*/ ADD CELL2GEXTC: CELLNAME="IBCA2_2". run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command to set IBCA Allowed to NO(NO) to deactivate the IBCA function.10 Deactivating IBCA This describes how to deactivate IBCA on the Local Maintenance Terminal..

52-1 . Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode includes Configuring a BTS3900B GSM in automatic planning mode and Configuring a BTS3900E GSM in automatic planning mode 52. you need to preconfigure some parameters used by the algorithm on the M2000 client.2 Adding the BTS3900E GSM This describes how to add a BTS3900E GSM in automatic planning mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal. You can also query the progress and result of the automatic planning of the BTS. or locate the fault on the M2000 client. see M2000 Operator Guide. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode About This Chapter Before the automatic planning of the BTS. analyze the data.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details. 52.1 Adding the BTS3900B GSM This describes how to add a BTS3900B GSM in automatic planning mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

set Whether to activate PICO Solution Package under License control items to 1. To obtain and activate a license. and reduce the maintenance cost and difficulty in network planning. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . In BSC6000V900R008 Exceptional Commercial License Application Template. NEs Involved BTS. do as follows: 1. and M2000 Prerequisite l The GFGUB/GOGUB is already configured and works in active/standby mode. Preparation Table 52-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900B GSM Parameter Site attribute s BTSNAME TYPE UPNODE Parameter Name BTS name BTS type Up Node Type Example pico BTS3900B_G SM BSC Source Network planning Network planning Network planning 52-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The value 1 indicates that this function is enabled. – When the Abis interface uses device IP address in communication. Ltd.. see Activate BSC License. – l The GXPUM/GXPUT/GDPUX is configured in the GMPS or GEPS where the GFGUB/ GOGUB is located.1 Adding the BTS3900B GSM This describes how to add a BTS3900B GSM in automatic planning mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Scenario Mandatory/ Optional Impact The BTS3900B GSM is mainly used in the area where the macro BTS cannot cover. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Optional. The configuration of the BTS3900B GSM can increase the network coverage. realize the automatic configuration of the cell parameters. the device IP address and port IP address of the active and standby boards are already configured.52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 52. The license is obtained and activated. the port IP address of the active and standby boards are already configured. l 2. When the Abis interface uses port IP address in communication. BSC. For details.

169. Service Type BTS IP BTS IP Mask BTS SeGW IP Address BTS Interface Board Bar Code Cell Name Cell Type BTS Automatic Plan Maximum TRX Number Example 0 26 0 IP 192.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode Parameter SRN SN PN SVCMODE IP IPMSK GWIP BARCODE Parameter Name Subrack No. CGI and RAC Automatic Plan Arithmetic Switch.0 199. and Capacity and Coverage Automatic Optimize Arithmetic Switch is set to ON(ON) by default. Service Type can be set to IP only.1.168. ----End Example An example script for adding the BTS3900B GSM is as follows: Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and BSIC Automatic Optimize Arithmetic Switch.1 255. Slot No.1 111122222233 33333 pico_cell0 DCS1800 1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Factory setting Cell attribute s DCELLNAME DCTYPE MAXFQNUM Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. Port No. Run the MOD AUTOPLANCFG command to select the automatic planning algorithm. 52-3 .1. run the ADD AUTOPLANBTS command to add the BTS3900B GSM.255..255. NOTE When you add the BTS3900B GSM. Freq.

l In HDLC/HUB networking mode: – – – l In IP networking mode: – – l The license is obtained and activated. DCELLNAME="pico_cell0". For details.1. UPNODE=BSC.1". IPMSK="255.52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) ADD AUTOPLANBTS: BTSNAME="pico". To obtain and activate a license. The value 1 indicates that this function is enabled. the device IP addresses and port IP addresses should be configured for the active and standby GFGUBs/GOGUBs. see Activate BSC License. The GXPUM/GXPUT/GDPUX is configured in the GMPS or GEPS where the GFGUB/GOGUB is located. MAXFQNUM=1.. and M2000 Prerequisite l In TDM networking mode: – – – The GEIUB/GOIUB is already configured.0". set Whether to activate Easy GSM Solution Package under License control items to 1.168. There are idle ports on the GEIUB/GOIUB in the GMPS or GEPS. NEs Involved BTS. TYPE=BTS3900B_GSM. The GXPUM/GXPUT/GDPUX is configured in the GMPS or GEPS where the GFGUB/GOGUB is located. 52-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Scenario Mandatory/ Optional Impact The BTS3900E GSM is mainly used for indoor coverage and public area coverage. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . If the GFGUB/GOGUB works in active/ standby mode.1. DCTYPE=DCS1800. BARCODE="11112222223333333". The configuration of the BTS3900E GSM realizes the automatic planning and optimization of the BTS and reduces the maintenance cost and difficulty in network planning.255. 2. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. SRN=0. Optional. GWIP="199. Ltd. SN=26. There are idle ports on the GEHUB in the GMPS or GEPS. BSC. do as follows: 1.1".169. The GFGUB/GOGUB is already configured. PN=0. 52. The GXPUM is configured in the GMPS or GEPS where the GEIUB/GOIUB is located. SVCMODE=IP. In BSC6000V900R008 Exceptional Commercial License Application Template. The GEHUB is already configured.255. IP="192.2 Adding the BTS3900E GSM This describes how to add a BTS3900E GSM in automatic planning mode on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

Service Type Cell Name Cell Type MCC MNC LAC CI Example shanghai BTS3900E_GS M BSC 0 26 0 TDM shanghai_0 DCS1800 460 01 8240 2 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Slot No.. 52-5 . Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode Preparation Table 52-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in TDM networking mode Parameter BTS attribute s BTSNAME TYPE UPNODE SRN SN PN SVCMODE Cell attribute s DCELLNAME DCTYPE MCC MNC LAC CI Parameter Name BTS name BTS type Up Node Type Subrack No. Port No.

. Slot No. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Ltd.52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Table 52-3 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in HDLC/HUB networking mode Parameter Site attribute s BTSNAME TYPE UPNODE SRN SN PN SVCMODE Cell attribute s DCELLNAME DCTYPE MCC MNC LAC CI Parameter Name BTS name BTS type Up Node Type Subrack No. Service Type Cell Name Cell Type MCC MNC LAC CI Example shanghai BTS3900E_GS M BSC 0 26 0 HDLC shanghai_0 DCS1800 460 01 8240 2 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Table 52-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for adding the BTS3900E GSM in IP networking mode Parameter Site attribute s BTSNAME Parameter Name BTS name Example shanghai Source Network planning 52-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Port No.

1 255. Port No.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode Parameter TYPE UPNODE SRN SN PN SVCMODE IP IPMSK GWIP BARCODE Parameter Name BTS type Up Node Type Subrack No.255. run the ADD AUTOPLANBTS command to add a BTS3900E GSM.0 199.1. Ltd.1. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Slot No. 52-7 .168.255. Service Type BTS IP BTS IP Mask BTS SeGW IP Address BTS Interface Board Bar Code Cell Name Cell Type MCC MNC LAC CI Example BTS3900E_GS M BSC 0 26 0 IP 192..1 111122222233 33333 shanghai_0 DCS1800 460 01 8240 2 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Unique identifier Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Cell attribute s DCELLNAME DCTYPE MCC MNC LAC CI Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.169.

LAC=8240. MCC="460". SRN=0. Ltd. 52-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.52 Configuring BTS in automatic planning mode NOTE HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) When adding a BTS3900E GSM. CI=2. ----End Example An example script for adding the BTS3900E GSM in TDM networking mode is as follows: ADD AUTOPLANBTS: BTSNAME="shanghai". DCELLNAME="shanghai_0". and Capacity and Coverage Automatic Optimize Arithmetic Switch is set to ON(ON) by default. DCTYPE=DCS1800. PN=0. Freq. Freq. and BSIC Automatic Optimize Arithmetic Switch. SN=26. Run the MOD AUTOPLANCFG command to select the automatic planning algorithms and automatic optimization algorithms. and BSIC Automatic Plan Arithmetic Switch. TYPE=BTS3900E_GSM. you can set Service Type to TDM. or IP. HDLC. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .. MNC="01". HDLC_HubBTS. UPNODE=BSC. SVCMODE=TDM.

In addition. That is. a subscriber can provide PS service without disrupting the CS service. that is. SGSN Prerequisite l l The DTM function is license-controlled. a subscriber can send photos or browse websites during a call. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the MSC must support the COMMON ID message. MSC. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. – NEs Involved BSC. the A Interface Collaboration Paging Switch should be set to Open so that the network can page the MSs in packet transfer mode successfully. Ltd. That is. DTM allows simultaneous transfer of CS service and PS service. subscribers can use the services that are similar to 3G services through the 2G network. BTS. In addition. supports concurrent CS service and PS service. The 3G network provides concurrent CS service and PS service. DTM is not supported in a cell enabled with the queuing function. MSC. the subscribers in a GSM network can enjoy services similar to those provided in a 3G network. MS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 53 Configure DTM 53 Scenario Impact – Configure DTM Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) is a 3GPP-defined standard function. MS. see Activate BSC License. DTM is used in built-in PCU configuration mode rather than in external PCU configuration mode. If DTM is enabled in a cell and the parameter Network Operation Mode of the GPRS attributes is not set to Network Operation Mode I. In an extended cell. This feature implements the simplified operation function of the class A mobile phone. in areas with insufficient 3G coverage. With DTM.. it is recommended that the early classmark sending control (ECSC) be set to Yes. DTM is not supported due to the limitation of the MS multislot capability. 53-1 l l l l l Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . and SGSN. NC2 is not supported because GPRS measurement reports are not reported. In DTM. DTM requires the support of the BSC. For details. After a cell is enabled with DTM. concurrent CS services and PS services.

SUPPORTENDTM=SUPPORT. and Support HMC DTM cannot be set to Yes in BSC6000 V900R008C12.SupportDTM to SUPPORT(Support).SupportEndTM to SUPPORT (Support).53 Configure DTM HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Preparation Table 53-1 Example of the negotiated and planned data for configuring the DTM Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME GPRS EDGE SUPPORTDTM SUPPORTENDTM ECSC Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name GPRS EDGE SupportDTM SupportEndTM ECSC Example BYNAME(By Name) CELL01 SupportAsInnPcu (SupportAsInnPcu) YES(Yes) SUPPORT(Support) SUPPORT(Support) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 Run the SET CELLGPRS command to set GPRS to SupportAsInnPcu (SupportAsInnPcu). EDGE=YES. MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 53-2 . CELLNAME="CELL01". Connect the MS to the dialing terminal to set up the dial-up connection. Use an MS supporting the DTM to make a call to a fixed-line phone and maintain the call. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 2 Run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set ECSC to YES(YES). configure the cell supports the DTM. You are advised not to enable these functions during configuration. Postrequisite l Verifying DTM 1. CELLNAME="CELL01". NOTE Support Enhanced DTM. ECSC=YES. Support Class11 DTM. Ltd. 2. ----End Example An example script of configuring the DTM is as follows: /*Configure the cell supports the DTM*/ SET CELLGPRS: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. SUPPORTDTM=SUPPORT. GPRS=SupportAsInnPcu. configure the cell supports use early classmark sending..

verify that the web page can be browsed and the call is not affected. run the SET CELLGPRS command to set SupportDTM to UNSUPPORT(Unsupport). Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Verifying the deactivation of DTM: The operations are the same as those for Verifying DTM. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. Verify that the web page cannot be browsed when the call is in progress. Deactivating DTM 1.. 53-3 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 53 Configure DTM 3. l After the connection is successful. Ltd.

.

Compared with the original GSM system. VGCS. BSC. the default value of NCH Occupy Block Number is 0. Configuring VGCS/VBS This describes how to configure the VGCS/VBS. Table 54-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the VGCS/VBS Data Type VGCS/ VBS Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLNAME NCHOCBLOCKNU M NCHSTARTBLOCK eMLPP EMLPPPRIORITY Parameter Name Index Type Cell Name NCH Occupy Block Number NCH Start Block eMLPP Priority Example BYNAME (By Name) CELL_1 1 0 Priority4 (Priority 4) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and eMLPP. The GSM-R can provide diversified voice dispatch services required in the private network. NEs Involved BTS. the GSM-R has new features. The MS initiates a VGCS/VBS call after receiving the message indicating that the system supports the VGCS/VBS. and MSC Preparation The cell does not support the VGCS/VBS by default. such as the Voice Group Call Service (VGCS). 54-1 . that is.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 54 Configuring VGCS/VBS 54 Scenario Impact None. Set NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block to configure the VGCS/VBS. and enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption (eMLPP) service. Ltd.. When NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0. Voice Broadcast Service (VBS). the BSC initiates the NCH messages to the MS in system information type 1. VBS.

and VGCS/VBS Talker Information messages are traced over the A interface. That is. Five seconds later. VGCS/VBS Setup Ack. run the MOD CELLGSMR command and set eMLPP Priorityin the VGCS/VBS. After receiving the message. CELLNAME="CELL_1". Then. use MS 1 to initiate a VGCS. /*Configure the eMLPP in the VGCS/VBS*/ MOD CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. 2. /*If NCH Occupy Block Number is 0. VGCS/VBS Assignment Request. NCHSTARTBLOCK=0. the BTS preferentially schedules the paging messages. Set NCH Occupy Block Number and NCH Start Block and run the command. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the TCH is released. Run the LST CELLGSMR command and ensure that NCH Occupy Block Number is not 0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 3. NCHOCBLOCKNUM=1.. change NCH Occupy Block Number to 1 and NCH Start Block to 0*/ MOD CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. 1. Make MS 1 camp on the test cell. /*Ensure that CELL_1 supports the VGCS/VBS*/ LST CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. Observe the channel status of the test cell. EMLPPPRIORITY=Priority4. Step 2 Configure the eMLPP in the VGCS/VBS. If the paging message priority is higher than the value of eMLPP Priority set on the BSC side. If NCH Occupy Block Number is set to 0. run the MOD CELLGSMR command. NCH Occupy Block Number must not be 0. the BSC initiates a message to an MS. Run the LST CELLIDLEBASIC command to query the number of Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. NOTE 2. 3. run the LST CELLGSMR command. the MS initiates a VGCS or VBS call in the group where the MS belongs. VGCS/VBS Assignment Result. CNAME="CELL_1". Query the initial configuration of the VGCS/VBS of the current cell according to the index type. the current cell does not support the VGCS/VBS. BTSNAME="BTS_1". 54-2 .54 Configuring VGCS/VBS HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 Configure the VGCS/VBS. The number of NCH Occupy Block Number plus NCH Start Block must be smaller than or equal to the number of Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. CNAME="CELL_1". Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the VGCS or VBS is successfully configured in the cell. ----End Example The example script of configuring the VGCS/VBS is as follows: /*Configure the VGCS/VBS*/ /*Query the VGCS/VBS data configuration of CELL_1 and verify the number of blocks occupied by the NCH*/ LST CELLGSMR: IDXTYPE=BYNAME. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLNAME="CELL_1". Ltd. The VGCS channel and a TCH are in the occupied state. BTSNAME="BTS_1". Then. The VGCS/VBS Setup. Postrequisite l VGCS – Verifying VGCS 1.

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 54 Configuring VGCS/VBS 4. MS 2 alerts that the VBS exists. Ltd. Then. If the parameter is set to 0. l VBS – Verifying VBS 1. MS 2 selects to join the VGCS and displays the VGCS ID. The VBS channel and a TCH are found to be in the occupied state. it indicates that the VBS function is deactivated. hold on the PTT key on MS 1 to occupy the uplink. run the MOD CELLGSMR command to set NCH Occupy Block Number to 0. 3. use MS 2 to initiate a VGCS with the same ID. If the parameter is set to 0. – Deactivating VBS 1. Then. MS 2 alerts that the VGCS exists. Observe the channel status of the test cell. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Hold on the PTT key on MS 2 to occupy the uplink. 2. 6. the number of MS 1 is displayed on MS 2 and the voice from MS 1 is heard. run the LST CELLGSMR command to check the setting of NCH Occupy Block Number. Uplink Request Confirmation. it indicates that the VGCS function is deactivated. Uplink Request Ack. The occupation of the uplink by MS 1 is refused. VGCS/VBS Assignment Request. 2. Hold on the PTT key on MS 2 to occupy the uplink. VGCS/VBS Setup Ack. Make MS 2 camp on the test cell. Make MS 2 camp on the test cell. After MS 2 selects to join the VBS. 2. Then. 54-3 . At the same time. The VGCS/VBS Setup. and VGCS/VBS Talker Information messages are traced over the A interface. run the LST CELLGSMR command to check the setting of NCH Occupy Block Number. observe the traced messages on the A interface and the information displayed on MS 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Then. – Deactivating VGCS 1. run the MOD CELLGSMR command to set NCH Occupy Block Number to 0.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. use MS 2 to initiate a VBS with the same ID. The Uplink Request. and VGCS/VBS Assignment Result messages are traced over the A interface. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 5. The number of MS 2 is displayed on MS 1 and the voice from MS 2 can be heard.

.

The AMR function is used to balance the voice quality and the system capacity. With AMR. 55-1 . Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. receive quality. BTS. and then adjust the voice encoding rate accordingly. Prerequisite l l The AMR function is license-controlled. NEs Involved MS. both the antiinterference capability of the radio communications system and the voice quality are improved. Ltd. the BTS and the MS can evaluate the interference on the radio network according to the measurements such as receive level. In this way. see Activate BSC License. which can be adjusted between full-rate speech version 3 and half-rate speech version 3 specified by the protocol. The MS. BSC. and MSC support the AMR function. and MSC Configuring AMR The adaptive multi rate (AMR) is a speech encoding and decoding algorithm. and carrier-to-interference (C/I) ratio. l Preparation Table 55-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AMR Data Type AMR basic parameter Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX AVer Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index A Interface Tag Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 GSM_PHASE_ 2Plus Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 55 Configuring AMR 55 Scenario Impact None. For details. BTS.

Number Predicted Example Full_rate_Ver3 (Full-rate Ver 3) 48 64 ALG1 (Algorithm I) DISABLE (DISABLE) NO(NO) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning AMR call processing parameter AFRSAMULF RM AFRDSBLCNT RATECTRLS W AMRTFOSWI TCH AMRUADTHA W AMR intra-cell TCHH-TCHF handover parameter HOCTRLSWIT CH INTRACELLF HHOEN INFHHOSTAT INFHHOLAST HOALGORIT HM1(HO Algorithm I) YES(YES) 5 4 Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning INHOF2HTH INHOH2FTH AMR power control parameter PWRCTRLSW AMRPCADJPE RIOD AMRMRCOM PREG AMRULPRED LEND 25 12 HW2(HW2 Power Control) 3 YES(YES) 0 55-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Compensation Allowed AMR UL MR. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .55 Configuring AMR HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID VOICEVER Parameter Name Speech Version AFR SACCH Multi-Frames AFR Radio Link Timeout AMR rate control switch AMR TFO Switch AMR Uplink Adaptive Threshold Allowed HO Control Switch Intracell F-H HO Allowed Intracell F-H HO Stat Time[s] Intracell F-H HO Last Time [s] F2H HO threshold H2F HO threshold Power Control Switch AMR PC Interval AMR MR. Ltd.

and set the following parameters: AMR F-H Traffic Threshold. If the cell supports the half-rate service. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set the parameters related to the AMR intra-cell TCHH-TCHF handover. the relevant settings are as follows: – l In the case of the AMR TCHH-to-TCHF handover. Intracell F-H HO Last Time[s]. 2. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_2Plus. set AMR F-H Ho Allowed to YES (YES). Otherwise.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 55 Configuring AMR Data Type Parameter ID AMRDLPRED LEND Parameter Name AMR DL MR. set AHR SACCH MultiFrames and AHR AHR Radio Link Timeout simultaneously. F2H HO threshold. run the MOD CELLCCAMR command to set the parameters related to the AMR call control of the TCHH or TCHF. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. if Speech Version is set to Full_rate_Ver3(Full-rate Ver 3) and Half_rate_Ver3 (Half-rate Ver 3). calls cannot be set up. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and H2F HO threshold. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to set Speech Version to Full_rate_Ver3(Full-rate Ver 3). set Intracell F-H HO Allowed to YES(YES). 2. Step 3 Set the parameters related to the AMR intra-cell TCHH-TCHF handover. AMR F-H Ho Qual. 1. l When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM1(HO Algorithm I). the settings of AMR ACS[F]and AMR ACS[H] must be consistent with the settings on the CN side.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. select Half_rate_Ver3(Half-rate Ver 3) simultaneously. NOTE Step 2 Configure the parameters related to the AMR call processing. run the MOD CELLCCBASIC command to set AFR SACCH Multi-Frames and AFR Radio Link Timeout according to the actual network conditions. 55-3 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . and set Intracell F-H HO Stat Time[s]. When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II). In A over IP mode. AMR F-H Ho ATCB Threshold. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Threshold. If the cell supports the half-rate service. Number Predicted Ratio of AMRHR AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold Example 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning AMR channel management parameter ALLOWAMR HALFRATEUS ERPERC AMRTCHHPR IORALLOW AMRTCHHPR IORLOAD 100 YES(YES) 55 Procedure Step 1 Set the AMR basic parameters. Ltd. AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1.

CELLIDX=0. ALLOWAMRHALFRATEUSERPERC=100. AMRDLPREDLEND=0. ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Set the AMR basic parameters.. MOD CELLCCAMR: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. AMRPCADJPERIOD=3. INFHHOLAST=4. VOICEVER=Full_rate_Ver1-0&Full_rate_Ver2-0 &Full_rate_Ver3-1&Half_rate_Ver1-0&Half_rate_Ver2-0&Half_rate_Ver3-0. AFRDSBLCNT=64. run the MOD CELLPWRHW2 command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to set the parameters related to Huawei II power control according to the actual network conditions. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . RATECTRLSW=ALG1. CELLIDX=0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. /*Set the parameters related to the AMR intra-cell TCHF-TCHH handover. AMRTCHHPRIORLOAD=55. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.*/ MOD CELLPWRBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. set AMR H-F Qaul. In addition. Step 4 Configure the parameters related to the AMR power control in a cell. 55-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. CELLIDX=0. /*Set the parameters related to the AMR call control. INFHHOSTAT=5. AMR H-F Ho ATCB Threshold.*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. INHOF2HTH=25.*/ MOD CELLCCBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the MOD CELLPWRHW3 command on the Local Maintenance Terminal to set the parameters related to Huawei III power control according to the actual network conditions.*/ SET CELLCHMGBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. – In the case of TCHF-to-TCHH handover. AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step. Ho Allowed to YES (YES). CELLIDX=0. Ltd. MOD CELLPWRHW2: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. l When Power Control Switch is set to HW2(HW2 Power Control). AFRSAMULFRM=48. and AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step. MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0. PWRCTRLSW=HW2. CELLIDX=0. AMR H-F Traffic Threshold. INTRACELLFHHOEN=YES. run the SET CELLCHMGBASIC command to set Ratio of AMR-HR according to the actual network conditions. CELLIDX=0.*/ MOD BSCBASIC: AbisVer=GSM_PHASE_2Plus. CELLIDX=0. run the MOD CELLCHMGAD command to set AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed and AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold according to the actual network conditions. AMRMRCOMPREG=YES. run the MOD CELLPWRBASIC command to set Power Control Switch to HW2(HW2 Power Control) or HW3(HW3 Power Control). and set the following parameters: AMR H-F Ho Qual. AMRSADLUPGRADE=0. INHOH2FTH=12. AMRTCHHPRIORALLOW=YES. set AMR SACCH Downlink Power Upgrade according to the actual network conditions.55 Configuring AMR HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Threshold. AMRULPREDLEND=0. 1. AMRTFOSWITCH=DISABLE. 2. and AMR H-F Ho Pathloss Threshold. Threshold. /*Configure the parameters related to the AMR channel management in a cell. AMRUADTHAW=NO. l Step 5 Set the parameters related to the AMR channel management in a cell. When Power Control Switch is set to HW3(HW3 Power Control). /*Set the parameters related to the AMR power control in a cell. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Method 2: Deselect Full-rate Ver 3 and Half_rate_Ver3. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to deselect Full_rate_Ver3(Full-rate Ver 3) and Half_rate_Ver3 (Half-rate Ver 3) in the Speech Version drop-down list. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the DSP CALLRES command to verify that Service Type in the TC Resource Information is set to FAMR or HAMR. 2. In this case. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 1. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_1 or GSM_PHASE_2. Method 1: Set A Interface Tag to GSM_PHASE_1 or GSM_PHASE_2. 55-5 . In this case.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 55 Configuring AMR Postrequisite l Verifying AMR 1. 2. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 1.. run the LST CELLCCACCESS command to verify that bit 3 and bit 6 from the right to the left of the Speech Version attribute are 0. none of the cells under the BSC supports AMR. – l Deactivating AMR – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. only the current cell does not support AMR. Two MSs supporting AMR make calls. run the LST BSCBASIC command to verify that A Interface Tag is set to GSM_PHASE_1 or GSM_PHASE_2.

.

BSC Prerequisite l l The Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding function is not license-controlled. thus improving the uplink throughput. With the Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding function. enhances the user experience.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 56 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding 56 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding The BSS supports nine codec schemes: MCS-1 to MCS-9. The GPRS/EGPRS function is enabled. None. the codec scheme of the PDCH changes with the radio environment where the MS locates. Scenario Impact This feature increases the uplink rate of the EGPRS users. 56-1 . Preparation Table 56-1 Example of the configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX UPFIXMCS Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index UpFixMcs Example BYCELLIDX(By Cell Index) 0 UNFIXED (UNFIXED) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. The BSC dynamically adjusts the codec scheme adopted by the PDCH according to the uplink measurement report reported by the BTS. NEs Involved BTS. the uplink rate of an EGPRS user can be dynamically adjusted according to the actual network status. In this manner. and improves the network quality..

UPFIXMCS=UNFIXED.56 Configuring Dynamically Adjusting the Uplink MCS Coding HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. ----End Example An example script for configuring dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding SET EGPRSPARA: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. run theSET EGPRSPARA command to setUpFixMcs to UNFIXED(UNFIXED).. Postrequisite l Verifying dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding – Start the trace of the messages on the Um interface in the PS domain. 2. run the SET EGPRSPARA command to set UpFixMcs to one value between MCS1 and MCS9. l Deactivating dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that the coding scheme changes within Uplink Data Block (MCS-1) through Uplink Data Block (MCS-9) when uploading is performed on the PC connected to the EGPRS MS. Verifying deactivation of dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding: The operations are the same as those for Verifying dynamically adjusting the uplink MCS coding. Verify that the coding scheme shown in the trace window does not change. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . CELLIDX=0. 56-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

NEs Involved BSC Configuring Concentric Cell A concentric cell is divided into an overlaid subcell and an underlaid subcell. Band Activity State MCC Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 cell GSM900 ACTIVATED (Activated) 460 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite l The concentric cell function is not license-controlled. Preparation Table 57-1 Example of the configuring concentric cell Data Type Cell attributes Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX CELLNAME CTYPE AST MCC Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Cell Name Freq.. 57-1 . Therefore. Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 57 Configuring Concentric Cell 57 Scenario Impact None. The tight frequency reuse pattern is applied to the overlaid subcell. the system capacity is expanded without affecting the voice quality. Different frequency reuse patterns can be applied to the overlaid and underlaid subcells.

Ltd. run the ADD CELL command to add a cell.. TRX Freq.57 Configuring Concentric Cell HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID MNC LAC CI TRXBN TRXFREQ Parameter Name MNC LAC CI TRX Board No. 57-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Cell IUO Type Enhanced Concentric Allowed HW_Concentric Attribute Concentric Circles HO Allowed Current HO Control Algorithm UL to OL HO Allowed OL to UL HO Allowed RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed TA for UO HO Allowed Example 00 1 1 0 1 Concentric_cell (Concentric cell) YES(Yes) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Cell concentric attributes IUOTP ENIUO TRX concentric attributes Cell handover basic parameters Cell concentric handover parameters IUO UNDERLAID (Underlaid Subcell) YES(Yes) CONHOEN HOCTRLSWITC H ULTOOLHOALL OW OLTOULHOALL OW RECLEVUOHOA LLOW RECQUALUOHO ALLOW TAFORUOHOAL LOW HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) NO(NO) YES(Yes) YES(Yes) NO(NO) YES(Yes) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

Then. At the fringe of the test cell far from the BTS. l Deactivating concentric cell 1. TAFORUOHOALLOW=YES. perform the test and record the frequencies used by the MS. TRXFREQ=1. IUO=UNDERLAID. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. MNC="00". IUOTP=Concentric_cell. Ltd. LAC=1. CELLNAME="cell". Switch over the frequencies used by the MS to the frequencies used by the overlaid cell when the MS is near to the BTS. MCC="460". TRXBN=0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ENIUO=YES. OLTOULHOALLOW=YES. ULTOOLHOALLOW=NO. Then. CTYPE=GSM900. 3. CELLIDX=0. /*Configure concentric handover parameters of the cell*/ SET CELLHOIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0. l Verifying the deactivation of concentric cell 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. RECQUALUOHOALLOW=NO.*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. RECLEVUOHOALLOW=YES. /*Set the basic handover parameters of the cell. CELLIDX=0. run the SET CELLHOIUO command to set the parameters related to the concentric cell handover according to the actual network conditions. 57-3 2. ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Add a cell. If Cell IUO Type is set to Normal_cell(Normal cell) or EDB_cell(Enhanced double freq cell). Postrequisite l Verifying concentric cell 1.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 57 Configuring Concentric Cell Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD CELLIUO command. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric cell). run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal cell) or EDB_cell(Enhanced double freq cell). CELLIDX=0. At the fringe of the test cell far from the BTS. it indicates that the concentric cell function is deactivated. TRXBN=0. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Concentric Circles HO Allowed to YES(Yes).. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. perform the test and record the frequencies used by the MS as the frequencies configured for the underlaid cell.*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. /*Configure the concentric attributes of the cell. use the test MS to make a call to a fixedline phone. CI=1. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. AST=ACTIVAED. /*Configure the concentric attributes of the TRX.*/ MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.*/ MOD TRXIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the MOD TRXIUO command to set HW_Concentric Attribute of the TRX to OVERLAID(Overlaid Subcell) or UNDERLAID (Underlaid Subcell) according to the actual network conditions. BTSIDX=0. use the test MS to make a call to the fixed-line phone. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CONHOEN=YES. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. Hold on the call and move the MS from the fringe of the test cell towards the BTS. 2. and set Enhanced Concentric Allowed according to the actual network conditions.

Ltd. 3. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Verify that the frequencies used by the MS do not change when the MS is near to the BTS. Hold on the call and move the MS from the fringe of the test cell towards the BTS.57 Configuring Concentric Cell HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2. 57-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 58 Configuring Extended Cell 58 Scenario Impact None.. The extended cell function is applicable in less populated areas with low signal fading such as deserts. BTS Configuring Extended Cell The application of extended cell breaks the coverage limit of 35 km of a GSM cell. . Band Activity State Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 cell GSM900 ACTIVATED (Activated) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 58-1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Prerequisite l l The extended cell function is license-controlled. seashores. islands. This helps operators to provide wider coverage in special areas. and water areas. see Activate BSC License. Ltd. For details. l Preparation Table 58-1 Example of the configuring extended cell Data Type Cell attributes Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX CELLNAME CTYPE AST Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Cell Name Freq. NEs Involved BSC. The extended cell function depends on the concentric cell function.

58 Configuring Extended Cell HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Data Type Parameter ID MCC MNC LAC CI TRXBN TRXFREQ Parameter Name MCC MNC LAC CI TRX Board No. TRX Freq. Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .. Cell IUO Type Enhanced Concentric Allowed Cell Extension Type Example 460 00 1 1 0 1 Concentric_cell (Concentric cell) YES(Yes) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Cell concentric attributes IUOTP ENIUO Cell extension type EXTTP DaulTst_ExtCell (Double Timeslot Extension Cell) UNDERLAID (Underlaid Subcell) YES(Yes) TRX concentric attributes Cell handover basic parameters Cell concentric handover parameters IUO HW_Concentric Attribute Concentric Circles HO Allowed Current HO Control Algorithm UL to OL HO Allowed OL to UL HO Allowed RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning CONHOEN HOCTRLSWITC H ULTOOLHOALL OW OLTOULHOALL OW RECLEVUOHOA LLOW RECQUALUOHO ALLOW HOALGORITH M1(HO Algorithm I) NO(NO) YES(Yes) YES(Yes) NO(NO) 58-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

LAC=1. AST=ACTIVAED. CI=1. /*Set the concentric handover parameters of the cell. TRXBN=0. TRXFREQ=1.. run the MOD CELLIUO command to set Cell IUO Type to Concentric_cell(Concentric cell). /*Configure the concentric attributes of the cell. CELLIDX=0. RECQUALUOHOALLOW=NO. IUOTP=Concentric_cell. and set Enhanced Concentric Allowed according to the actual network conditions. /*Set the cell extension type. run the ADD CELL command to add a cell. Postrequisite l Verifying extended cell 1. run the MOD CELLEXT command to set Cell Extension Type to DaulTst_ExtCell(Double Timeslot Extension Cell). IUO=UNDERLAID. /*Set the basic handover parameters of the cell. ULTOOLHOALLOW=NO. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1.*/ MOD CELLIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET CELLHOIUO command to set the parameters related to the concentric cell handover according to the actual network conditions. EXTTP=DaulTst_ExtCell. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Concentric Circles HO Allowed to YES(Yes). Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 58 Configuring Extended Cell Data Type Parameter ID TAFORUOHOAL LOW Parameter Name TA for UO HO Allowed Example YES(Yes) Source Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 58-3 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .*/ ADD CELL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0.*/ MOD CELLEXT: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. For details. ----End Example An example script is as follows: /*Add a cell. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.*/ MOD TRXIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. MCC="460". MNC="00". Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLIDX=0. RECLEVUOHOALLOW=YES. BTSIDX=0. TAFORUOHOALLOW=YES. OLTOULHOALLOW=YES. see Monitoring Channel Status in the BSC LMT User Guide. /*Configure the concentric attributes of the TRX. CONHOEN=YES. CELLNAME="cell". CTYPE=GSM900. TRXBN=0. run the MOD TRXIUO command to set HW_Concentric Attribute of the TRX to OVERLAID(Overlaid Subcell) or UNDERLAID (Underlaid Subcell) according to the actual network conditions.*/ SET CELLHOIUO: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Step 6 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. Start the monitoring of the channel status. CELLIDX=0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Verify that no two adjacent TCHs simultaneously change the state. Use an MS to call a fixed-line phone on the edge of the test cell. l Deactivating extended cell 1. In the monitoring interface.. run the MOD CELLEXT command to set Cell IUO Type to Normal_cell(Normal cell). 2. turn into the working state. the TCHs turn into the idle state simultaneously. 3. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . When the call is terminated. 58-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. verify that two adjacent TCHs with the same TRX No. Verifying deactivation of extended cell: The operations are the same as those for Verifying extended cell.58 Configuring Extended Cell HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2. Ltd.

thus avoiding IP packet loss and timeout of the IP packet transmission.. after the QoS mechanism is introduced. The higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. this feature supports the mapping between R97/98 QoS and R99 QoS. Huawei GBSS provides the QoS means such as GBR. To be compatible with R97/R98 QoS. that is. and balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation. 59. the server at the application layer adjusts the transmit rate based on the bandwidth that can be provided by the radio links.4 Configuring PoC QoS The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of real-time packet service that has high bandwidth and delay requirements. 59-1 . allocation/retention priority (ARP). The requirements for PS QoS are defined by QoS attributes. traffic handling priority (THP). In addition. the BSC allocates radio resources according to the guaranteed bit rate (GBR) of the QoS to ensure the data transmission rate. transfer delay. To guarantee the service quality and real-time performance.2 Configuring QoS ARP and THP After the QoS mechanism is introduced. 59. the subscribers with high priority can preempt the radio resources of the subscribers with low priority. 59. guaranteed bit rate (GBR). the packet performance is greatly improved when multiple services are processed simultaneously. 59. and file transfer is improved. the performance of the services such as large-sized email sending.3 Configuring PS Active Package Management With this feature.1 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR) For the streaming class services. webpage browsing. reduced data transmission delay. maximum bit rate (MBR). When the radio resources are insufficient. Ltd. including the traffic class. As a result. the quality of GPRS/EGPRS services on radio access network. the BSC allocates radio resources to the users according to the allocation/retention priority (ARP) and traffic handle priority (THP) of the QoS.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59 PS QoS 59 About This Chapter PS QoS PS QoS refers to GPRS/EGPRS QoS. and reliability.

the subscribers with high priority can preempt the radio resources of the subscribers with low priority. Ensures preferentially the bandwidth requirement and service experience of the subscribers with high priority when radio resources are insufficient.1 Configuring Streaming QoS(GBR) For the streaming class services. SGSN Prerequisite l l The Streaming QoS(GBR) function is license-controlled. The SGSN is configured. None. The MS and SGSN support the packet flow management (PFM) procedure and the R99 QoS function. MS.. after the QoS mechanism is introduced.59 PS QoS HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59. Ltd. When the radio resources are insufficient. l l l Preparation Table 59-1 Example of the configuring streaming QoS(GBR) Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX PFCSUP GBRQOS QOSOPT STREAMSWH Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index PFC Support Support Gbr QoS Support QoS Optimize Occupy Switch of Streaming Resource Example BYCELLIDX(By Cell Index) 0 YES(Support) YES(Support) YES(Support) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 59-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. The GPRS/EGPRS function is enabled. see Activate BSC License. For details. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . the BSC allocates radio resources according to the guaranteed bit rate (GBR) of the QoS to ensure the data transmission rate. Impact NEs Involved BSC. Scenario Ensures sufficient and stable bandwidth for the streaming services.

run the LST BSCBASIC command to check the setting of Occupy Switch of Streaming Resource. If the parameter is set to Yes. ----End Example An example script of configuring streaming QoS(GBR) is as follows: /*Modify NSE*/ MOD NSE: NSEI=1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. this feature supports the mapping between R97/98 QoS and R99 QoS. the BSC allocates radio resources to the users according to the allocation/retention priority (ARP) and traffic handle priority (THP) of the QoS. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. QOSOPT=YES. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 59-3 . Ltd. /*Configure attributes of BSC*/ MOD BSCBASIC: STREAMSWH=YES. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. it indicates that the function of streaming QoS is activated. If the parameter is set to NO (No). run theMOD NSE command to setPFC Support to YES(Support). and thus obtain better QoS. To be compatible with R97/R98 QoS. /*Configure parameters of GPRS cell*/ SET PSOTHERPARA: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. run the LST BSCBASIC command to check the setting of Occupy Switch of Streaming Resource. CELLIDX=0. The higher-priority users enjoy more radio resources and higher radio bandwidth. PFCSUP=YES. None. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. GBRQOS=YES. – – l Deactivating streaming QoS 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2.2 Configuring QoS ARP and THP After the QoS mechanism is introduced. run theSET PSOTHERPARA command to setSupport Gbr QoS and Support QoS Optimize to YES(Support). run theMOD BSCBASIC command to setOccupy Switch of Streaming Resource to YES(YES). run the LST NSE command to verify that PFC Support is set to YES(Support). it indicates that the function of streaming QoS is deactivated.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59 PS QoS Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. enjoy faster data rate. Postrequisite l Verifying Streaming QoS – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Scenario Impact Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Ensuring the higher-priority user to obtain higher bandwidth. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the MOD BSCBASIC command to set Occupy Switch of Streaming Resource to NO(No). run the LST PSOTHERPARA command to verify that Support Gbr QoS and Support QoS Optimize are set to YES(Support).. 59.

THP2-ARP1 Priority Weight.59 PS QoS HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l l The QoS ARP and THP function is license-controlled. l Set the following parameters to control the radio block budget weights of the interactive service: THP1-ARP1 Priority Weight. For details. THP3-ARP1 Priority Weight. see Activate BSC License.. and Background-ARP3 Priority Weight. Set the following parameters to control the radio block budget weights of the background service: Background-ARP1 Priority Weight. THP1-ARP2 Priority Weight. THP3-ARP2 Priority Weight. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. Background-ARP2 Priority Weight. run theSET PSCHM command to set GPRS channel management parameters. l l ----End Example An example script of configuring QoS ARP and THP is as follows: 59-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. THP2-ARP2 Priority Weight. l Preparation Table 59-2 Example of the configuring QoS ARP and THP Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX BKGARP1PRIWEIGH T BKGARP2PRIWEIGH T BKGARP3PRIWEIGH T Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Background-ARP1 Priority Weight Background-ARP2 Priority Weight Background-ARP3 Priority Weight Example BYCELLIDX(By Cell Index) 0 4 2 1 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Set the following parameters to control the radio block budget weights of the BE service: BestEffort-ARP1 Priority Weight. and THP3-ARP3 Priority Weight. BestEffort-ARP2 Priority Weight. THP2ARP3 Priority Weight. The GPRS/EGPRS function is enabled. and BestEffortARP3 Priority Weight. THP1-ARP3 Priority Weight. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

BKGARP2PRIWEIGHT=2. the performance of the services such as large-sized email sending.. CELLIDX=0.3 Configuring PS Active Package Management With this feature.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59 PS QoS SET PSCHM: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l l The PS Active Package Management function is not license-controlled. As a result. BKGARP1PRIWEIGHT=4. thus avoiding IP packet loss and timeout of the IP packet transmission. 59. Scenario Impact The feature is applicable to scenarios where congestion may occur because of bandwidth limitation. webpage browsing. The GPRS/EGPRS function is enabled. Preparation Table 59-3 Example of the configuring PS active package management Parameter ID AqmMinTh AqmTarTh AqmMaxTh AqmSwitch AqmNinit AqmNLowerBound AqmNUpBound AqmM Parameter Name Aqm MINth AAqm TarTh Aqm MaxTh Aqm Switch Aqm Ninit Aqm NLowerBound Aqm NUpBound Aqm M Example 256 384 1024 OPEN(Open) 20 10 20 20 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and file transfer is improved. 59-5 . the packet performance is greatly improved when multiple services are processed simultaneously. the server at the application layer adjusts the transmit rate based on the bandwidth that can be provided by the radio links. None. BKGARP3PRIWEIGHT=1. Ltd. In addition.

59 PS QoS HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. and Aqm M. Aqm NLowerBound. run the LST PSSOFTPARA command to check the setting of Aqm Switch. and balanced uplink and downlink channel allocation. AqmMaxTh=1024. set the following parameters according to the network condition: Aqm MINth. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set Aqm Switch to CLOSE(Close). Aqm Ninit. AqmM=20. AqmTarTh=384. NEs Involved BSC. it indicates that PS active package management is deactivated. AqmNLowerBound=10. Huawei GBSS provides the QoS means such as GBR. Then. If the parameter is set to CLOSE(Close). On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. reduced data transmission delay. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. If the parameter is set to OPEN(Open). l Deactivating PS active package management 1. Aqm NUpBound. 2. AqmSwitch=OPEN. The Streaming QoS(GBR) function is configured. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 59-6 . 59. Aqm MaxTh. Aqm TarTh. The GPRS/EGPRS function is enabled. MS Prerequisite l l l The PoC QoS function is not license-controlled. ----End Example An example script of configuring PS active package management is as follows: SET PSSOFTPARA: AqmMinTh=256. Scenario Impact This feature guarantees the real-time performance of the PoC service.4 Configuring PoC QoS The push to talk over cellular (PoC) service is a type of real-time packet service that has high bandwidth and delay requirements. it indicates that PS active package management is activated. improves the voice quality of the PoC service. None. Postrequisite l Verifying PS active package management – On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the LST PSSOFTPARA command to check the setting of Aqm Switch. run theSET PSSOFTPARA command to setAqm Switch to OPEN(Open). AqmNUpBound=20. AqmNinit=20. To guarantee the service quality and real-time performance.

59-7 . Max. GBR for POC Service. and Transmission Delay of POC Service. run theSET PSOTHERPARA command to set the following parameters according to the network condition: Min. POCDELAY=650.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 59 PS QoS Preparation Table 59-4 Example of the configuring PoC QoS Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX POCGBRMIN POCGBRMAX POCDELAY Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Min. GBR for POC Service Max. CELLIDX=0. GBR for POC Service. GBR for POC Service Transmission Delay of POC Service Example BYCELLIDX(By Cell Index) 0 6 16 650 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. POCGBRMIN=6. Ltd. ----End Example An example script of configuring PoC QoS is as follows: SET PSOTHERPARA: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. POCGBRMAX=16..

.

Preparation Table 60-1 Example of the configuring Half-Rate Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX MPMODE CELLIDX VOICEVER Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Multiplexing Mode Cell Index Speech Version Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 MODE2_1 0 Half_rate_Ver1(Halfrate Ver 1) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 60-1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MSC. NEs Involved BSC. The feature applies to increase the network capacity and improve the frequency usage without increasing the hardware cost. Prerequisite l l The half-rate function is license-controlled. see Activate BSC License. Ltd.. For details. a physical channel can carry the services of two half-rate MSs instead of the services of a full-rate MS. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 60 Configuring Half-Rate 60 Scenario Impact None. MS Configuring Half-Rate Half-rate indicates that the voice coding rate decreases by half based on the new coding algorithm. In this way.

If the network is not busy. the channel will be converted from the TCHF to the TCHH. Then. TCHHs are assigned preferably. If the network is busy. run theMOD CHAN command. TCHFs are assigned preferably. the BSC determines to assign TCHHs or TCHFs based on the traffic volume of the network. channels on the TRX are assigned preferably. set Channel Type according to the network condition. NOTE In channel assignment algorithms. Step 5 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Channel Type TCH Rate Adjust Allow TCH Traffic Busy Threshold Example 0 3 TCHHR(TCH Half Rate) YES(YES) 50 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. the channels on the TRXs that support the rate adjustment can be reserved for further use. run theMOD CELLCHMGAD command to set TCH Traffic Busy Threshold to 50. NOTE If a TRX does not have TCHHs and only has TCHFs. it indicates that the traffic volume of the current network is high. If the channel seizure rate exceeds the TCH Traffic Busy Threshold. Therefore. For a TRX whose TCH Rate Adjust Allow is not enabled.60 Configuring Half-Rate HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID TRXBN CHNO CHTYPE TCHAJFLAG TCHBUSYTHRES Parameter Name TRX Board No. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . To configure a channel as a TCHF fixedly or configure a channel with dynamic conversion between the TCHF and TCHH. Step 4 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Channel No. run theMOD CELLCCACCESS command to set Speech Version to Half_rate_Ver1(Half-rate Ver 1). set its Channel Type to TCH Full Rate. run theMOD TRXDEV command to set TCH Rate Adjust Allow to YES(YES). set its Channel Type to TCH Half Rate. NOTE Adhere to the following principles when configuring the channel type: l l To configure a channel as a TCHH fixedly.. Step 3 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The resources can be used maximally.If the value of this parameter exceeds 50. ----End 60-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run theMOD BTSMPMODE command to set Multiplexing Mode to MODE1_1 or MODE2_1. TCH Rate Adjust Allow needs to be enabled to support the half-rate service. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

60-3 . TRXBN=0. run the DSP CALLRES command to view the call resources of an MS. CELLIDX=0. VOICEVER=Half_rate_Ver1-1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. /*Enable the adjustment of the TCH rate*/ MOD TRXDEV: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. MPMODE=MODE2_1. Verifying deactivation of half-rate: Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell. BTSIDX=0. /*Configure the channel type*/ MOD CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLIDX=0. CHNO=3. /*Configure the half-rate speech version*/ MOD CELLCCACCESS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. /*Configure the traffic busy threshold of the TCH*/ MOD CELLCHMGAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CELLIDX=0. it indicates that the half-rate function is activated. TCHAJFLAG=YES. Then. 2. TCHBUSYTHRES=50.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 60 Configuring Half-Rate Example An example script of configuring Half-Rate is as follows: /*Change the multiplexing mode of the Abis interface*/ MOD BTSMPMODE: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. CHTYPE=TCHHR. l Deactivating half-rate 1. run the DSP CALLRES command to verify that Speech Version is not HR. 2. Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell. TRXBN=0. run the MOD CELLCCACCESS command to change Speech Version to a value other than Half_rate_Ver1 (Half-rate Ver 1). CELLIDX=0. Postrequisite l Verifying half-rate 1. Ltd. If Speech Version is HR. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..

.

NEs Involved BSC. If more than three timeslots are required on the uplink. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set Support High Multislot Class to SUPPORT(Support). Ltd.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 61 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes 61 Prerequisite Configuring MS High Multislot Classes The function of MS high multislot classes enables the allocation of a maximum of five uplink/ downlink timeslots to an MS. The MS must support this function. the function of extended dynamic allocation must be enabled. ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of MS high multislot classes is as follows: Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 61-1 . thus increasing the uplink/downlink throughput of an MS. MS l l l The function of MS high multislot classes is not license-controlled.. Scenario Impact The uplink/downlink throughput of an MS is increased. Preparation Table 61-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring MS high multislot classes Parameter ID SUPPORTDL5TS Parameter Name Support High Multislot Class Example SUPPORT(Support) Source Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. None.

For details. l Deactivating MS high multislot classes 1. and query the value of the timeslot-allocation information element (IE). 61-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.61 Configuring MS High Multislot Classes HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) /*Configure the function of MS high multislot classes*/ SET PSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTDL5TS=SUPPORT. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verify that the number of 1s in the value of the IE in the corresponding binary bitmap reaches the maximum number of downlink timeslots in the high multislot capability. Use an MS supporting the function of MS high multislot classes to download data in the test cell. see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .. Double-click the Packet Downlink Assignment message in the traced messages. Verify that the maximum number of 1s in the value of timeslot-allocation in the corresponding binary bitmap is four. which is smaller than the maximum number of downlink timeslots in the high multislot capability. Ltd. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set Support High Multislot Class to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). Verifying the deactivation of MS high multislot classes: The operations are the same as those for Verifying MS high multislot classes. Start the tracing of the messages in the PS domain on the Um interface. 2. 3. Postrequisite l Verifying MS high multislot classes 1.

For details. 62-1 . and services with high traffic volume are implemented on the uplink.. None. Ltd. The MS must support the EDA function. ----End Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. thus increasing the uplink throughput. l Preparation Table 62-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring EDA Parameter ID SUPPORTEDA Parameter Name Support EDA Example SUPPORT(Support) Source Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. The uplink rate is increased. NEs Involved BSC and MS Prerequisite l l The EDA function is license-controlled. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set Support EDA to SUPPORT(Support). see Activate BSC License. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 62 Configuring Extended Dynamic Allocation(EDA) 62 Scenario Impact Configuring Extended Dynamic Allocation(EDA) The EDA function enables the allocation of more uplink timeslots to an MS.

Double-click the Packet Uplink Assignment message in the traced messages. Postrequisite l Verifying EDA 1. Verify that the maximum number of is-tn0 to is-tn7 with the value being one in the timeslot-allocation-power-ctrl message is two. Verify that the number of 1s in the values of is-tn0 to is-tn7 exceeds two. run the SET PSSOFTPARA command to set Support EDA to NOTSUPPORT(Not Support). Ltd. 3. 2.. Use an MS supporting the EDA function to upload data. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Verifying the deactivation of EDA: The operations are the same as those for Verifying EDA. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . 2. and query the values of is-tn0 to is-tn7 in the timeslot-allocation-power-ctrl information element (IE). 62-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Deactivating EDA 1. For details. see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide.62 Configuring Extended Dynamic Allocation(EDA) HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Example An example script for configuring the EDA function is as follows: /*Configure the EDA function*/ SET PSSOFTPARA: SUPPORTEDA=SUPPORT. Start the tracing of the messages in the PS domain on the Um interface.

Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. NEs Involved BSC Configuring CS-3/CS-4 The CS-3/CS-4 function enables the BSC to automatically adjust the coding scheme to a higher one in the area with a low bit error rate based on the existing coding scheme of a GPRS MS and the transmission quality of the MS. 63-1 . Prerequisite l l The CS-3/CS-4 function is license-controlled. a higher throughput is provided. Preparation Table 63-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring CS-3/CS-4 Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX UPFIXCS DNFIXCS Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Uplink Fixed CS Type Downlink Fixed CS Type Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 CS3(CS3) CS3(CS3) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. For details.. The rate of GPRS services is increased. In this manner. and the performance of GPRS services is improved in the area where the EGPRS services are not put into operation. see Activate BSC License.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 63 Configuring CS-3/CS-4 63 Scenario Impact None. Ltd.

CELLIDX=0. UPFIXCS=CS3. For details. Downlink Data Block (CS-4). 3. see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. 63-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. 2. 2. or Uplink Data Block (CS-4) message is not present..63 Configuring CS-3/CS-4 HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Uplink Data Block (CS-3). l Deactivating CS-3/CS-4 1. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . run the SET CELLPSCS command to set Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type to CS3(CS3) or CS4(CS4). Verifying the deactivation of CS-3/CS-4: The operations are the same as those for Verifying CS-3/CS-4. Verify that the Downlink Data Block (CS-3). it indicates that the used coding scheme is adjusted dynamically. DNFIXCS=CS4. ----End Example An example script for configuring the CS-3/CS-4 function is as follows: /*Configure the CS-3/CS-4 function*/ SET CELLPSCS: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. NOTE If Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type are set to UNFIXED(UNFIXED). Postrequisite l Verifying CS-3/CS-4 1. verify that the Uplink Data Block (CS-3) or Uplink Data Block (CS-4) message is present. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Start the tracing of the messages in the PS domain on the Um interface. verify that the Downlink Data Block (CS-3) or Downlink Data Block (CS-4) message is present. run the SET CELLPSCS command to set Uplink Fixed CS Type and Downlink Fixed CS Type to CS1(CS1) or CS2(CS2). When the uploading is performed on the PC connected to an MS performing GPRS services. When the Web browsing is performed on the PC connected to an MS performing GPRS services.

and the Gs interface (the interface between the MSC/ VLR and the SGSN) must exist. CCCHs. Ltd. None. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. the GBSS equipment must support network operation mode I. or PACCHs on the network side. 64-1 . Impact NEs Involved BSC and MSC Prerequisite l l The function of network operation mode I is license-controlled. thus saving and optimizing radio resources. see Activate BSC License. The Gs interface is already configured. Scenario To enable the paging co-ordination function. The MS monitors only one paging channel. For details.. l Preparation Table 64-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring network operation mode I Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX NMO Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Network Operation Mode Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 NMOI(Network Operation Mode I) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. With the function of network operation mode I. the signaling traffic between the MS and the network is reduced.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 64 Configuring Network Operation Mode I 64 Configuring Network Operation Mode I The function of network operation mode I enables the sending of the CS paging messages over PCCCHs.

l Deactivating network operation mode I 1. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Verify that the value of nmo in the gprscell-options information element (IE) is network-Mode-of-operation-I. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLIDX=0.64 Configuring Network Operation Mode I HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. Ltd. Verifying the deactivation of network operation mode I: The operations are the same as those for Verifying network operation mode I. 64-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Start the tracing of the messages in the PS domain on the Um interface. see Tracing PS Domain Messages on the Um Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Verify that the value of nmo in the gprs-cell-options IE is not network-Mode-of-operation-I. run the SET PSBASE command to set Network Operation Mode to NMOI(Network Operation Mode I). ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of network operation mode I is as follows: /*Configure the function of network operation mode I*/ SET PSBASE: IDXTYPE=BYCELLIDX. 2. Use an MS to perform PS services in the test cell. Double-click the Packet PSI13 message. 3. NMO=NMOI. run the SET PSBASE command to set Network Operation Mode to NMOI(Network Operation Mode I). For details. Postrequisite l Verifying network operation mode I 1..

Ltd. and the signaling on the Abis interface is decreased. The CPU load of the board for processing the signaling of the CS services is reduced. In this manner. the BSC does not need to process the MRs. NEs Involved BSC and BTS Prerequisite l l The function of pre-processing of measurement report is not license-controlled. Preparation Table 65-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring the function of preprocessing of measurement report Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX BTSMESRPTPREPRO C PRIMMESPPT Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index MR.Preprocessing Transfer Original MR Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 YES(YES) NO(NO) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 65-1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. The BTS must support this function. None. thus minimizing the risks of Abis transmission congestion. thus reducing the load of the BSC. ..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 65 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report 65 Scenario Impact Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report The function of pre-processing of measurement report enables the BTS to interpolate and filter measurement reports (MRs) and then report the results of the processed MRs to the BSC.

see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. 65-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. l Deactivating measurement report preprocessing 1. ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of pre-processing of measurement report is as follows: /*Configure the function of pre-processing of measurement report*/ MOD CELLHOCTRL: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Verify that the Measurement Result message rather than the Preprocessed Measurement Result message is present. CELLIDX=0. Transfer BS/MS Power Class. and Sent Freq.65 Configuring Pre-Processing of Measurement Report HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID BSMSPWRLEV MRPREPROCFREQ Parameter Name Transfer BS/MS Power Clas Sent Freq.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.Preprocessing to NO(NO). 3. Verifying the deactivation of pre-processing of measurement report: The operations are the same as those for Verifying pre-processing of measurement report. PRIMMESPPT=NO.Preprocessing to YES(Yes) and set Transfer Original MR. Postrequisite l Verifying pre-processing of measurement report 1. run the MOD CELLHOCTRL command to set MR. BSMSPWRLEV=YES. MRPREPROCFREQ=Once_ps. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. 2.of preprocessed MR as required. Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell. 2. BTSMESRPTPREPROC=YES.of preprocessed MR Example YES(YES) Once_ps(Once every second) Source Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. Verify that the Preprocessed Measurement Result message is present. run the MOD CELLHOCTRL command to set MR. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .

NEs Involved BSC and MS Prerequisite l l The EMR is not license-controlled. The MS must support the EMR function. more measurement objects such as bit error probability (BEP) and frame erase ratio (FER) are included. 66-1 . None. In this manner. Scenario Impact The capability of monitoring the voice quality and the performance of the power control algorithm and handover algorithm are improved. Compared with the common MR. Preparation Table 66-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring EMR Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX MEASURETYPE Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Report Type Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 Source Network planning Network planning EnhMeasReport Network (Enhanced planning Measurement Report) Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.. Ltd. the performance of the power control algorithm and handover algorithm is improved.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 66 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) 66 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) The EMR is the downlink measurement report (MR) of a new type introduced in R99.

66 Configuring Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLCCUTRANSYS command to set Report Type to EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report). ----End

Example
An example script for configuring EMR is as follows:
/*Configure EMR*/ MOD CELLCCUTRANSYS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, MEASURETYPE=EnhMeasReport;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying EMR 1. 2. 3. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. For details, see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Use an MS supporting the EMR function to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell. Double-click the measurement result message. Verify that the value of the pd-orenhanced-meas-msgtype information element (IE) is 0x10. Double-click the SACCH Filling message. Verify that the value of report-type is enhancedmeasurement-report when the value of system-info-type is measurementinformation. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLCCUTRANSYS command to set Report Type to a value other than EnhMeasReport(Enhanced Measurement Report). Verifying the deactivation of EMR: The operations are the same as those for Verifying EMR. Double-click the SACCH Filling message. Verify that the value of reporttype is not enhanced-measurement-report when the value of system-info-type is measurement-information.

l

Deactivating EMR 1.

2.

66-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

67 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction(AFC)

67
Scenario Impact

Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction(AFC)

The automatic frequency correction (AFC) function uses a special balancing algorithm to estimate the difference between the standard frequency and the frequency of the GMSK signal sent from the fast-moving MS to the BTS. The AFC estimates the frequency offset between the frequency of each received burst and the standard frequency in real time. Then, the estimated frequency offset is used to correct the RX working frequency of the BTS. The stable and reliable connection between the MS and the BTS in the case of high-speed mobile communications is ensured. None.

NEs Involved BSC

Prerequisite
l

AFC is not license-controlled.

Preparation
Table 67-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring AFC Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX FREQADJ Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Frequence Adjust Switch Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67-1

67 Configuring Automatic Frequency Correction(AFC)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

Procedure
Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to set Frequence adjust switch to YES(YES). ----End

Example
An example script for configuring AFC is as follows:
/*Configure AFC*/ MOD CELLOTHEXT: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, FREQADJ=YES;

Postrequisite
l

Verifying AFC 1. 2. 3. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. For details, see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Use the MS to call a fixed-line phone in the test cell, and hold on the call. Double-click the measurement result message. Verify that the frequency-shiftupmeasure information element (IE) is included in the message. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to set Frequence adjust switch to NO(NO). Verifying the deactivation of AFC: The operations are the same as those for Verifying AFC. Verify that the frequency-shift-upmeasure IE is not included in the measurement result message.

l

Deactivating AFC 1. 2.

67-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

68 Configuring Handover

68
About This Chapter

Configuring Handover

The service area of the GSM is composed of the cells with continuous coverage. To enable the subscribers to communicate without interruption and to optimize the network performance, the handover technique is introduced to the GSM system. 68.1 Configuring Basic Handover The basic handover is classified into edge handover, TA handover, Bad Quality (BQ) handover, and interference handover. 68.2 Configuring PBGT Handover A PBGT handover is performed in a neighboring cell with the lowest path loss in a period. In this manner, the user always receives services in a better serving cell, thus improving the voice quality. 68.3 Configuring Signal Level Rapid Fall Handover The algorithm of signal level rapid fall handover is more sensitive to level changes, thus preventing call drops due to a quick decrease in the level. 68.4 Configuring Load Handover The load handover enables the load balance between different cells. Specifically, the traffic of a heavy-loaded cell is transferred to an adjacent light-loaded cell in time. 68.5 Configuring Layered and Hierarchical Handover In the layered and hierarchical network, the layered and hierarchical handover enables the handover between different layers and hierarchies, thus evenly distributing the traffic on each frequency band. 68.6 Configuring Speed-Sensitive Handover The speed-sensitive handover function enables a fast-moving MS in a micro cell to be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers and call drops and improving user experience and network KPIs. 68.7 Configuring Directed Retry Directed retry is a special handover. During the assignment process, the BSC initiates the directed retry procedure if no TCH is available in the serving cell or the load of the serving cell is heavy. In this way, the MS is handed over to a neighboring cell. 68.8 Configuring Chain Cell Handover
Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68-1

68 Configuring Handover

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

The chain cell handover function enables a fast-moving MS to be preferentially handed over to a chain neighboring cell. 68.9 Configuring Better Cell Handover Evolving from the inter-layer handover and PBGT handover in handover algorithm I, the better cell handover is the specific handover decision in handover algorithm II.

68-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

68 Configuring Handover

68.1 Configuring Basic Handover
The basic handover is classified into edge handover, TA handover, Bad Quality (BQ) handover, and interference handover. Scenario Impact The continuity of a call is ensured. None.

NEs Involved BSC

Prerequisite
l

The basic handover function is not license-controlled.

Preparation
Table 68-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring basic handover Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX HOCTRLSWITCH FRINGEHOEN ULEDGETHRES DLEDGETHRES TAHOEN BQHOEN INTERFHOEN Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index HO Control Switch Edge Handover Allowed Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold TA HO Allowed BQ HO Allowed Interference HO Allowed Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) YES(YES) 10 20 YES(YES) YES(YES) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68-3

68 Configuring Handover
NOTE

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

l

Edge handover: The edge handover is the handover based on level for avoiding call drops. When an edge handover is triggered, the level of the target cell must be higher than the level of the serving cell and the inter-cell handover hysterisis. The edge handover is triggered when the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the edge handover threshold, and when the P/N criterion is satisfied during a certain statistical period. In this manner, the communication quality of the MS is maintained to some extent. TA handover: TA can be used as a standard of restricting the size of a cell. When the BSC determines that the TA of an MS exceeds the specified maximum TA threshold, a TA handover is triggered. If a serving cell meets the requirement for a TA handover, the serving cell is punished after the handover is complete. In this manner, the handover to the serving cell due to other causes is prevented. To meet the special requirements of an extended cell, special processing is performed on the TA handover algorithm. BQ handover: The bit error ratio (BER) reflects the transmission quality of radio links. The BSC measures the transmission quality of radio links according to the quality level in the measurement report. A poor quality level may be caused by low signal power or inter-channel interference. When the receive quality of the serving cell is lower than the BQ handover threshold, the BQ handover algorithm is enabled to maintain the communication quality of the MS. If a serving cell meets the requirement for a BQ handover, the serving cell is punished after the handover is complete. In this manner, the handover to the serving cell due to other causes is prevented. Interference handover: When the receive level of a serving cell is good but the receive quality deteriorates, the interference handover algorithm is enabled to maintain the communication quality of the MS.

l

l

l

Procedure
l Configuring edge handover 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Edge Handover Allowed to YES(YES) and set Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold and Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold as required.

When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM1(HO Algorithm I), set Edge HO Watch Time[s], Edge HO Valid Time[s], Edge HO AdjCell Watch Time[s], and Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time[s] as required. When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II), set Edge HO Watch Time[0.5s], Edge HO Valid Time[0.5s], Edge HO AdjCell Watch Time[0.5s], and Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time[0.5s] as required.

l

Configuring TA handover 1. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set TA HO Allowed to YES(YES). Then, set the following parameters as required:

When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II), set TA HO watch time[0.5 s] and TA HO valid time[0.5 s] by running the SET CELLHOBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the MOD CELLHOIUO command to set Emergency Handover TA Threshold. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOFITPEN command to set Penalty Time after TA HO[s] and Penalty Level after TA HO.

l

Configuring BQ handover 1. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set BQ HO Allowed to YES(YES). Then, set the following parameters as required:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

68-4

HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML)

68 Configuring Handover

When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II), set BQ HO watch time[0.5 s] and BQ HO valid time[0.5 s] by running the SET CELLHOBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In the case of non-AMR calls, set UL Qual. Threshold and DL Qual. Threshold by running the MOD CELLHOEMG command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In the case of AMR FR calls, set DLQuaLimitAMRFR and ULQuaLimitAMRFR by running the SET CELLAMRQUL command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In the case of AMR HR calls, set DLQuaLimitAMRHR and ULQuaLimitAMRHR by running the SET CELLAMRQUL command on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

l

Configuring interference handover 1. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal, run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Interference HO Allowed to YES(YES). Then, set the following parameters as required:

When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II), set Interfere HO static time[0.5 s] and Interfere HO valid time[0.5 s] by running SET CELLHOBASIC command and set Penalty time on interfere HO[s] by running the SET CELLHOFITPEN command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In the case of non-AMR-FR calls, set RXQUAL1 to RXQUAL12 by running the SET CELLAMRQUL command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. In the case of AMR FR calls, set RXLEVOff and RXQUAL1 to RXQUAL12 by running the SET CELLAMRQUL command on the Local Maintenance Terminal.

----End

Example
An example script for configuring the basic handover function is as follows:
/*Configure edge handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, FRINGEHOEN=YES, ULEDGETHRES=10, DLEDGETHRES=20; /*Configure TA handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, /*Configure BQ handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, /*Configuring interference handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX, CELLIDX=0, INTERFHOEN=YES;

HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,

HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, TAHOEN=YES; HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1, BQHOEN=YES; HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1,

Postrequisite
l

Verifying basic handover

Verifying edge handover 1. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. For details, see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 68-5

Issue 01 (2010-05-20)

Verify that the value of the cause information element in the Handover Performed or Handover Required message is not ecv_norm_a_uplink_strenth or ecv_norm_a_downlink_strenth. 2. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.68 Configuring Handover HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 2. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. – Verifying BQ handover 1. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. verify that the values of certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_uplink_interfere or ecv_norm_a_downlink_interfere. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. 2. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. 2. For details. 2. 2. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. 68-6 . – Verifying TA handover 1. Verifying the deactivation of BQ handover: The operations are the same as those for Verifying BQ handover. For details. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set TA HO Allowed to NO(NO). – Verifying interference handover 1. verify that the values of certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_uplink_quality or ecv_norm_a_downlink_quality. Ltd. – Deactivating BQ handover 1. Verify that the value of the cause information element in the Handover Performed or Handover Required message is not ecv_norm_a_distance. Verifying the deactivation of edge handover: The operations are the same as those for Verifying edge handover. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) – Deactivating TA handover 1. l Deactivating basic handover – Deactivating edge handover 1. verify that the values of certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_uplink_strenth or ecv_norm_a_downlink_strenth. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Edge HO Allowed to NO(NO). 2. Verify that the value of the cause information Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set BQ HO Allowed to NO(NO). Verifying the deactivation of TA handover: The operations are the same as those for Verifying TA handover. verify that the values of certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_distance. For details.

Verify that the value of the cause information element in the Handover Performed or Handover Required message is not ecv_norm_a_uplink_interfere or ecv_norm_a_downlink_interfere. 2. Ltd. The PBGT handover function is effective only when HO algorithm I is enabled.2 Configuring PBGT Handover A PBGT handover is performed in a neighboring cell with the lowest path loss in a period. thus improving the voice quality. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Interference HO Allowed to NO(NO). – Deactivating interference handover 1. . 68. On the Local Maintenance Terminal..HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover element in the Handover Performed or Handover Required message is not ecv_norm_a_uplink_quality or ecv_norm_a_downlink_quality. None. Scenario Impact With this function. the user can camp on a better cell. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l l The PBGT handover function is not license-controlled. Verifying the deactivation of interference handover: The operations are the same as those for Verifying interference handover. thus enjoying better voice quality. the user always receives services in a better serving cell. In this manner. Preparation Table 68-2 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PBGT handover Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX HOCTRLSWITCH PBGTHOEN PBGTSTAT PBGTLAST Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index HO Control Switch PBGT HO Allowed PBGT Watch Time [s] PBGT Valid Time[s] Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) YES(YES) 3 2 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 68-7 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

if the level of a user quickly decreases during a call because the call is made in a corner or a concave ground or because the components of the BTS component become ineffective. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set PBGT HO Allowed to YES(YES) and set PBGT Watch Time [s] and PBGT Valid Time[s] as required. l Deactivating PBGT handover 1. PBGTHOEN=YES. Scenario With this function. 68. PBGTLAST=2. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set PBGT HO Allowed to NO(NO). CELLIDX=0. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 68-8 . 2.68 Configuring Handover HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. Ltd. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. Postrequisite l Verifying PGBT handover 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Impact NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l l The function of signal level rapid fall handover is not license-controlled..3 Configuring Signal Level Rapid Fall Handover The algorithm of signal level rapid fall handover is more sensitive to level changes. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. thus preventing call drops due to a quick decrease in the level. PBGTSTAT=3. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. For details. verify that certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_better_cell. The function of signal level rapid fall handover is effective only when HO algorithm I is enabled. ----End Example An example script for configuring the PBGT handover function is as follows: /*Configure PBGT handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. a handover is performed to prevent call drops. None.

Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. verify that the values of certain cause information elements (IEs) in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_uplink_strenth. ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of signal level rapid fall handover is as follows: /*Configure signal level rapid fall handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. the traffic of a heavy-loaded cell is transferred to an adjacent light-loaded cell in time. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. After the A interface tracing window is displayed.. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. RXQCKFALLHOEN=YES. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Preparation Table 68-3 Example of data negotiated and planned for configuring signal level rapid fall handover Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX HOCTRLSWITCH RXQCKFALLHOEN Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index HO Control Switch Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.4 Configuring Load Handover The load handover enables the load balance between different cells. 68-9 . 2. l Deactivating signal level rapid fall handover 1. Specifically. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed to YES(YES). run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed to NO(NO). For details. CELLIDX=0. 68. Postrequisite l Verifying signal level rapid fall handover 1.

Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . thus alleviating congestion. run the SET CELLHOAD command to set the following parameters as required: System Flux Threshold for Load HO. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. Preparation Table 68-4 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring load handover Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX HOCTRLSWITCH LOADHOEN SYSFLOWLEV TRIGTHRES ACCTHRES LOADOFFSET PERIOD STEP Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index HO Control Switch Load HO Allowed System Flux Threshold for Load HO Load HO Threshold Load Req. In hot spots.68 Configuring Handover HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Scenario Impact The load between cells is shared. Load 68-10 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Load HO Threshold. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The load handover function is not license-controlled. None. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Load HO Allowed to YES(YES). congestion can be effectively reduced.on Candidate Cell Load HO Bandwidth Load HO Step Period Load HO Step Level Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) YES(YES) 10 90 85 25 10 5 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.

On the Local Maintenance Terminal. thus solving the problem of insufficient frequency resources. TRIGTHRES=90. 2. this function implements the even distribution of traffic. PERIOD=10. 2. l Deactivating load handover 1. In a GSM900/DCS1800 multi-band network.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Req. CELLIDX=0. Load HO Step Period. CELLIDX=0. this function enables the even distribution of traffic between different frequency bands. Impact NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The function of layered and hierarchical handover is not license-controlled. 68. None. the layered and hierarchical handover enables the handover between different layers and hierarchies. ACCTHRES=85. 68-11 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . thus meeting the requirements of different networking modes. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. ----End Example An example script for configuring the load handover function is as follows: /*Configure load handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Verifying deactivation of load handover: The operations are the same as those for Verifying load handover. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. Ltd. Postrequisite l Verifying load handover 1.5 Configuring Layered and Hierarchical Handover In the layered and hierarchical network. Verify that the cause information element in the Handover Performed or Handover Required message is not ecv_norm_a_traffic. After the A interface tracing window is displayed.on Candidate Cell. thus evenly distributing the traffic on each frequency band. For details. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. Scenario In a layered and hierarchical network. SET CELLHOAD: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. and Load HO Step Level. LOADHOEN=YES. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Load HO Allowed to NO(NO). STEP=5. verify that certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_traffic. Load HO Bandwidth. SYSFLOWLEV=10.. LOADOFFSET=25. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface.

LEVLAST=2. Layer HO Valid Time[s]. Preparation Table 68-5 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring layered and hierarchical handover Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX HOCTRLSWITCH LEVHOEN LEVSTAT LEVLAST INLAYHOTH LEVHOHYST Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index HO Control Switch Level HO Allowed Layer HO Watch Time [s] Layer HO Valid Time[s] Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) YES(YES) 3 2 25 2 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of layered and hierarchical handover is as follows: /*Configure layered and hierarchical handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . INLAYHOTH=25. 68-12 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. and Inter-layer HO Hysteresis. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Level HO Allowed to YES(YES) and set the following parameters as required: Layer HO Watch Time[s].68 Configuring Handover l HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) The function of layered and hierarchical handover is effective only when HO algorithm I is enabled. LEVHOEN=YES.. Inter-layer HO Threshold. CELLIDX=0. LEVHOHYST=2. LEVSTAT=3. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. Ltd.

Scenario Impact It is recommended that the speed-sensitive handover function be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. l Deactivating layered and hierarchical handover 1. thus reducing the number of handovers and call drops and improving user experience and network KPIs. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. None.6 Configuring Speed-Sensitive Handover The speed-sensitive handover function enables a fast-moving MS in a micro cell to be handed over to a macro cell. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. Preparation Table 68-6 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring speed-sensitive handover Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX HOCTRLSWITCH QCKMVHOEN Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index HO Control Switch MS Fast Moving HO Allowed Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Postrequisite l Verifying layered and hierarchical handover 1. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. For details. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The speed-sensitive handover function is not license-controlled. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Level HO Allowed to NO(NO). Ltd. verify that certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_better_cell. 2.. 68-13 . 68.

2. In addition. l Deactivating speed-sensitive handover 1. QCKMVHOEN=YES..5 s] and HCS HO valid time[0.7 Configuring Directed Retry Directed retry is a special handover. verify that certain cause information elements in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_better_cell. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set MS Fast Moving HO Allowed to YES(YES). In this way. and Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO[s]. thus preventing the load imbalance. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set MS Fast Moving HO Allowed to NO(NO). Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. the MS is handed over to a neighboring cell. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Postrequisite l Verifying speed-sensitive handover 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the BSC initiates the directed retry procedure if no TCH is available in the serving cell or the load of the serving cell is heavy. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. Scenario The number of call access failures due to TCH congestion in the serving cell is reduced. set HCS HO watch time[0. the traffic load in each cell is balanced.5 s] by running the SET CELLHOBASIC command on the Local Maintenance Terminal. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. For details. During the assignment process. MS Fast-moving Valid Cells. and the call setup success rate is increased. set the following parameters as required: l When HO Control Switch is set to HOALGORITHM2(HO Algorithm II). run the SET CELLHOAD command to set the following parameters: MS Fast-moving Watch Cells. Impact NEs Involved BSC 68-14 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO. CELLIDX=0. MS Fast-moving Time Threshold[s]. 68. Step 2 Then. Ltd. None.68 Configuring Handover HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l l ----End Example An example script for configuring the speed-sensitive handover function is as follows: /*Configure speed-sensitive handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX.

run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Directed Retry to NO(NO). ----End Example An example script for configuring the directed retry function is as follows: /*Configure directed retry*/ MOD CELLBASICPARA: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Postrequisite l Verifying directed retry 1. For details. After the Abis interface tracing window is displayed. Preparation Table 68-7 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring directed retry Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX DIRECTRYEN Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Direct Retry Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. l Deactivating directed retry 1. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. 68. Verify that the hando_det message is not displayed. the hando_det message is displayed. DIRECTRYEN=YES. 2.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Prerequisite l The directed retry function is not license-controlled. CELLIDX=0. Ltd.8 Configuring Chain Cell Handover The chain cell handover function enables a fast-moving MS to be preferentially handed over to a chain neighboring cell. run the MOD CELLBASICPARA command to set Directed Retry to YES(YES). see Tracing RSL Messages on the Abis Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide.. Verifying deactivation of directed retry: The operations are the same as those for Verifying directed retry. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Start the tracing of RSL messages on the Abis interface. 2. 68-15 .

the handover success rate of a fast-moving MS is increased.5s] Quick Handover Last Time [0.. Ltd. which is controlled by the setting of Chain Neighbor Cell.68 Configuring Handover HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Scenario With this function. The target cell must be a chain neighboring cell of the serving cell.5s] Quick Handover Punish Time[s] Quick Handover Punish Value[dB] Quick Handover Offset [dB] Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 HOALGORITHM1 (HO Algorithm I) YES(YES) 50 50 35 4 3 10 63 68 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 68-16 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Impact NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l l The chain cell handover function is not license-controlled. and the call continuity and low call drop rate are ensured. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . selected routes. This function applies to the urban backbone roads. Preparation Table 68-8 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring chain cell handover Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX HOCTRLSWITCH QUICKHOEN HOUPTRIGE HODOWNTRIGE MOVESPEEDTHRES HOSTATICTIME HOLASTTIME TIMEPUNISH HOPUNISHVALUE HOOFFSET Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index HO Control Switch Quick Handover Enable Quick Handover Up Triger Level[dB] Quick Handover Down Triger Level[dB] Quick Move Speed Thres[m/s] Quick Handover Static Time[0. and high-speed railroads. None.

5s]. Quick Move Speed Thres[m/s]. HOLASTTIME=3. run the MOD CELLHOFAST command to set the parameters including Quick Handover Up Triger Level[dB]. MOVESPEEDTHRES=35. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM1. Quick Handover Down Triger Level[dB]. None. Postrequisite l Verifying chain cell handover 1. ----End Example An example script for configuring the chain cell handover function is as follows: /*Configure chain cell handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Quick Handover Static Time[0. For details. 68. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Quick Handover Enable to YES(YES) and set PBGT Watch Time [s] and PBGT Valid Time[s] as required. CELLIDX=0. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. TIMEPUNISH=10. CELLIDX=0. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the better cell handover is the specific handover decision in handover algorithm II. QUICKHOEN=YES. 68-17 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . NEs Involved BSC Prerequisite l The better cell handover function is not license-controlled. verify that the values of certain cause information elements (IEs) in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_better_cell. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. HOOFFSET=68. l Deactivating chain cell handover 1. Step 2 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. 2. Scenario Impact None. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Quick Handover Enable to NO(NO).9 Configuring Better Cell Handover Evolving from the inter-layer handover and PBGT handover in handover algorithm I.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Quick Handover Last Time [0. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. MOD CELLHOFAST: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. Ltd. Quick Handover Punish Time[s]. HOUPTRIGE=50. and Quick Handover Offset[dB].5s]. HOPUNISHVALUE=63.. Quick Handover Punish Value[dB]. HOSTATICTIME=4. HODOWNTRIGE=50.

. For details. CELLIDX=0. BETTERCELLLASTTIME=2. BETTERCELLHOEN=YES. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) 68-18 . Preparation Table 68-9 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring better cell handover Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX HOCTRLSWITCH BETTERCELLHOEN BETTERCELLSTATTIME BETTERCELLLASTTIME Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index HO Control Switch Better Cell Handover Enable Better Cell HO Watch Time[s] Better Cell HO Valid Time[s] Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 HOALGORITHM2 (HO Algorithm II) YES(YES) 3 2 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. see Tracing BSSAP Messages on the A Interface in the BSC LMT User Guide. ----End Example An example script for configuring the better cell handover function is as follows: /*Configure better cell handover*/ SET CELLHOBASIC: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. HOCTRLSWITCH=HOALGORITHM2. Ltd. Start the tracing of the BSSAP messages on the A interface. 2. verify that the values of certain cause information elements (IEs) in the Handover Performed message (intra-BSC handover) or Handover Required message (inter-BSC handover) are ecv_norm_a_better_cell. run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Better Cell Handover Enable to YES(YES) and set Better Cell HO Watch Time[s] and Better Cell HO Valid Time[s] as required. After the A interface tracing window is displayed. Postrequisite l Verifying better cell handover 1. BETTERCELLSTATTIME=3.68 Configuring Handover l HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) The better cell handover function is effective only when HO algorithm II is enabled. l Deactivating better cell handover Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

run the SET CELLHOBASIC command to set Better Cell Handover Enable to NO(NO). 68-19 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 68 Configuring Handover 1. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd..

.

If full-rate channels are used over the Um interface.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 69 Configuring Flex Ater 69 Scenario Impact None. Prerequisite l The Flex Ater function is not license-controlled. If half-rate channels are used over the Um interface. Ltd. Preparation Table 69-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Flex Ater Parameter ID ATER8KSW ATERCONGSTRATIO ATERCONGHRFLAG Parameter Name Switch of 8K On Ater Congestion Ratio on Ater Resource[%] HR Allocation Flag while Ater Resource Congested Example YES 85 Open Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the Ater resources are allocated according to the service type during a call connection. the 8 kbit/s Ater resources are allocated.. NEs Involved BSC Configuring Flex Ater With the Flex Ater function. When the TC subrack is configured remotely. the expenditure on transmission on the Ater interface is effectively reduced. run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set Switch of 8K On Ater to YES. 69-1 . the 16 kbit/s Ater resources are allocated.

start the querying of the Ater resources. In the displayed querying results. AterCongHRFlag=Open. verify that part of the occupied Ater resources is 8 kbit/s Ater resources. Ltd. For details. run the DSP CHNSTAT command to monitor the channel status. 69-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. the congestion of Ater resources is alleviated. If you detect that any half-rate channel is occupied. In this manner. AterCongstRatio=85. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l Verifying Flex Ater 1. see Maintaining Ater Interface Resources in the BSC LMT User Guide. 2. and the processing capability of the system is improved. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . make a call using an MS supporting half-rate channels. In a cell using half-rate channels. 3. and hold on the call. l Deactivating Flex Ater 1. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. the half-rate Ater resources are preferentially allocated through the settings of Congestion Ratio on Ater Resource(%) and HR Allocation Flag while Ater Resource Congested.69 Configuring Flex Ater HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) When the Ater resources are insufficient. run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set Switch of 8K On Ater to NO.. ----End Example An example script for configuring the Flex Ater function is as follows: /*Configure Flex Ater*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: Ater8KSw=YES.

see Activate BSC License. For details.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 70 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup 70 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup When the active SDH transmission link is faulty due to a natural disaster. Scenario Impact This feature is applicable in the case of Abis over TDM and not applicable in the case of Abis over IP. Ltd. None. the GBSS automatically switches the terrestrial TDM transmission link on the Abis interface to a backup satellite transmission link. 70-1 .. This function is applied only in the case of Abis over TDM. NEs Involved BSC and BTS Prerequisite l l The Abis transmission backup function is license-controlled. Activate the license on the Local Maintenance Terminal. thus maintaining the normal operation of the network. l Preparation Table 70-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring Abis transmission backup Parameter ID IDXTYPE BTSIDX TRANSMODE Parameter Name Index Type BTS Index Transmission Mode Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 TER_AND_SAT_T RANS(Terrestrial and Satellite Transmission) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.

Postrequisite l Deactivating Abis transmission backup 1. ----End Example An example script for configuring the Abis transmission backup function is as follows: /*Configure Abis transmission backup*/ MOD BTSTRANS: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. TransMode=TER_AND_SAT_TRANS. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . BTSIDX=0. run the MOD BTSTRANS command to set Transmission Mode to TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite Transmission).70 Configuring Abis Transmission Backup HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd. 70-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. run the MOD BTSTRANS command to set Transmission Mode to a value other than TER_AND_SAT_TRANS(Terrestrial and Satellite Transmission).

None. NEs Involved BSC. thus facilitating fault rectification. and MSC/VLR Prerequisite l The function of end-to-end MS signaling tracing is not license-controlled. 71-1 .HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 71 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing 71 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing The function of end-to-end MS signaling tracing enables the tracing of faults of an NE based on the collected information about specified users with only a small number of resources occupied. HLR.. Preparation Table 71-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring end-to-end MS signaling tracing Parameter ID END2ENDTRACESTATE AINTERMSGTRACE Parameter Name Support end-to-end user tracing function Trace A interface messages[end-to-end user tracing] Support BSS INVOKE TRACE message report [end-to-end user tracing] Example YES(YES) YES(YES) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning HOCTRLSWITCH YES(YES) Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Ltd. Scenario Impact The information about the whole procedure related to a faulty user is collected.

and Support BSS INVOKE TRACE message report[end-to-end user tracing] to YES(YES). Verify that at least one single-user tracing task that is initiated at the network side is present. l Deactivating end-to-end MS signaling tracing 1. Use the test MS to initiate a call. ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of end-to-end MS signaling tracing is as follows: /*Configure end-to-end MS signaling tracing*/ SET OTHSOFTPARA: End2EndTraceState=YES. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . Trace A interface messages[end-to-end user tracing].. For details. 71-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. see Maintaining Ater Interface Resources in the BSC LMT User Guide. Postrequisite l Verifying end-to-end MS signaling tracing 1. run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set Support end-to-end user tracing function to NO(NO). Ltd. 2.71 Configuring End-to-End MS Signaling Tracing HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Start the tracing task management on the Abis interface. On the Local Maintenance Terminal. SendBssInvokeTrace=YES. AInterMsgTrace=YES. run the SET OTHSOFTPARA command to set Support end-to-end user tracing function. 3.

With this function. Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 0 0 Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Network planning 72-1 Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 72 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment 72 Scenario Impact None.. Channel No. Preparation Table 72-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring PDCH dynamic adjustment Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX TRXBN CHNO Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index TRX Board No. maintenance and configuration workloads are reduced. . Ltd. Prerequisite l l l The PDCH dynamic adjustment function is not license-controlled. and the channel utilization and network capacity are improved. An external PCU is configured. The GPRS/EGPRS services are configured. the impact of GPRS services on the original GSM voice services is minimized. NEs Involved BSC Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment The function of PDCH dynamic adjustment enables the automatic conversion between TCHs and PDCHs as required instead of configuring fixed PDCHs.

----End Example An example script for configuring the function of PDCH dynamic adjustment is as follows: /*Configure PDCH dynamic adjustment*/ MOD CHAN: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. run the MOD CHAN command to set Channel Type to DPDCH(Dynamic PDCH). Postrequisite l Deactivating PDCH dynamic adjustment 1. run the MOD CHAN command to set Channel Type to DPDCH(Dynamic PDCH). Ltd. CHNO=0. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) . TRXBN=0. CHTYPE=DPDCH. 72-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co.72 Configuring PDCH Dynamic Adjustment HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Parameter ID CHTYPE Parameter Name Channel Type Example DPDCH(Dynamic PDCH) Source Network planning Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. CELLIDX=0.. On the Local Maintenance Terminal.

. this function provides circuit PS services with a higher bandwidth.4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data Huawei GBSS supports the use of a single CS channel for transmitting PS services. NEs Involved BSC and MSC Prerequisite l l l l The function of 14.4 kbps CSD services. The IWF is configured in the MSC. The PS services are enabled in the HLR for the corresponding users.HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) 73 Configuring 14.4 kbps circuit switched data is not license-controlled. Ltd. including the 14. Preparation Table 73-1 Example of the data negotiated and planned for configuring 14.4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data 73 Configuring 14. The MS must support the PS services. None.4 Kbps circuit switched data Parameter ID IDXTYPE CELLIDX DATATRAFFSET Parameter Name Index Type Cell Index Data service Allowed Example BYIDX(By Index) 0 T14_4K(4) Source Network planning Network planning Network planning Issue 01 (2010-05-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co. Scenario Impact Compared with ordinary circuit PS services. 73-1 .

73 Configuring 14. run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to set Data service allowed to T14_4K(4). On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Postrequisite l Deactivating 14. run the MOD CELLOTHEXT command to clear T14_4K(4) in the Data service allowed drop-down list. 73-2 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co..4 Kbps Circuit Switched Data HUAWEI BSC6000 Base Station Controller BSS Feature Configuration Guide(Based on MML) Procedure Step 1 On the Local Maintenance Terminal. Ltd.4 Kbps circuit switched data 1.4 Kbps circuit switched data is as follows: /*Configure 14. ----End Example An example script for configuring the function of 14. CELLIDX=0. DATATRAFFSET=T14_4K-1.4 Kbps circuit switched data*/ MOD CELLOTHEXT: IDXTYPE=BYIDX. Issue 01 (2010-05-20) .